Home

Service Bulletins

Contents

1. SENSITIVE MATERIAL LIMITED DISTRIBUTION X Internal Polaroid Pack X U S Service Centers 4X5 X International Film Mfg Large Format International Subsidiaries X Integral 35mm All Ref Lotus Notes 950919130350EJ Starting in August 1995 all hybrid IV products T 600 HD Spectra Image T 990 Grid Film Captiva JoyCam Vision have been manufactured with a low smear reagent This reagent significantly reduces the appearance of pod smear streaks in light color backgrounds or scenes There is no change to the frame code but all of the above products with 085 as the first three characters of the code are the new low smear product The pack expiration date has been changed from Aug 96 to Aug 96 the slash representing the inclusion of low smear reagent OSU A POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP INTRODUCTION Polaroid Marketing is re launching the Spectra and Image family of cameras These cameras include Image A Image 2 Spectra A Spectra 2 All four models are sold in International Markets while the America s Market is limited to the Spectra A and Spectra 2 models INTERNATIONAL MARKET see Figure 1 gold color mid cover graphics gold hot stamped erect and door latch buttons new front decorative plates which have
2. Int l EXP SUB NPINO SPEC 94 16 SPECIAL DATE JUNE 15 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM ED DACEY INTRODUCTION OF LIGHT LOCK CLOSEUP UNIT SUBJECT DESCRIPTION Polaroid will soon market a closeup lens unit called Light Lock see Figure 1 Light Lock is designed to snap onto the front of all Image and Spectra cameras except for ProCam when a closeup exposure is desired It emits two light beams which when crossed indicate that the proper focus distance of 10 inches 25 4 cm has been achieved Simply placing the subject at the light beam cross ing point assures proper exposures for closeup images Once Light Lock is activated the aiming lights will stay on for 15 seconds before shutting off The unit uses two AA replaceable alkaline batter ies that will be included To take exposures at normal distances Light Lock can easily be removed from the camera An illustrated instruction decal is adhered to the top of the unit The decal shows how to install Light Lock on the camera how to turn the unit on how to achieve proper focusing distance and how to remove the unit For those scenes which may cause the aiming light beams to be invisible or very difficult to see Light Lock will also be equipped with a draw string measuring tape Light Lock is manufactured for Polaroid by an external vendor A manufacturing date code is loc
3. passes name badges for seminars conferences and trade shows IDs for short term workers and promotional souvenirs at theme parks concerts and public events BadgeCam is easy to use produces up to 200 ready to use badges hour no die cutting or laminating needed and uses standard Polaroid 95 Film The special BadgeCam Date model PID z 619411 imprints a settable date stamp on each badge New BadgeCam Camera makes attractive instant badges on Polaroid 95 Film THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS BadgeCam introduction cont d BADGECAM OPERATION The BadgeCam produces an instant print containing both the subject s portrait and the elements of custom designed artwork It does this by exposing the portrait image onto the film through an acetate overlay which contains the individual artwork see Fig 1A amp 1B The overlay can be placed in either the camera or in the film pack The portrait area of the badge may be at either the center left or right side see Fig 2A amp 2B To be sure the camera is correctly aimed for the particular portrait position chosen three framing ovals on the BadgeCam s special Taking Mirror Carrier appear in the View finder see Fig 3 These oval shaped outlines also guide the opera tor in obtaining correct head size in the portrait image In addition the BadgeCam has a special Lens Assembly to prov
4. Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 95 24 SPECIAL DATE APRIL 20 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO pee RUSSELL D BATTLE FROM TROUBLESHOOTING MIRROR TRAVEL PROBLEMS IN JOSHUA TMC SUBJECT TAKING MIRROR CARRIER BACKGROUND A number of telltale signs of mirror travel obstruction in the Joshua series cameras TMC Taking Mirror Carrier have now been identified and effective solutions developed to correct them Attached to this Product Alert is a list of common symptoms common causes and troubleshooting procedures for TMC travel problems Please note that this information should be used in conjunction with the recently released videotape T M C Troubleshooting Guide which was sent to certain key repair facilities A copy of this Videotape is available from Camera Products Services Tech nical Services Dept 1A2 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 When ordering please refer to this Product Alert JOSH 95 dated 3 17 95 and the videotape name T M C Troubleshooting Guide p THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS IDENTIFYING AND 3 17 95 CORRECTING MIRROR TRAVEL PROBLEMS IN THE JOSHUA TAKING MIRROR CARRIER TMC Common symptoms of Mirror travel problems Black bar
5. Part Name BadgeCam Part BadgeCam Date Part Lens Assembly 3 5 1 1m focus 1A2976B 1A2976B Taking Mirror Carrier Assy TAZ MLO Ce sods she sods oss 1A2110C Shutter Decorative Plate TAZ VS Lies sate ee es 1A2157M TOD COV Stes kee eh a a eaten se Cee LAZU S SKA cers eee ee VAZIS STs Baseblock ASSY wsesa eee rawra yee LAZO ISB wee e pees LAZS TSE A limited supply of the unique BadgeCam and BadgeCam Date parts listed above will available from Material Services in Bedford MA CONFIGURATION Configuration letter F 10th character of serial number will be used to identify the BadgeCam and BadgeCam Date Camera models CAMERA WARRANTY BadgeCam Cameras are warranted for five years from purchase date BadgeCam Date Cameras have a lifetime warranty NOTE These Warranty periods may differ in certain countries BadgeCam Introduction cont d 4 ACETATE OVERLAY WARRANTY Acetates overlays which are installed in the Camera Mainframe as contrasted with acetate overlays in film packs are warranted by the distributor who supplies them not by Polaroid for five years from date of camera purchase SERVICE BadgeCam Cameras will be serviced at regional centers in Atlanta Enschede NPKK etc At the present time the acetate overlays are being supplied by autho rized dealers not by Polaroid Consequently if the customer experi en
6. Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 8 SPECIAL DATE FEB 2 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE SUBJECT SERVICING JOSHUA CAMERA JAMS BACKGROUND Film jams are one of the leading reasons Joshua Cameras are being returned by cus tomers Generally analysis of these returned Cameras reveals that mid cycle has occurred POLICY It is recommended that all Joshua Cameras have the new 5 Wire Detail Switch P N 1A2708A If a Camera is returned for repair for any reason then the 5 Wire Detail Switch and Drive Cover shall be changed if not already present to the latest configuration REDESIGNED 5 WIRE DETAIL SWITCH AND DRIVE COVER H n on going concentrated engineering efforts to significantly reduce the mid cycl problem Camera Design has made several design changes in certain parts and these hanges have been implemented in Cameras manufactured as early as April 1993 Q The purpose of this Product Alert is to explain in which Joshua Cameras by Serial Number and Configuration a redesigned 5 Wire Detail Switch and two versions of the D t rive Cover should be used during servicing Table A later in this bulletin details he correct application of these parts THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS A SHC DTTUTCUC C U N COCO titdG Servicing Joshu
7. 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission v4 Product Alert Bulle in Polaroid Knowledge Base o PA Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 08 04 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980804154701JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Received on Film Expanded Highlights for ver 564 Details Diagrams Highlights of Version 564 35mm Bulk Camera Back Support Faster SCSI Printing via Block Mode High Density Deflection for smoother images Dither Modifications Film name and resolution displayed during R amp G portions of exposure Artifact Warning Signs on LCD Improved ability to mix resolutions within a batch Error log kept in flash memory Hardware configurations display in LCD Bug fixes 35mm Bulk Camera Back Support Initial support for the bulk camera back from Double M The CFR will detect and display the bulk back on the LCD whenever it is mounted To expose bulk images use the standard 35mm drivers and film tables Faster SCSI Printing via Block Mode SCSI block mode is activated to cut exposure times Requires RP95 version 1 49 or later and Mac driver 4 0 4 or later To get the full soeedup one needs a relatively recent logic board H configuration or later i e logic board version 7 or later High Density Deflection for Smoother Images
8. Spectra US Image NPKK Image SE Elite 610002R 691364 TBD A 610000S TBD TBD 2 615203R TBD TBD CAMERA REPAIR CI amp L Parts will order a two year supply of current design externals A separate Product Alert will be issued defining interchangeability of new and old parts and part numbers of the new external parts A T o POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO SPEC 95 18 SPECIAL DATE MARCH 21 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM ED DACEY SUBJECT MISMATCH OF SPECTRA IMAGE FRONT DOOR AND BOTTOM COVER BACKGROUND To replenish repair inventories a quantity of front doors for older style Spectra Image models was made by Camera Manufacturing However these doors have a new draft angle on the trailing edge the part that pivots against the bottom cover when the door is opened This new angle was initiated as part of the restyling program for the Spectra Image family and was carried forward when the old style doors were made When a front door with the new draft angle is installed on a camera with an old bottom cover an unacceptable mismatch occurs see illustration To resolve this problem follow the procedure below MISMATCH EXAGGERATED FOR CLARITY DRAFT ANGLE PROCEDURE If you mus
9. SUBJECT NEW CAPTIVA QPS PREMIUM CAMERA PID 1A2614 A limited quantity of a Captiva Cameras for use as a premium in the U S market was manufactured in the first quarter of 1994 The Camera is identical to the present Captiva except for QPS im printed on the Top Cover P N 1A2933J see Fig 1 Polaroid captiva SLR Fig 1 Top Cover of Captiva QPS premium Camera THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS y A E eee POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 15 SPECIAL DATE JULY 11 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE SUBJECT NEW JOSHUA PICK ASSEMBLY P N T12540SK09 The Pick Assembly P N 1A2540A used in Joshua Cameras from 1992 until mid June 1993 was redesigned in 1993 The new design has been used in all Joshua Cameras since mid June 1993 The new Pick Assembly is P N T12540SK09 and is shown in Fig 1 It is easily dif ferentiated from the earlier design by the absence of the flag on the Pick Carrier s dotted outline identified by arrow in Fig 1 and by the reduced tab height balloon callout NOTE The new Pick Assembly P N T12540SK09 MUST BE USED in Joshua series
10. TO LIST FROM DICK CURTIS SUBJECT LOWER MEMBER REWORK FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH WISTA amp LINKHOF TECHNIKA CAMERAS BACKGROUND Manufacturing at the Vale of Leven in Scotland has initiated a rework on the Lower Member of 5451 Filmholders The purpose of the rework is to make the 545i compatible with Wista and Linkhof Technika cameras As seen on the attached Deviation Notice the 5 776 dimension of the Lower Mem ber has been changed to 6 00 IDENTIFICATION As a result of this modification the part number of the Lower Member changes from 1D1059A to 1D1059B Additionally the configuration code of 545i Filmholders made with the modified Lower Member has changed from B to C and starting with lot 021 master shipping cartons and individual shipping cartons containing the modified Filmholder carry a date code of H4 Over THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS L 2 t DoS uu de 0 au DEVIATION NOTICE PRODUCT 5454 FILM HOLDER DEV NO visz4 DATE Tate SPEC DWG TITLE LOWER MEMBER SE ATDAN ENS j INITIATING ENGR GATE APPACVE SPEC NO DWG NO 1D1059A F Sadler 06 06 94 APPROVAL DESCRIPTION Fy wd Fou er a ae 2 PACs ka GG PRC MGR a groo OES ENGAG ELEC DEPT SUPV ORASTING ST Ma ons ee i DIR SYS ENGRS 1s i a r y CORP Q A Pi i 433 wera one PT ENG O a R
11. Caution The wires connecting to the door switches are very short and can easily detach from the door switch LED s To remove the cover without damaging the wiring First gently pull up the cover from the base and tilt it to the left side of the scanner approx 45 degrees Second while the cover is tilted detach the three connectors from the main logic board before lifting off the cover 3 Reconnect the CCD cable If the cable has detached from the back of the CCD board take care not to move the position of the CCD board when reattaching the cable Do not loosen the two screws that fix the board assembly to the scanner chassis Needle nose pliers appear to be the most effective tool for this operation 4 Apply RTV also called silicone sealer using a cotton tipped applicator see Figure 4 to fix the CCD cable connector to the header on the CCD board see Figure 3 Coat both the top and bottom sides of the connectors with the sealant material 5 Repeat the procedure on the CCD cable connector end that connects to the Main Circuit board Coat both sides of this connector 6 Reassemble the scanner and test its operation 2 inches 5 cm Step 1 Lift Cover Step 2 Tilt cover to left side Figure 1 Removing the Scanner Cover Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any que
12. CPS EXP SUB SPECIAL TECH SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS MATERIAL SVCS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE ELIMINATE LOW LEVEL NOISE BACKGROUND TECHNICAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT P A NO 35mmScan 94 1 DATE November 28 1994 MANUFACTURING QUALITY MFG ENG DESIGN ENG Engineering has authorized a running change in 35mm Scanner Controller Boards 1E6535A The purpose of the change is to address customer complaints regarding low level noise seen in the dark portions of some images The change involves the installation of a new diode on the board ACTION If you receive a customer complaint which leads you to believe that a low level noise problem is the cause examine the controller board to determine whether new diode D3 has been installed If it has not install the diode according to the procedure which follows SUBJECT ELECTRONICS CHANGE IN 35MM SCANNER CONTROLLER BOARDS TO THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Part Required One National 1N914 or 1N4148 diode or equivalent Procedure 1 Locate microprocessor U14 on the controller board see Figure 1 2 Using an X acto knife cut the traces from VDD to Pins 10 and 11 of U14 see Figure 2 3 Bend the legs of the new diode to allow the anode leg to be soldered to pin 1 of R58 and the cathode leg to be soldered across pins 10 and 11 of U14 see Figure 3 NOTE For Controller Board
13. Polaroid ColorShot General Bulletin V1 N1 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN cra 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot USB Vol 1 No 7 From New Products Service Support Group Date November 24 1998 Subject IQA Version Conflict with PolaColor Insight v 2 X e Category Software Info Bulletin The purpose of this message is to alert Telephone Service and Repair providers about a software conflict with PolaColor Insight version 2 X The conflict will only occur if the user has version 1 03 or earlier of the USB software Its expected that this problem will mostly be seen by Polaroid Sales and Service personnel e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot USB printers operating with version 1 01 1 02 or 1 03 or earlier Beta versions of the software running under the Windows 95 or Windows 98 OS e Details The user has any version prior to 1 1 of the ColorShot USB software installed and working normally After PolaColor Insight Version 2 X is installed an error is reported when the user tries to print using the ColorShot The error message reads Polaroid ColorShot internal software error The error occurs after the Preview window comes up and you click the printer icon at the top The same error will also occur when the user tries to print without using the Preview feature e Resolution You can find out what version of software is installed on a user s PC with one of
14. Unique Parts Except for the parts listed below the 636 AF camera uses a combination of parts from the 636 camera the Impulse shutter and Joshua electronics Electronic Flash Lower Housing Assembly 1A2965A Graphic Gripper U S iach ove a iiias 1B2984C Graphic Gripper International eee 1B2984D Trim Button Retainer 5 025 sescasesesnacesseesd vgancncetoesas 550277C PAm PAUL OU icc dea pesee saute aT 1A2942A A DROW sere kcn aise ces aaa teeta eee eae 1A2959A Pront P AGE foscosinceciges e OR 1A2957A Front Plate Panel Decal 2ucc Gases ee 1A2958A Configuration Label cc eeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 778006J EN OAP PWG ah cle Sosa duce aids deste da hedonaciedeaiast 1A2975A z worth BUOD sise eraa a a RR 1A2968A Z CONE ht A ete AY Se ese Mele aioe T5599 1E Lens Shutter Assembly 0 ccececeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeees 1A2950A Exposure Flex Assembly cceesesecreeseeeees 1D5665A BASE DIOCK lt spictsceadpebaucastedentnton a ETa 1A2943A Blade Assembly Set Of 3 0 cceeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeees 1A2946A Lens WMOun tine Plates 3 5sccocectontstaesdagictede eedasiageass 1A2945A Ambient Photometer Lens 1 0 0 0 eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneees 1A2953A Photometer IR Lens ois sos scredsneesisanstesaseacassnctaacsasts 1A2954A JIR PWH ee are ra eE conse ear aa eee 1A2971A Ambient Pin whGel 335 2hecccedaacajeanssnevsedadedasaocseadanscs 1A2970A Logic Board Assembly 5 s03c aes
15. 2 Remove the six Philips screws that affix the cover to the base of the SprintScan 45 3 After removing the screws turn the unit over so that the front end of the scanner faces to your right 4 Slowly lift the cover off the unit Note that the cover can only be partially lifted off as you will need to disconnect a lead from the LED panel on the cover that connects to the main circuit board in the base of the unit 5 Connect the anti static wrist strap ground clip to bare metal on the carriage assembly but not on the two carriage chromed rails and the wrist strap to the wrist you will use to handle the EPROM s 6 The two EPROM s can be viewed and removed through the cut out in the center of the cast metal carriage assembly Remove the old EPROM s 7 The two new EPROM s U49 and U50 need to be put back in the correct sockets See illustration below 8 Reassemble and test Front of scanner Rear of scanner Cutout in Carriage assy Version 1 80 firmware will be stocked by Parts Logistics The set of EPROM firmware U49 and U50 is available as Part Number 542 21 327512 Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N11 Page 2 of 3 CAUTION If othe
16. Among the other features of these drives are e the drive heads never come in contact with the disk surface e on the fly error correction e all of the benefits of removable storage including unlimited capacity off line storage data transportability data security fast backups SPECIFICATIONS PictureDrive 270 Interface SCSI II Capacity 256MB or 105MB formatted minimum Performance average seek time 13 5 msec average latency 8 33 msec sustained data transfer rate 2 4 MB per sec buffer size 128K Reliability non recoverable data errors 1 in 10 bits MTBF 100 000 hours power on time cartridge insertions 20 000 cycles minimum component design life 5 years PictureDrive 200 Interface SCSI II Capacity 200MB 88 8MB or 44 39MB formatted minimum Performance average seek time 18 0 msec 200MB cartridge average latency 9 32 msec sustained data transfer rate 2 0 MB per sec 200MB cartridge buffer size 64K Reliability non recoverable data errors 1 in 10 bits MTBF 100 000 hours power on time cartridge insertions 20 000 cycles minimum component design life 5 years SPECIFICATIONS Continued PictureDrive 88 Interface SCSI II Capacity 88 8MB or 44 39MB formatted minimum Performance average seek time 20 msec 88MB cartridge average latency 9 32 msec buffer size 32K Reliability non recoverable data errors 1 in 10 bits MTBF 100 000 hours power on time cartridge insertions 20 000 cycles mini
17. CDG CDH thru CNG amp CNH COG COH thru DU DCG DH DJ DQ DV thru FD thru FQ a No longer on Mainframe Table A cont d ica ea ea Updated E New Viewfinder C Molded in Mainframe B issue 8 issue 8 issue 8 Blind guiding Use Drive Cover No T22067SKO1 T22067SKO1 T22067SKO1 Reuse same Drive Cover must have ramp and pin se same or new 1A2067A Cover se same or new 1A2067A Cover se same or new 1A2067A Cover Use same or new 1A2067A Cover Application of new parts Conte d on back Servicing Joshua Camera Jams cont d 65S INSTALLATION NOTE 5 WIRE DETAIL SWITCH After replacing the 5 Wire Detail Switch check to be sure that sufficient clearanc exists between th dge of the DKEC ground plane element and the Counter Wheel use a feeler gauge or shim stock to verify that a minimum of 0 020 0 51lmm to a nomi nal of 0 035 0 89mm exists see Fig 5 Also check that the DKEC wire element is centered over the DKEC ground plane ele ment for optimum operation COUNTER y TALR WHEEL SET NaN NOMINAL 035 C89numn MIN 020 51 mm Fig 5 Check clearance between DKEC ground plane and Counter Wheel PARTS AVAILABILITY The new parts listed in this Product Alert are available now from Material Services in Cambridge Order from normal sources A T ay
18. LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE zal JOSHUA 5 WIRE DETAIL SWITCH WITH GOLD PLATED GROUND PLAN BJECT SUBJEC CONTACTS P N 1A2708B H n continuing engineering efforts to reduce the midcycle problem in Joshua series cameras the 5 Wire Detail Switch P N 1A2708A has undergone two design changes The first change increased the ground plane contact area of the TRIM L D Switch and the DKEC Darkslide End of Cycle Switch This improvement is described and 4 illustrated in Product Alert JOSH 94 8 dated 2 2 94 The latest change embodies gold plating the ground plane switch contact elements to lower resistance and improve switching reliability Some Switches will have all ground plane contacts gold plated while others will have only certain elements gold plated All versions however may be used interchangeably The 5 Wire Detail Switch with gold plated contact areas has been incorporated in Cameras since mid February 1994 REPAIR POLICY All Cameras returned for repair should have the new 5 Wire Detail Switch 1A2708B nstalled along with other updating described in Product Alert JOSH 94 8 H PART AVAILABILITY This Switch P N 1A2708B will be available on and after the end of March 1994 from Material Services in Cambridge Order through normal sources THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT
19. Replacement controller PC boards P N AA0977A are available from Material Services Department Polaroid Corporation 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Please order from normal sources POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 35mm Scan 97 2 SPECIAL DATE August 1997 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO List FROM Gerald DiBello SUBJECT Modified CCD Board SS35 PLUS Background In order to improve the yield of CCD s manufactured by Polaroid the CCD has been modified The key element in the CCD modification is its blue filter portion All SS35 Plus slide scanners manufactured beginning July 1997 will include the modified CCD Info for Field Service Departments CCD Board Replacement New CCD Boards with the modified CCD are available as a replacement part for the repair of slide scanners with a defective CCD Board After the CCD Board is replaced in older models of slide scanners an internal Configuration Code must be changed to accept the replacement CCD Board Note The slide scanner s firmware does not have to be upgraded beyond the current 5 90 version The Configuration code is changed e Using the latest version 1 02 or higher of the LabVIEW IPT software After the installation of the new CCD Board
20. 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 2 No 7 From New Products Service Support Group Date May 15 1998 Subject SprintScan 45 Defective Power Supply Interconnect Cable e Category Product Alert The purpose of this message is to alert service providers regarding a potential problem affecting the SprintScan 45 e Products Affected SprintScan 45 and SprintScan 45 Pro e Details Erratic operation of the SprintScan 45 can in some instances be caused by a defective power interconnect cable assembly In two instances a defective power supply interconnect cable caused the following symptoms e Flickering lamp cold cathode fluorescent e Erratic motion of the carriage during scanning e Resolution A single cable assembly connects the power supply of the SprintScan 45 to J4 and J9 on the main circuit board When symptoms such as a flickering lamp or erratic carriage motion are seen check and or replace the power supply interconnect cable It is suggested that at least one known good cable assembly be on hand for quick substitution Spare cables can be ordered through normal sources Order Cable Power W Core part number AA0212A Polaroid Corporation Material Services 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Telephone 800 343 4846 or 781 386 5649 Fax 781 386 5606 cc mail Parts Department Polaroid com Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid
21. A THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS For details on how to change the Configuration code refer to the CCD Board Replacement procedure provided with this Product Alert The LabVIEW IPT tester software is used to change the Configuration code from its previous value of 0 to a new value of 1 in the slide scanner s EEPROM Note The Configuration code change gives new instructions to the slide scanner allowing it to work correctly with the modified CCD Once the Configuration code change is completed advise the Customer that version 2 7 or higher of the application software must be used Note Older versions of the application software will NOT work correctly with the modified CCD Info for Telephone Service Support CCD Board Replacement If a Customer reports image quality problems Example Color changes in scans especially in blue tones telephone support should include CCD Configuration code checks in their script If it s determined that the slide scanner has the wrong Configuration code for the type of CCD Board installed it is possible to have the Customer change it For details on how to change the Configuration code refer to the CCD Board Replacement procedure provided with this Product Alert Some reasons why the Configuration code may be incorrect e Configuration code was not changed after a defective CCD Board was replaced with a modified CCD Board e S
22. LIMITED DISTRIBUTION X Internal Polaroid Pack X U S Service Centers 4X5 International Film Mfg Large Format _X International Subsidiaries X Integral 35mm All DESCRIPTION Film Manufacturing has identified several T 331 film lots that were assembled with a reversed sheet When the sheet is reversed the fixing chemical layer is on the wrong side and causes the film image to remain soft and susceptible to damage Also the reversed sheet will develop crystals on the back black side of the frame several hours after processing The affected lots are numbered 08 14 060 through 08 14 063 This problem has been identified and corrected in manufacturing However some product was released to the field before the problem was discovered POLICY If a customer is known to have T 331 film from lots 08 14 060 through 08 14 063 or if you receive any complaints which could be related to this problem please replace the film Polaroid Corporation Consumer Services 784 Memorial Drive Cambridge MA 02139 4639 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR Harro E Limbo NOTICE 104127 REVIEW DATE 10 3 94 SUBJECT Discontinuation of T 2000 Film PRODUCT T 2000 Film SENSITIVE MATERIAL LIMITED DISTRIBUTION X Internal Polaroid X Pack U S Service Centers 4X5 International Film Mfg Large Format X International Subsidiaries Integral 35mm A
23. MATERIALS REQUIRED Black and Decker hot melt glue 22235 or equivalent RETAINING PLATE EXTENSION SPRING APPLY THIN BEAD POST 1 OF HOT MELT GLUE BOTH SIDES OF poera SOLENOID a ie S RZ A T eep POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB P A NO 1D100 94 1 SPECIAL DATE May 31 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM DWAYNE BILLINGSLEY NEW ID 100 INSTANT PHOTO IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM SUBJECT DESCRIPTION The ID 100 shown in the accompanying illustration is a new low cost portable ID Camera for making two identical or two different ID cards on one sheet of Polaroid film The System can use Polaroid T 669 Polacolor Polacolor ID Ultraviolet or Polacolor 100 film The System consists of the Camera Head Camera Stand Dust Cover Die Cutter and Laminator It is expected to be available mid second quar ter of 1994 PID numbers for Camera and Laminator model are ID 100 Camera Horizontal 110V 618294 ID 100 Camera Vertical 110V 618295 ID 100 Camera Horizontal 220V 618293 ID 100 Laminator 110V 618264 ID 100 Laminator 220V 618289 NOTE Initially the I
24. Three LCD Panel Overhead Projection systems Polaview 1500 1800 and 3000 have been recently introduced by Polaroid Each LCD panel is designed to convert an overhead projector into a computer output device The Polaview LCD panels are compatible with most PC s Apple Macintosh and IBM compatibles and will display resolutions up to 640 x 480 The Polaview 1500 uses Film Super Twist Nematic FSTN technology which is referred to as a passive matrix This panel is the least expensive of the three panels The Polaview 1800 and 3000 use Thin Film Transistor TFT technology which is referred to as an active matrix The TFT type has a brighter and higher contrast than the FSTN type Refer to the Comparison Chart at the end of this New Product Alert for specific information pertaining to the features of the new LCD panels Polaview 1500 1800 and 3000 and the existing DP2000 LCD panel THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS n S O Availability The Polaview LCD Panels 1500 1800 and 3000 will be available for sale during the second quarter of 1994 Service Policy U S The Polaview User Manual instructs the customer to call Polaroid Technical Assistance Hotline 1 800 225 1618 Mon Fri 8AM 8PM EST A Technical Assistance Representative in turn will advise and assist the Customer If the Technical Representative determines that remedial phone actions cannot resolve
25. are now designated as having a 15 month shelf life That is the expiration date indicated on the film package is 15 months beyond the date of manufacture as opposed to the current 12 month expiration dating All testing indicates that Hybrid IV and T 331 B amp W Autofilm chemistry is stable and produces accept able photos throughout the extended life of the film Data reviewed to verify this fact includes shelf life sensitometry and functional testing plus customer surveys and marketing information This change has been initiated with film manufactured in February 1994 As an example film manufac tured in February 1994 has an expiration date of May 1995 Polaroid Corporation Consumer Services 784 Memorial Drive Cambridge MA 02139 4639 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR E Dacey NOTICE 054125 REVIEW S King B Vaan Holt DATE May 31 1994 SUBJECT Yellow Blue Fogging PRODUCT T600 Plus T600 HD Spectra HD Image HD T779 T339 SENSITIVE MATERIAL LIMITED DISTRIBUTION Internal Polaroid Pack U S Service Centers 4X5 International Film Mfg Large Format International Subsidiaries Integral 35mm All PROBLEM Since the first quarter of 1992 the Waltham and Enschede Film Manufacturing facilities have produced film lots with a random fogging defect The film lots include T600 Plus T600 HD Spectra HD Image HD
26. 1 VRI Logic PC Board Note Refer to the autoluminant adjustment procedure in Section 5 of the CI3000 CI5000 Service Manual for the steps necessary to adjust the HR6000 autoluminant CRT CLAMP REPLACEMENT Always us a new clamp assembly PN 1A7065A if a CRT is removed or replaced Torque the new clamp assembly as follows CI3000 CI5000 HR6000 96 oz in 120 oz in NOTES m assy 164391 Figure 1 Monitor PC board y ee POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l E SUB SPECIAL TECH SERVICES QUAL CONTROL TO LIST FROM NICK CURRERI SUBJECT HR 6000 CONFIGURATION CHANGES The HR 6000 was produced in one configuration Configuration A However problems with the CRT s and with P A NO HR 6000 95 1 DATE January 3 1995 MAT L SERVICES OPERATIONS luminance stability produced the need for design changes leading to Configuration B These changes are de scribed in bulletin DIG PAL 95 6 As these changes were being phased in an unexpected change in phosphor lots by the CRT manufacturer CRT Scientific created the need for more redesign Examination of samples of the new CRT s showed red spectral transmission to be about 16 higher than before This forced another firmware change to better match the film tables to the new CRT s Accordingly there are now thre
27. APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 07 14 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980714142633JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Installation PCPlus Configuration Details Diagrams Category Performance PCPlus is a MS DOS based terminal emulation program that will allow an operator to access the ProPalette through its serial port for diagnostic purposes The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of the proper configuration parameters for using PCPlus Details The PCPlus executable must be in the system path and the following DOS environment variable must be established when PCPlus is used for serial communication with a ProPalette SET PCPLUS C PCPLUS The following parameters must be established within PCPlus Communication Parameters ALT P 8 data bits 1 stop bit 115200 baud rate or other Setup Utility ALT S non default parameters In PROTOCOL OPTIONS Menu Under GENERAL OPTIONS A Protocol timing NORMAL B Aborted downloads KEEP C Abort xfer if CD lost NO Under ASCII PROTOCOL OPTIONS A Echo lo
28. At the present time only JP501 has any functionality associated with it This jumper controls the Watchdog timer that prevents power on initialization errors Action Solution JP501 should be set according to the following table Normal usage is to enable the circuit Pin 1 2 Pin2 3 JP501 Disabled Enabled Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 04 02 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980402135536JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Camera Interface Test Tool Details Diagrams PURPOSE This document will describe the use of tool 13705 to troubleshoot and validate the camera connector for the ProPalette product line The switch configuration can be set to simulate all available cameras Additionally the functionality of the film door of the 35mm camera can be tested FUNCTIONALITY There is a bank of four dip switches located on the top of the tool Switches S1 S3 are used to select the camera back according to Table 1 Switch S4 is used
29. POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 9 SPECIAL DATE FEBRUARY 24 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS JOSH TO LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE SUBJECT JOSHUA SERIES CAMERAS CONFIGURATIONS A THROUGH D Configuration D has now been announced for all Joshua series Camer as indicating the addition of a Rear Lens Baffle which mates with a revised Baseblock and the crescent fix in all Joshua A Cameras The crescent fix is described in detail in another Joshua Product Alert The D designation appears as the 10th character of the 12 character serial number located on a label inside the Camera and visible when the Front Door is opened Previously announced Joshua configurations are summarized below Configuration Effective Description Letter Date A 7 29 92 Baseline Configuration B 3 15 93 Non Scratch Fix E 8 23 93 Date Camera Series Crescent Fix D 9 24 93 Added Rear Lens Baffle revised Baseblock Crescent Fix fully implemented by 9 27 93 On the reverse side of this bulletin is an explanation of the informa tion contained in the 12 character Serial Number code THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WH
30. Polaroid Archive Service Bulletins Published 1 94 through 10 00 This Archive contains a collection of service bulletins which have been written by members of the Polaroid Technical Support Organization Use the Bookmarks to the left to locate and open documents by product name and subject matter Americas Business Center Technical Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 TEL 1 781 386 5309 FAX 1 781 386 5988 Polaroid Corporation Customer Support Service 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 1406 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR H LIMBO NOTICE 024123 REVIEW B DONOVAN DATE FEBRUARY 2 1994 SUBJECT POLABLUE MYSTERY STREAKS CHANGEIN PRODUCT POLABLUE BN REFRIGERATED STORAGE RECOMMENDATION SENSITIVE MATERIAL LIMITED DISTRIBUTION LX Internal Polaroid Pack LX U S Service Centers 4X5 International Film Mfg Large Format LX International Subsidiaries Integral X 35mm All DESCRIPTION Since its introduction in 1987 PolaBlue has been plagued by a low level defect labeled by film manufacturing as Mystery Streaks These streaks are a form of processing streaks which can start at any point during processing have a wavy appearance a brownish stain and transfer of material to the backside of the film strip Film manufacturing has not been able to determine the cause of this defect but they
31. SCHRANDT DATE JANUARY 11 1995 SUBJECT INCOMPLETE COVERAGE AT TRAP END PRODUCT T 339 SENSITIVE MATERIAL LIMITED DISTRIBUTION X Internal Polaroid Pack X U S Service Centers 4X5 X International Film Mfg Large Format International Subsidiaries X Integral 35mm All Some random lots of T 339 film manufactured in 1994 have a potential of exhibiting incomplete coverage at the center of the trap end This potential problem depends upon the age of the film when it is used and the equipment which is used for processing If a customer reports film with this problem please replace it and return samples of the defective film to either Shari King R2 3 or Ed Dacey BED 1 1A If you have any questions call Shari King at 617 386 0184 PTN 226 0184 or Ed Dacey at 617 386 5490 PTN 226 5490 Polaroid Corporation Consumer Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 1406 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR SHARON KING NOTICE 015130 REVIEW M RENY DATE JANUARY 11 1995 SUBJECT COPY SERVICE MESSAGE ON PRODUCT SPECTRA SPECTRA FILM SENSITIVE MATERIAL LIMITED DISTRIBUTION X Internal Polaroid Pack X U S Service Centers 4X5 International Film Mfg Large Format International Subsidiaries X Integral 35mm All Starti
32. The customer has upgraded their Windows 95 to Windows 98 or is using a PC that came with Windows 98 As soon as the PolaColor Insight application opens the user gets a message stating that No scanners are found A check in the Device Manager shows a listing for a Scanner Polaroid Scanner or ADPT Scanner e Resolution Windows 98 includes a new technology to recognize scanners known as Still Imaging Using this new technology a scanner can operate under Windows 98 without TWAIN or ASPI Unlike Windows 95 Windows 98 recognizes a scanner as an Imaging Device PolaColor Insight version 2 will only recognize a scanner if it appears in the Device Manager as an Imaging Device When you launch PolaColor Insight and you see an error message telling you that no scanners are found it s probably not recognized as an Imaging device To fix the problem follow the steps below Step 1 Is the scanner seen in the Device Manager If it s listed as Unknown Device Scanner or Polaroid Scanner skip to Step 2 If there is no scanner listed read on 1a Note that the scanner is recognized a bootup time Plug amp Play adapters The first time you connect a scanner to a PC running Windows 98 you must see the scanner recognized during bootup In most cases you see the board s on screen listing just after the CNTRL gt A prompt listing for changing adapter configuration settings If the adapter has a BIOS you will see a listin
33. Used in Pro7000 and Pro8000 s Video Version 0 Prerelease video circuit where COS4 reference current relative to video current is 20 less than later designs Version 1 Uses 2 49K offset and gain resistors Version 2 Uses 3 01K offset and gain resistors for 20 increase in final video gain Bug Fixes More reliable high speed SCSI operation Improved accuracy of the buffer sizes reported to the host driver Customers may need the latest host side driver version s to get the full benefit Also fixed a small memory leak that occurred whenever resolutions changed within a batch Can no longer mix film tables between ProPalette models A FilmTable bad size error occurs if a Pro7000 table is downloaded to a Pro8000 or vice versa Fixed a bug in FWLOAD EXE that required one to have a dpalette cfg file SCSI now properly reports video not smooth and luma not smooth autoluma errors Heap and stack memory tuned up to work with the improved throughput Autoluma improvements Fixed bugs in autoluma sped up dark current measurement improved bottom level hunt COS4 Added adjustment for video version 0 hardware Analog Diagnostics Fixed horizontal and vertical size tests i oe test failure readout to LCD 564 Higsighighrghts doc Dist APPROVALS EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 08 12 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980812091236JF Product Group
34. Yes Heat Pressure 2 chip No One year No Optional 24 lbs 3214 0 7 10 8 kg 092 54 125 40 Yes Fixed Continuous adj 0 3 stop increm over 0 5 stop range Fixed Fixed 20 000 cycles one misfire 5000 cycles Variable 1 5 stop 0 3 stop increments Stored position TES xe Abe 5 xe TTS 45 x 36 8 x 28 7cm Open position 29 5 x Tae ox Iles 74 9 x 36 8 x 28 7cm ID 4 All Photo Yes H V 2 1 Up Fixed Yes 1 or 2 No Yes 2 Electronic Battery Moveable Yes Heat Pressure 1 amp 2 chip Yes One year Yes Yes 46 lbs 20 9 kg 3 1 4 3 1 2 amp 4 0 65 to 0 80 092 54 125 40 Yes Replaceable Continuous adj 1 5 stop increm over 1 5 stop range Variable 4 5 45 Fixed 25 000 cycles one misfire 5000 cycles Variable 1 5 stop Operating mode vert camera 31 23 KIZI R L125 80 0 x 58 4 x 28 6cm Carrying case w base handle folded Leh S723 XT is 25 45 1 x 58 4 x 28 6cm POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICALSERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO ID100 96 1 SPECIAL DATE JUNE 1996 TECH SERVICES MAT LSERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM DICK CURTIS DWA YNE BILLINGSLEY SUBJECT DATA SUBJECT STROBE PC BOARD UPDATE Proble
35. pann TEO Wr MGR PKG ENGAG vaere e INTERNATIONAL MEG 5 776 DIMENSION MAY BE MODIFIED TO 6 00 AS ABOVE y REASON hete MODIFICATION TO ELIMINATE INTERFERENCE WITH THE WISTA AND LINHOF TECHNIKA CAMERAS 5 A SUPPORT REFERENCES 7 MEMO DATED JUNE 6TH 1994 FROM PAUL CAMELLO TO PAUL TRUMBOUR a ON SUBJECT 545i LOWER MEMBER LINKAGE COVER CHANGE QUANTITY 8 0C TYPE TEMPORARY 7 DEVIATION IS TEMPORARY AND VALS ONLY COR THE SUANT TY AND TIME SPECIFIED TYOE DEVIATION TOES NOT APPEAR ON ORAWING exp DaTEJan TYPE 11 FOR UFE OF TOOL bs QUANTITY OEVIATION 15 FOR THE QUANTITY AND TIME SPECIFIED aud a COPY OF aPODgVES PEVIATION oo 2E on IN N PERVISOA ATION WILL 3E INDICATED ON THE DRAWING FOLLOWING STANQARD OSVIAT OS ENGINEERING CHANGE SUPERVISOR OEVIATIO A SE vo STENoanS OPAT S ERP DATE NOTICE PROCEDURES THE SIGNATURES USTED ABCVE aPPROVE THE CON DISTRIBUTION EXTENSIONS ant sarsmarinu Ati CASE NUMREPS WILL BE ASSIGNED BY P COULT DESIGN EPAETAG ome JYS POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB P A NO LCD 94 1 SPECIAL DATE JU Y 11 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM NICK CURRERI SUBJECT INTRODUCTION OF POLAROID LCD PANELS Introduction
36. please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N2 Page 1 of 2 SprintScan 45 Support PC Version 3 of PolaColor Insight fully supports the SprintScan 45 Batch scanning capability is not included in this version Users who require this capability can continue to use SprintScan version 1 0 3 Batch scanning capabilities will be added in future versions of PolaColor Insight for the PC Macintosh Batch scanning capability is supported in the Mac version of the software as a Scripted feature When running on a Macintosh system PolaColor Insight software can automatically execute multiple scans to capture several different areas of the image with different correction and scanning settings for each area This feature is explained in detail starting on page 68 of the Users Guide that s included on the Insight CD ROM Tone Curve Controls Tone curve correction is added in this version The tone curve correction controls appear on a new tab named Curves The user selects the Curves tab to define whitepoint or blackpoint or for adjusting highlights midtones or shadows using tonecurves correction The tone curves let the user selectively adjust the brightness values of the highlights shadows or the tones between them You can also independently adjust the red green or blue values individually SprintScan 4000 Support The new SprintScan 4000 is supported by Insight 3 When a SprintScan 4000 i
37. s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N7 Page 1 of 1 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croa 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 2 No 9 From New Products Service Support Group Date October 12 1998 Subject New SCSI Host Adapter for SS35 Plus amp LE e Category New Product Bulletin The purpose of this message is to alert service and telephone support providers regarding a new SCSI Host adapter board that will soon be bundled with new SprintScan 35 s e Products Affected SprintScan 35 Plus SprintScan 35LE e Details As of November 1998 approximate date a new PCI Plug and Play SCSI Host Adapter will be bundled with the SprintScan 35 Plus and LE Specifications for the new board are as follows Manufacturer Advansys www advansys com Model Number ABP 922 PID Number 629450 Computer Bus PCI Plug and Play SCSI Connector 25 Pin type D Device Protocol SCSI 1 SCSI 2 Fast SCSI 2 Device Support Up to 7 devices Features Multi tasking multithreaded I O disconnect reconnect synchronous and asynchronous data transfer ASPI compliant OS Support Windows 95 and 98 Windows NT4 Electrical Termination Active The board
38. to increase Red or to the right to decrease Red Make changes of no more than 0 05 gamma units Example 1 05 will increase Red significantly 0 95 will decrease Red significantly Repeat for other color channels if necessary This step is optional We recommend adjusting only one color channel at a time between exposures Expose the image and examine using the Export plug in is the fastest method Examine evaluate and repeat the process if necessary After a few iterations to get this right the new gamma settings can be saved and used for every image that comes from the same source and uses the same film table Since the final color balance is dependent on several factors the entire procedure would need to be repeated for other image sources and other film tables Note that by adjusting gamma as opposed to just the brightness and contrast the image data in the extremes deep shadows and bright highlights are preserved and clipping of the image is prevented APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 05 24 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990524104404JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Description of the FLASHMAN utility Category The purpose of this bulletin is to inform service provid
39. 02 or above POLAROID CORPORATION ConsumerServices Division TECHNICALSERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l exp E SUB P A NO 35 mm Scan 96 2 SPECIAL DATE March 1 1996 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT DRIVE MOTOR SCREW PITCH Scanner drive motors with an incorrect screw pitch of 06 have been mistakenly placed into stock The screw pitch for the scanner drive motor should be 074 When replacing a drive motor always make sure it has the correct screw pitch Figure 1 shows the correct drive motor type to be used If the drive motor is incorrect please send it back to materials control for replacement Type 4H4018S0465 Type 4H4018S0455 PN 9513 PN 9533 074 Pitch 06 Pitch Figure 1 Drive Motor THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS POLAROID CORPORATION ConsumerServices Division TECHNICALSERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l exp E SUB P A NO 35 mm Scan 96 3 SPECIAL DATE March 1 1996 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT STREAKS INDUCED BY ANALOG NOISE Problem SprintScan 35 mm scanners have been recently returned from the field with streaking problems induced by analog noise from
40. 618089 011 64 Enschede 618910 002 64 USA 618910 003 64 USA Vale of Leven Manufacturing has developed a repair procedure which has been distributed to appropri ate facilities If you receive any defective units forward them to Enschede or Oak Brook for repair If you have any quesitons concerning this Product Alert please call Stephen McGrogan at 240 2615 or Harro Limbo at 221 4424 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS L p A A ee POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A No MCAM 94 3 SPECIAL pate APRIL 15 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS FROM LIST H LIMBO Depending on the date of manufacture the serial number of the MicroCam can be located in two different places On units manufactured before June 1993 the serial number is located on the CB 33 Door Assembly P N 761143B On MicroCams manufactured in June or later the serial number was relocated to the inside of the MicroCam Main Housing P N 1D3427A adjacent to the CB 33 Main Frame In order to read the latter serial number the film cartridge must be removed f SUBJECT LOCATION OF SERIAL NUMBER ON MICROCAM 4 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS frame It has 7 or 8 chara
41. 7000 Products Affected ProPalette 8000 film recorder Actions Solutions An Engineering Change Notice ECN has been issued with a solution for this problem The yoke assembly is normally held in place by a torqued metal band collar and hot melt glue All ProPalette 7000 and 8000 units are now manufactured with a collar of self adhesive abrasive paper 220 grit applied to the neck of the CRT before the yoke assembly is added This collar provides a more secure means of preventing the yoke from rotating on the CRT neck The amount of clearance under the yoke collar requires that the strips are not overlapped The adhesive abrasive paper should be obtained locally in the Service regions Samples will be provided by CFR manufacturing pa 220_grit PDF 220_grit doc Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 10 07 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 981007093818JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Monitor Mode Details Diagrams Category Performance The purpo
42. 8 Install PolaColor Insight 9 Qe g Install the ColorShot USB software 0 Re start the PC Contact Gerald DiBello Ce mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot USB Bulletin V1 N7 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE I INweaaaaa 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot Parallel Vol 1 No 3 From New Products Service Support Group Date December 18 1998 Subject Software Version 1 1 Released e Category Software Info Bulletin The purpose of this message is to alert Telephone Service and Repair providers regarding the latest release of software for the Parallel version of the ColorShot Digital Photo Printer e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot Parallel digital photo printer e Details 1 New Features amp Benefits Software Version 1 1 PID 629403 has been released for the ColorShot Parallel printer This software replaces the previously released version 1 0 The new software has the following new features e Updated printer profiles Provides improved highlight detail and color performance e New sharpening feature This feature greatly enhances image qua
43. ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO ProCam 95 6 SPECIAL DATE April 19 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM FRANK BLESZINSKI SUBJECT PRO CAM CLOSE UP LENS REPLACEMENTS BACKGROUND Some ProCam customers have made requests for replacement Close Up Lenses citing such reasons as lost broken or defective lens or a lens not being packaged with the camera POLICY The plan for resolving these requests is to have the local Customer Service Representative provide the lens for the customer Non U S Customer Service Reps can order a supply of these lenses from Enschede using part number 1B6677A The question of whether or not to charge for lens replace ments has been left to the determination of local Marketing Managers They may choose to either absorb the cost or establish a local pricing structure ORDERING INFORMATION In U S markets Close Up Lenses may be ordered through CPS Material Services located at 201 Burlington Road in Bedford Massachusetts Outside the U S order through IDSC Enschede The Netherlands Attn J Estevez or K v d Veen FAX number 31 53 82 1662 Phone numbers are 31 53 82 1334 or 31 53 82 1303 Order as follows Part Description ProCam Close Up Lens Part Number 1B6677A Unit Price 9 66 U S Dollars 4 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS POLAROID CORP
44. Ba ffle is visible in picture Light leak hi gh light leak readings at the Light Leak tation may indicate Mirror travel bstruction S O Abnormal X Exposure e Readings 1 Common causes of Mi cessively low or an erratic range of xposure readings at Exposure Tester may ndicate Mirror travel obstruction rror travel obstruction Loose or broken material inside Viewfinder Camera is not fully erected Mirror Catcher Shutter Actuato Inner Viewfind is not seated r is malfunctioning r Lens Retainer is not seated Adhesives or br link under the oken material are obstructing the Recock Drive Cover Clutch Gear is defective Recock Post is broken on Mainframe Adhesive present under TMC Taking Mirror Carrier VMC TMC is tight VMC pivot tabs pressing excessively on TMC TMC pivot hole inner surface is damaged Mirror Catcher is not seated on Mainframe Actuator is not being operated by Shutter Glossary Inner Viewfinder Lens is not seated in Mainframe Mirror Carrier TMC Taking VMC Viewing Mirror Carrier MF Mainframe ID Inside Diameter Inner Surface of a pivot hole Joshua TMC Mirror Travel Problem Troubleshooting Page 3 MIRROR TRAVEL TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART 1 Insert empty Film Pack 2 Simulate taking picture while yes feeling VMC Backplate Hitting p 16 Repea
45. Because of this change the Controller PC Board was updated to version 07 Note SprintScan s with serial number B60xxxE and above contain the new Light Tunnel assembly and the updated version 07 Controller PC Board Both versions 01 04 and 07 of Controller PC Board Figure 1 can be used in the existing and modified SprintScan 35 Table 1 shows the differences between the old style version 01 04 and the new style version 07 of the Controller PC Board Table 1 Controller PC Board Old Style New Style Part Number 1E6536 01 04 1E6536 07 Resistor R5 Populated Not Populated Optical Switch U4 Populated Not Populated Filter Wheel Connection Connected J4 Not Used J4 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Old Style P N 1E6536 01 04 Filter Wheel New Style P N 1E6536 07 Light Tunnel Figure 1 Controller PC Board Controller PC Board Replacement As stated both versions 01 04 and 07 of Controller PC Board Figure 1 can be used as a replacement part for the existing and modified SprintScan 35 However certain conditions must be met to achieve interchangeability Table 2 shows what must be done to achieve interchangeability Note Currently both styles of the Controller PC Board are stocked by CSS Once the old style Controller PC Boards are depleted only the new style Controller PC Board will be ordered Table 1 2 Controller PC Board
46. CCD Board and the latest application software Table 1 lists negative and chrome scanned image problems that can be seen if a mix up occurs It also indicates the corrective action to take Figure 2 shows example scans with modified CCD Table 1 Negative and Chrome Scanned Image Problems Problem Corrective Action 1 Config 0 old version CCD type Change slide scanner Config code to 0 installed in slide scanner configured Negatives Have undeniable yellow hue for modified Config 1 CCD Chromes_ Blues and yellows look flat 2 Config 1 modified version CCD type Change slide scanner Config code to 1 installed in slide scanner configured Negatives Have undeniable blue hue for old Config 0 CCD Chromes_ Blues extra saturated 3 Config 1 modified version CCD type Update to application software to version 2 7 installed in slide scanner but incorrect No CCD Configuration data reported by application software installed software version 2 6 or earlier Negatives Have undeniable blue hue Chromes_ Blues extra saturated CCD Type 1 CCD Config 1 no Auto Expose Correct Config Code CCD Type 1 CCD Config 0 no Auto Expose Incorrect Config Code Figure 2 Examples of scans with modified CCD Reading and Changing Configuration Code Using Application Software Note Tochange CCD Configuration code version 2 7 or higher SprintScan application software must be installed Conditions that require the CCD
47. Code defl parms desc defl parms XY Gridpoints Cos4 gridpoints Dfoc Gridpoints Serial number Cal Data Desc Autoluma data Control Code firmware that runs the ProPalette Defl parms and Defl parms desc high density parameters that are calculated whenever the unit is powered up during the initialization display XY Gridpoints geometry parameters determined during alignment Cos4 Gridpoints Cos4 parameters determined during alignment Dfoc Gridpoints Dynamic focus parameters determined during alignment Cal Data Desc header information that defines the structure of the gridpoint data Autoluma data Default autoluma data used during the calibration process prior to an exposure Serial number as entered by the Service operator VF 1 code blocks Virtual Flash 1 typically contains the configuration parameters for the ProPalette that are set by the operator or the system and must be maintained when power is removed from the unit The removal of any of this information will result in the use of the default value of the parameter They are self explanatory and include SCSI Bus ID SCSI termination Leave Leader Film Type Camera back Language Pacing Frame count Error history A code block will be present in vFlash1 if the default choice in the LCD display was changed at any time Running FLASHMAN HEX Know location of current FLASHMAN HEX file firmware version dependent Terminal emulation program
48. Configuration C located on bottom of scanner Figure 1 Serial Number Location FIRMWARE CPU UPGRADE REPLACEMENT Required Tools e Anti Static Mat and Wrist Strap e Phillips Screw Driver e Universal PLCC Chip Puller CPU Removal Replacement Caution The Main Controller PC Board is particularly sensitive to static discharges Be sure to use an anti static mat and wrist strap during this procedure 1 Turn off the SprintScan 35mm Scanner 2 Unplug the AC power cord and then remove it from the socket of the scanner HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING Failure to remove the power cord from the scanner could cause severe electrical shock 3 Remove the scanner cover as explained in the SprintScan 35mm Scanner Service Manual 4 Position the scanner as shown in Figure 2 Caution Always touch the metal plate supporting the SCSI connectors before touching the Main Controller PC Board 5 Locate the CPU on the Main Controller PC Board Observe its orientation in its socket dot and beveled corner faces front of scanner Figure 2 6 Insert the fingers of the chip puller into the provided slots at the top left and bottom right corners of the socket 7 Remove the CPU by gently but firmly squeezing the handles of the chip puller together oe Properly position the replacement CPU Part number 1F4554A squarely into its socket making sure that its beveled corner goes to the beveled corner of the socket 9 Place a thumb in
49. Deskpro 2000 4000 or 6000 series PC s Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot Parallel printer Polaroid PhotoMAX PhotoPrinter Details 1 User is unable to install the printer either by the plug and play method or using the Add printer Method If you change the port setting in the Compaq s proprietary BIOS has no effect on the PC s ability to recognize the printer 2 User may be able to install the printer but when trying to print an error message is seen Resolution The solution is to get the latest version of the Ipt vxd driver from Compaq Connect to the following Compaq location on the World Wide Web http Awww compaq com support techpubs customer_advisories dt0005 html There is a link on the bottom of this page an application note regarding printer problems to a file download page On the download page select the file named SP2345 exe and download it SP2345 exe is a self extracting file that once expanded contains the file Prntupd4 and a readme file The readme file instructs the user on how to launch the upgrade to automatically install a new version 4 00 954 Ipt vxd file If the ColorShot printer was not already installed it should now be recognized as a plug and play device and install normally If the user had already installed the printer you may need to uninstall it re start the PC and install it again Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic
50. EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base EISB Document Details Product HR 6000 CFR ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 06 11 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970611161412JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Information PALETTE HELP FILES Details Diagrams Subject Situation Several new self help files have been added to Polaroid s FTP site on the Internet These files include film table lists common questions and answers software driver information product specifications and descriptions and trouble shooting tips For the best results from your Palette color film recorder please access and use this information Actions Solutions The easiest way to get to Polaroid s FTP Internet site is from the World Wide Web site From Polaroid s Home page www Polaroid com please click on Software Drivers and Film Table Files at the bottom of the ProPalette 8000 More Info page This procedure will bring you directly to the ProPalette 8000 section of Polaroid s FTP Internet site The Palette Information file names are as follow PALETQNA DOC Palette Questions and Answers PRO8INFO DOC ProPalette 8000 Information MACINF
51. Gold colored flash shields will be available after February 20 1994 Order them under the following part numbers CAMERA GOLD FLASH SHIELD P N 600 Line Sun Hard Body 550167E Impulse Fixed Focus Impulse Auto Focus and 791611C Spectra Image Please order from normal sources A T ep POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Services Support TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB P A NO 600AM 95 44 SPECIAL DATE March 27 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM FRANK BLESZINSKI SUBJECT INTRODUCTION OF 636 AF AUTOFOCUS CAMERA Introduction A new camera model the 636 AF will be introduced in 1995 in the following markets Europe April 1995 Asia Pacific July 1995 WS te cieesaeat July 1995 Worldwide product volume is expected to be about 500 K cameras per year Product The 636 AF camera an extension of the 636 camera line is an autofocus integral camera intended for general photography The 636 AF camera uses a slightly modified version of the Impulse shutter and a repackaged version of the Joshua electronics It features Wink autofocus from 2 feet to infinity a rapid recharge strobe with a 10 ft range and the shutter has a maximum aperture of f 12 The 636 AF uses Type 600 film THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS L
52. High density grids are enabled and one will see an initializing message at startup or when cameras are swapped Please note that the 4x5 camera can take four or five minutes to initialize Dither Modifications The dither algorithm that extracts the optimum beam positioning was modified to improve flat field pastel performance Film name and resolution displayed during R amp G portions of exposure The current film table name displays during the red exposure to help prevent inadvertent film table selection mistakes Also the actual resolution now displays during the green exposure This shows off Polaroid s unique variable resolution capability i e bitmap images expose at their native resolution without time consuming pixel interpolation or re rendering Artifact Warning Signs on LCD The LCD will warn if the host computer is unable to maintain the steady supply of pixel data needed for artifact free images The artifacts are thin dark horizontal lines particularly noticeable in pastel regions of the image If this occurs customers should Turn on buffer to disk if their software driver supports it or Shut down unnecessary applications competing with the driver or Make sure they re not using a heavily loaded network or Do any rotating cropping or scaling before starting the exposure or Add more memory disk or CPU power or Increase the pacing setting either via the keypad or via the driver The warning sign a
53. Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Parallel Bulletin V1 N2 Page 1 of 1 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot USB Vol 1 No 1 From New Products Service Support Group Date June 12 1998 Subject Image Breakup in Prints e Category Product Alert The purpose of this message is to alert service providers regarding a printing problem that might be seen by end user s e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot USB printer e Details Problem Description End user selects the Print command from their image editing application While a print cycle is in process the user switches to another application and begins to work in that application The print cycle will appear to be working normally and a print will eject After the print develops the image that develops is broken up horizontally The sample image below shows one type of image breakup In other cases the effect may appear as horizontal banding in only part of the printed image In this instance the image looks Ok above and below the banded or broken up portion This problem appears to be hardware dependent It is more likely to happen on older and slower Pentium pr
54. January 1994 and February 1994 This media can be identified by the manufacturing dates located on the display boxes i e 1993 12 1994 1 and 1994 2 or from lot numbers located on the ink cassette Figure 2 Configuration Code Figure 2 Location of Configuration Code on Ink Cassette Over The following table explains how to read the configuration code to identify media manufactured between December 1993 and February 1994 Thermal Media Configuration Code 1 Configuration HI 0000 XXXX HI Hitachi p i PO Polaroid Jumbo Roll Number Day Jan thru Oct 01 thru 31 Nov amp Dec 01 50 thru 31 50 Example 51 Ist 81 31st Month Jan thru Oct 0 9 Nov amp Dec 0 amp I with day code as noted 2 Lot No Year the last digit of the year 1994 4 Month Lot No Month Lot No Jan 4001 4031 Jul 4601 4631 Feb 4101 4128 Aug 4701 4731 Mar 4201 4231 Sep 4801 4830 Apr 4301 4330 Oct 4901 4931 May 4401 4431 Nov 4051 4080 Jun 4501 4530 Dec 4151 4181 EXAMPLE Defective media made in December 1993 would have a code of 3151 through 3181 Defective media made in January 1994 would have a code of 4001 through 4031 Defective media made in February 1994 would have a code of 4101 through 4128 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replacement media has already been shipped to Polaroid Europa and is now available in our distribution system Customers should be instructed to avoid use of media with
55. PC board as explained in section 4 of the ID100 Service Manual 2 Unsolder the 047uf 400V Poly Film trigger capacitors from the subject data card strobe PC board being careful not to damage the subject data card strobe PC board Note Refer to the subject data card strobe schematic and board layout Figures land 2 for the location of the trigger capacitors 3 Solder the replacement trigger capacitors luf 500V Ceramic onto the subject data card strobe PC board 4 Install the subject data card strobe PC board as explained in section 4 of the ID100 Service Manual Parts Availability Trigger capacitors Part No CPS 512 will be available after July 1 1996 from Material Services Department Polaroid Corporation 201 burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Our inventory of strobe data card PC boards will be purged and replacement PC boards will be available ASAP Replace C1 Subject Strobe mn luf 500V Ceramic Capacitor 1 FROM SHEET 1 fe SS_TRIG CH 2 3 79 LOGIC BORD PEE HE Replace C1 C2 with Data Card Strobe duf 500V AIM PHA SUP 5v Ceramic Capacitor ag FRON LOGIC CARO A 315V DS1 Pms 315V DS2 pry 4 TO CAP 23aR0 PIN 2 mone ar tora acc er bet DS TRIG 2 FROM SHEET i DIGITAL GNO Figure 1 Subject Data Card PC Board Schematic Subject Strobe Rone Cl luf 500V Ceramic Capacitor Data Card Strobe
56. POLICY Either the interim or new style Counter Wheel should be installed whenever In June 1994 Camera Manufacturing began installing new Counter Wheels Fig 1 in all Joshua series cameras 1 A new 5 Wire gold contact Detail Switch upgrade is done see JOSH 94 __ or 2 The customer reports an EOP signal when depressing the Shutter Button Counter stuck on 0 PART AVAILABILITY The new Counter Wheel P N 1A2084B is available from Material Services in Cambridge MA Please order through normal sources Note that Material Services will stock only the latest Counter Wheel When you receive your supply of new counter wheels you should scrap all old Joshua Counter Wheels New counter wheel Old counter wheel with larger EOP cam with smaller EOP cam Fig 1 New Joshua Counter Wheel right with enlarged EOP cam p THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 17 SPECIAL DATE JULY 11 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST PROMI RUSSELL D BATTLE SUBJECT NEW PLASTIC LENS FOR VISION CAMERAS On Jan 1 1994 Manufacturing began using a new plastic taking lens in all Vision Cameras Accompanying this change the Dec
57. Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Installation Errors on LPT Category The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a solution to a problem that ProPalette customers may experience when printing to the LPT port Details Corruption of data while printing to the LPT port can result in either of the following error messages in a small number of cases First character of Command not ESCAPE Start Exposure Issued without prior Term Exp Resolution To enhance the speed of operation the RIP software will typically write directly to the LPT port The data is corrupted because the Plug and Play PnP function in the PC BIOS can poll the LPT port at the same time resulting in data corruption The PnP polling for the port must be disabled in the system BIOS by setting the port to ECP This allows the operating system and application software to directly control the port with no interference from the BIOS If this fails to resolve the problem the user must switch to printing via the SCSI port APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 01 19 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990119153416JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware ProPalette Front Bezel Category The purpose of thi
58. REFERS The serial number contains the following information Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th charac charac charac charac charac charac charac charac letter Month Year Day of Consecutive Manufacturing Config Product Model the month Serial No Location letter Group A Jan 7 1987 A 1 00001 N Norwood A Z F A B Feb 8 1988 B 2 V Vale of Mod A C Mar 9 1989 etc thru Leven I amp 0 Joshua D Apr 0 1990 Z 24 C China omitted B E May 1 1991 5 25 99999 Datet F Jun 2 1992 6 26 A G Jul 3 1993 7 27 Baseline H Aug 4 1994 8 28 J Sep 5 1995 9 29 B K Oct 6 1996 0 30 Non scratch L Nov 7 1997 1 31 M Dec etc C I amp O Date series I omitted omitted Crescent fix DiS Rear Lens Baffle Example rev Baseblock amp Cres fix fully This camera was manufactured on 1993 with sequential serial 99999 in Norwood and carries the Baseline Configuration is a Joshua type and Model A implem by 9 27 93 Shutter PC Bd to ROM 11 and new Timing Gear 1A2077B F BadgeCam amp BadgeCam Date Camera versions sa y A E eee POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 10 SPECIAL DATE MARCH 31 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS
59. Repair Service organizations information regarding known compatible SCSI host adapters for use the new blue G3 Macintosh computers e Products Affected SprintScan Models 35ES 35 Plus 35LE 45 4000 e Details Some models of the new Blue G3 Macintosh computers released in January of 1999 do not include built in SCSI Testing has shown that the following two SCSI host adapters are compatible with SprintScans and the blue G3 e Adaptec model 2906 e Power Domain made by Adaptec model 2930U The two host adapters were tested under the following conditions Computer Blue 400 MHz G3 Macintosh with built in Ultra Wide SCSI host adapter Software PolaColor Insight versions 2 2 and 3 0 Scanners tested SprintScan 35ES 35 Plus 35LE SprintScan 4000 SprintScan 45 with Insight 3 0 only Adaptec 2906 Notes The 2906 is a host adapter that can also be used on Windows PC s The product packaging includes software and instructions for use on both Macintosh and Windows computers To get the board to work correctly with the Mac you must install an extension named Adaptec SCSI Card 2906 driver that s on the Macintosh Software CD ROM included with the host adapter Make sure the user has copied the 2906 extension in the Extensions folder that s inside the System folder After the extension is loaded the Mac must be restarted Although the Mac software CD ROM contains a Power Domain control utility that allows the user to configur
60. Returns Program ongoing repairs and service will be provided by the manufacturer through Polaroid Corporation 2020 Swift Drive Oak Brook IL 60521 Use of exchange units issued by Oak Brook will be promoted for custom ers requiring service SERVICE PLAN OUTSIDE U S A Ongoing service will be determined by the Regional Service management SERVICE TRAINING Product simplicity allows self training with a Service Manual and videotape which will be available during the second quarter of 1994 PARTS AVAILABILITY Parts or exchange units will be available in the second quarter 1994 along with recommendations for initial start up inventory New ID 100 Photo New ID 100 ID System cont d Instant Photo Identification System ID 100 Photo ID New Feature Comparison System cont d ID 100 and ID 4 ID 100 Camera Type Portable Configuration Focus Sonar Ranging Images per sheet Two identical images Removable Cardholder Timer Camera Back Polarizer Val Plate Laminator Die Cutter Security Key Warranty Operator Diagnosis Carry Case Weight Data Card Sizes Data Magnification Face Magnification Close Up Lens Aim Light Portrait Light Control Face Aperture Data Aperture Strobe Reliability Data Strobe Output Dimensions All Photo Yes H V 2 Up Fixed No 2 Yes No 2 Battery Fixed
61. Service Manual 7 1 94 7 1 94 Training Service Centers will be provided with a Service Manual and a Parts Catalog Training will be provided if necessary Polaroid LCD Panels Feature Comparison Chart LCD Type LCD Size ding LCD Resolution Max Input Resolution Max Color Capability Contrast Ratio Response Time Direct Video Input Amplifier amp Speaker Infrared Remote Control Mouse Emulation Hard Attache Case Dimensions Weight SVGA VGA EGA CGA MAC 11 MAC ILC Quadra Centris Power Book Suggested Retail PolaView 1500 DualScan Passive 8 4 inches 640x480 800x600 256 000 20 1 100 ms 12 2x1 2 2x1 57 in 4 7 lb Yes Yes Yes opt cable Yes opt cable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3495 00 The latest dualscan passive color LCD technology remote mouse emulation right on the remote control Polaroid LCD Panels PolaView 1800 Active Matrix TFT 8 4 inches 640x480 800x600 2 1 million 100 1 30 ms No opt 12 2x1 2 2x1 57 in 5 5 lb 4 7 Ib Yes opt cable Yes opt cable 4995 00 Displays 2 1 million colors from SVGA VGA or Macintosh computers High contrast fast response time easy to use low weight and small size makes it a a very portable LCD panel Active Matrix TFT 10 4 inches 640x480 640x480 16 7 million 100 1 30 ms No opt 12 2x12 2x1 75 in 4 7 Ib Yes opt cable Yes opt cable 5995 00 World s first panel capable of
62. Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB SPECIAL TECH SERVICES QUAL CONTROL TO LIST FROM EDWARD J DACEY SUBJECT RESTYLING OF SPECTRA AND IMAGE CAMERAS BACKGROUND To rejuvenate Spectra Image Camera sales and increase Spectra Image film sales a restyled family of Spectra Image Cameras will be introduced see Fig 1 SONAR RANGEFINDER FILM DOOR RELEASE All new external parts give the restyled cameras a rounded fresh look A unified handle viewfinder affords a sleek wraparound appearance Rounded slightly raised S1 buttons are color coded by model red for SE blue for A yellow for 2 The restyled cameras will have the same optics and one board electronics as present Spectra Image cameras there are HAND STRAP RELEASE LATCH TECHNICAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT P A NO SPEC 94 17 DATE NOVEMBER 21 1994 MAT L SERVICES OPERATIONS QUINTIC LENS SELF TIMER INDICATOR FLASH FILM DOOR FILM EXIT SLOT CONTROL PANEL the U S no internal changes be in troduced he restyled cameras will in Oct 1994 in N P P K ovember 1994 in Europe in May ZH b nd the rest of A the worl d in Ju in 1995 ne POI 5u VIEWFINDER NECK TRIPOD SOCKET STRAP
63. T or W as the eighth character otherwise you ll get the software error Blank denotes an AEG CRT clear gun T signifies a first generation Thomas CRT black gun our current production W indicates the future second generation Thomas CRT white gun The color refers to the glass seal of the CRT observed through the neck connector If the firmware finds a T it changes the color balance amp cos4 parameters to compensate for first generation Thomas CRTs Resolution When entering a serial number for pre production or manufacturing pilot units replace the PPC or MP with 8 leave the month K second character and the year 5 third character so there will be no confusion to when the unit was originally manufactured In addition it will prevent the chance of having two units with the same serial number APPROVALS EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 11 02 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 981102112810JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Restoration of ProPalette Firmware using Alignment Station JP501 Category Performance The purpose of this bulletin is to alert service providers of a method to restore corrupted firmware in a ProPalette using the Upgrade Firmware functionality of the Alignment station If the Control code has been corrupted the Alignment station cannot communicate with the unit and the operator w
64. The package graphics will be similar to our current OneFilm product with two exceptions ISO 200 speed will be printed on the sides of the box and Made in Germany on the back panel OF1 will be sold in 110 and 35 mm formats in rolls of 24 or 36 exposures Technical Information Granularity Fine grain diffuse RMS granularity 5 0 Exposure Color balanced at 5500 K at ISO 200 Exposure Latitude 3 to 2 stops Reciprocity no correction from 1 10 000 to 1 2 second 1 stop for 1 second 2 stops for 10 seconds 3 stops for 100 seconds Performance Curves Refer to Technical Specialists Film Identification Packaging see paragraph above Cassette Black plastic container versus gray of previous White metal container with OF xx Exps ISO 200 versus blue of previous Negative Developed negative will have legend Polaroid OF1 200 Developing OF1 uses C 41 or equivalent processing chemistry The DX channel for OF1 is 49 5 or its close cousin 17 6 Printer control strips can be ordered from normal suppliers or from Polaroid Material Services Department in Bedford MA Polaroid Corporation Customer Support Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 1406 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR Edward J Dacey NOTICE 105133 REVIEW DATE November 20 1995 SUBJECT Integral Film Low Smear Reagent PRODUCT T 600HD Spectra Image T990 Grid Film Captiva Vision JoyCam
65. Vertical channel R56 301 ohms 1 0 ohms R55 40 ohms 3W 47 ohms 3W R108 40 ohms 3W 47 ohms 3W Horizontal channel R6 2 49K 1 3 92K 1 Manufacturer Part numbers R6 Rohm MCR18F2491 R56 Rohm MCR18F3010 R55 amp R108 Ohmite 43F40 or Memcor Truohm SL340 Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design M4 Repair Info Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 RIB Document Details Product R 6000 Date 10 01 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 971001105844JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Firmware Received on Film VARIABLE FRAME SPACING Details Diagrams PROBLEM It was discovered that the R6000 35mm camera for the HR CI family of film recorders was occasionally skipping a perforation between frames on 36 exposure rolls of film REASON The analysis of failed cameras reveal a timing problem in the microprocessor firmware version 1 3 due to the variable motor torque requirement for the 36 exposure film SOLUTION The problem has been addressed and a new version of firmware has been generated The new firmware is installed by replacing the microprocessor on the logic board 1E8210A with the part R6000 Programmed Micro ver 1 4 p n AA0095 issue 03 This item is socket mounted on the logic board ensure proper orientation when inserting the new device The
66. XR D8794AIK Date Code Figure 7 A D converter U18 A D Converter Streak Test 1 Plug the AC power cord into the socket of the slide scanner and then plug the other end into an AC power outlet Connect the SCSI cable to the host computer Turn the terminator switch on the slide scanner s back panel to its ON position Turn on the slide scanner by setting its Power On Off 1 0 switch to its On 1 position The slide scanner should turn on and after its self test sequence completes the green and yellow status lamps will be on continuously Insert the streak target from the EXAR A D Streak Test Kit into the slide scanner Carriage The arrow on the front of the streak target should face toward the lamp with the arrow at the bottom facing toward the front of the slide scanner and pointing down From the Adobe Photoshop File menu select Acquire SprintScan 35 or Import SprintScan 35 depending on the version of Adobe Photoshop When the Settings Dialog box Figure 8 appears setup fields as follows e Set Resolution to 2700 dpi e Set Film to ldent4x CV2 e Turn off Automatic Exposure control in the Preferences Dialog box e Set View to Portrait mode Eri ie Bremin Beart ee Pe a i E iee Pi mi ie Figure 8 Setting dialog box 7 8 10 Click on the Preview button to preview the streak target Once the streak target preview image appears Figure 9 select a small a
67. accurately interpreting and displaying all 16 7 million colors from a 24bit computer video sources PolaView Active Matrix TFT 6695 00 A real Multimedia LCD panel with true color onboard amp and speaker direct video inputs microphone timer and mouse emulation included on the remote control 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Int l EXP SUB SPECIAL TECH SERVICES QUAL CONTROL List Arvin M Arvind NEW POLAVIEW LCD PROJECTORS LCD INTRODUCTION laroid They are MODEL Polaview Model 105 LCD Projector Polaview Model 95 LCD Projector Polaview Model 90 LCD Projector Polaview Model 85E LCD Projector Polaview Model 80 LCD Projector POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Polaview Projector Starting in the 3rd Quarter of 1995 five desktop Polaview LCD Projectors will be available from Po THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS TECHNICAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT P A NO LCD 95 2 December 13 1995 DATE MAT L SERVICES OPERATIONS PID Number 620222 620220 620218 620495 620216 The Polaview LCD projectors are completely self contained personal computer peripherals which project computer and video images onto a large screen for audience viewing They use an active matrix LCD for sharp crisp projected images and are the brightest desktop pr
68. an Internet update client that automatically connects to the Graphx Web server and lets you download new RasterPlus components Keeping your RasterPlus current is now just a click away Service Resource Dwayne Billingsley Telephone 1 781 386 5471 E mail billind polaroid com
69. analog boards Product Affected ProPalette 7000 Details An undetermined number of ProPalette 7000 analog boards have made it through the system with the wrong revision level marked on the board The vendor incorrectly marked them as 1AE545A IS03 these boards are actually IS05 There has never been a released 1AE545A IS03 analog board Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering _ Special _ CPS Materials _ Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 10 02 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 981002140058JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Yoke Collar Details Diagrams Subject Situation Reports of tilted and otherwise misaligned images have been reported recently for the ProPalette 8000 This issue is easiest identified by examining a strip of film from the ProPalette 8000 and observing that every image on the strip has an identical rotation Rotated images are caused by the yoke of the CRT slipping and or rotating during extremely severe shipping conditions of ProPalette 8000 units There have been no reports of rotated images on the ProPalette
70. and FULL switch traces with ROM 10 ROM 11 amp gold switch contacts New timing gear can be identified by dot impression on opposite side New 1A2077B Old 1A2077A Fig 2 New Timing Gear 1A2077B left used with ROM 11 PC Board Flash Tube Assy Old Timing Gear 1A2077A right used with ROM 10 and earlier ROM PC Board Flash Tube Assemblies back to 1992 Joshua ROM 11 Shutter PC Board Flash Tube Assy amp Timing Gear eels el IDENTIFYING CAMERAS WHICH HAVE THE ROM 11 PC BOARD To determine whether a camera contains a ROM 11 PC Board remove the Dec Plate and look for the letters CL SL S C or a sign scribed in ink on the Front Shutter Housing see Fig 3 Also look to see if the number 11 is marked on the Drive Cover as shown in Fig 3 The 11 marking was discontinued in July 1994 In the Camera Serial number note that Cameras with the ROM 11 PC Board Flash Tube Assembly will be marked configuration E Please refer to Joshua Product Alert 94 9A this is a revision of JOSH 94 9 originally published 2 24 94 Fig 3 Various Shutter markings identifying ROM 11 installations Joshua ROM 11 Shutter PC Board Flash Tube Assy amp Timing Gear 4 REPAIR POLICY Cameras received for repair with a defective ROM 10 or earlier PC Board Flash Assem bly should have the Assembly replaced with a ROM 10 Assembly if available In addition the 5 Wire Switch and Counte
71. and identified correctly during the computer boot process When the parallel port is picked as the output port the ProPalette is on line Reason The Queue Property configuration item SCSI Adapter must reflect the location of the SCSI host adapter that supports the ProPalette Solution Use a SCSI utility like EZSCSI from Adaptec to determine how many SCSI buses are present on the computer For example the CD drive on a Sound Blaster card is resident on it s own SCSI host adapter and occupies a number A subsequent SCSI card will reside as the second SCSI adapter Properly identify the number of the host adapter that supports the ProPalette In RasterPlus95 go to Queue Properties Under the Device tab click on Options At the bottom of the screen is a field labeled SCSI Adapter Select the number that corresponds to the adapter that contains the ProPalette In this case set the number to 1 because the ProPalette is resident on the second host adapter the first adapter supporting the CD drive is 0 Save these settings by clicking OK Ensure that the SCSI id number and bus termination are correct The ProPalette should now be on line Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reprodu
72. assembly has the following features added booster spring added second erect spring improved bellows improved cone pivot points ProCam Cameras not erecting properly or producing Black Bar pictures should be sent to the appro priate Polaroid repair facility for installation of the improved Bellows Cone Assembly REPAIR POLICY All ProCam Cameras received for repair with the failure mode described above should have the im proved Bellows Cone Assembly installed Additionally check for the proper clearance dimension of the door erect switch and for the full visibility of the date imprint on the picture over THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS INSPECTION REPAIR PROCEDURE 1 Determine if the date imprint is fully visible by taking a picture If the imprint is not fully visible on the picture replace the Date Module Assembly 1B6725A before reassembling the camera as instructed below 2 Examine the clearance dimension of the Door Latch Erect Switch as follows a Erect the camera open the film door and insert an empty film pack b As shown in Figure 1 position a Door Erect Switch Actuator Gage or a piece of 0 120 3mm shim stock measuring about 1 x 2 25mm X 50mm on the lower edge of the mid cover and close the door The camera should dark slide The gage or shim stock indicates that the Door Latch Erect Switch has a minimum 0 050 1 3mm safety m
73. been implemented in the LCD menu APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 06 02 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990602103008JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware New Monitor Mode Category The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of an alternative method to set Monitor Mode in a ProPalette that does not require the removal of the outer shell Product Affected ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Details Monitor Mode refers to the rudimentary operating system that is hard coded into the on board microprocessor It is used to provide base level control and communication to the ProPalette Monitor mode is used to communicate with the ProPalette through its serial port The newest method is to power up with two keys pressed on the keypad Note that this is only available on the new ProPalette 8000 plus series or on an earlier ProPalette that has an upgraded Digital board To activate Monitor Mode from the front panel power down the unit press the scroll up and scroll down keys simultaneously while applying power The unit powers up in the Monitor mode Restart or reset the system in the normal fashion to return to standard mode This method will only work with digital board 1F5
74. cameras has been redesigned to incorporate thicker stronger mount ing tabs See arrows in Figure 1 below This change was made to correct a problem of the tabs breaking and the resultant pieces being left inside the shutter assembly POLICY The new Decorative Plates will be phased in at manufacturing facilities as inventories of the old plates are used up Existing Decorative Plates at repair facilities should continue to be used until repair inventories are depleted PARTS AVAILABILITY Refer to the Joshua Joshua Parts Catalog for the proper part numbers to be used when ordering Decorative Plates Please note that the part numbers for the new Decorative Plates remain the same as the part numbers for the earlier Decorative Plates FIGURE 1 IMPROVED DECORATIVE PLATE WITH STRENGTHENED TABS THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS 4 A E ep POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO SPECIAL DATE JOSH 94 21 SEPT 8 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE To meet Korean government requirements Vision cameras sold there must have the words Made in the U S A visible on an external surface of the camera Accordingly Korean Market Vision cameras
75. cpp 402 Offset outside of expanded_mem block 0O SWERR expmemry cpp 402 Offset outside of expanded_mem block BOARD VERSIONS Analog Version 0 Original PP8000 12 95 release Analog Version 2 Original PP8000 release reworked with upgraded capacitors sample and hold grounding etc for improved flat field performance Analog Version 3 Equivalent of version 2 with power fail rework for CRT protection Analog Version 4 Respin including all reworks of version 2 and version 3 and 20 increase in video gain Analog Version 10 Initial Pro7000 Digital version 5 Original release Digital version 6 Initial revisions to 2 for 1 circuitry Digital version 7 Final version of 2 for 1 gives fastest block mode exposures Used in Pro7000 and Pro8000 s Video version 0 Prerelease video circuit where COS4 reference current relative to video current is 20 less than later designs Video version 1 Uses 2 49K offset and gain resistors Firmware cos4 compensation Video version 2 Uses 3 01K offset and gain resistors for 20 increase in final video gain Firmware cos4 compensation Errstat exe Errstat doc Errstat PDF Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP Int l Subsidiaries Special CPS Tech Services Manufacturing CPS Operations Engineering CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation Al
76. e Products Affected SprintScan 4000 e Details A special tool is now available that is made specially to open the case of the SprintScan 4000 without risk of damaging the cover tabs To begin opening the case the tool is pushed into one of the four slots on the bottom of the scanner In one motion the cover tab is unlatched and the cover is pushed up and away from the base The tool is pushed into the four slots one at a time until all tabs are released Tool Name SS4000 Case Tool Tool Part Number CPS 541 Purchase from Polaroid Corporation Material Services 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Telephone 800 343 4846 or 781 386 5649 Fax 781 386 5606 e mail Parts Department Polaroid com Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N6 Page 1 of 1 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 SprintScan Vol 3 No 7 From New Products Service Support Group Date June 4 1999 Subject SprintScan 4000 Door Open Errors seen when using Version 3 0 or 3 1 of PolaColor Insight e Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this
77. http developer intel com design pcisets setupex htm The customer should execute the file and then re boot their PC After restart the USB root hub should be installed and shown in the Device Manager Contact Gerald DiBello Ce mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Bulletin V1 N5 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croa 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot USB Vol 1 No 6 From New Products Service Support Group Date October 12 1998 Subject Software Releases e Category Software Info Bulletin The purpose of this message is to provide a summary of the ColorShot USB released software history for Telephone Service and Repair providers e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot USB printer e Details Since the ColorShot USB printer was first released for sale a number of revisions have been made to the software A summary of the releases Released Software Version Description 1 02 First USB version for Windows 95 1 03 Windows 98 and Windows 95 compatibility 1 04 Software revision to correct a potential misread of the film pack presence switch located inside the print
78. illustration Profile Setup Embed Profiles M RGB 4 CMYK I Grayscale C Lab Assumed Profiles RGB Ask When Opening z CMYK None z Grayscale None Profile Mismatch Handling RGB Ask When Opening gt CMYK Ignore Grayscale Ignore aj 2 Make the following choices in the Profile Setup dialog box In the Embed Profiles section check RGB CMYK and Grayscale Under Assumed Profiles RGB choose Ask When Opening from the dropdown menu Under Profile Mismatch Handling RGB choose Ask When Opening 3 Click on the OK button and close the Profile Setup dialog box Note You must shut down and re start your computer for these changes to take effect 4 Converting SprintScan scans to Photoshop 5 x color space before making any additional corrections Macintosh Windows 95 98 amp NT 4 a Open the PolaColor Insight application On the Preview tab in the Profiles section under Display choose Monitor calibrated to 1 8 gamma from the dropdown menu choices b Preview and scan an image c Open the saved image in Photoshop Notice that when you open the color matched image you just scanned the Missing Profile dialog box appears see illustration Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding
79. in a Hold area where they can be previewed and released Once approved files go to a Print engine that quickly renders files to the device resolution After printing all files are collected in an Archive for future reprints Each step is managed independently so you can now preview and print files at the same time Comparison Application printing to the queue for previewing in v2 0 required the customer to first configure a RasterPlus Enabled Active or Disabled queue New in v3 0 is the ability to Print to Hold area right from the application ALL NEW PostScript 3 RasterPlus raises performance printing to a new level PostScript 3 With the new world class PostScript 3 engine RasterPlus delivers rich new graphics capabilities that fulfill the creative expression requirements of imaging professionals Print quality is dramatically improved with smooth shading technology that renders gradient blends at the targeted device resolution Better yet it processes files up to 3 times faster than before NEW Native PDF Processing RasterPlus v3 0 adds native PDF processing to its extensive file format list Now your clients can preview in Adobe Acrobat and send you the same file for a consistent print workflow Simply drop the PDF file to the queue and it will automatically print NEW Integrated Font Manager RasterPlus v3 0 introduces a manager for adding PostScript Type 1 fonts needed in processing EPS or Postscript files that do not include fon
80. incorporated in film starting in the second quarter of 1995 If you have any questions call Shari King at 617 386 0184 PTN 226 0184 or Ed Dacey at 617 386 5490 PTN 226 5490 Polaroid Corporation Customer Support Service 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 1406 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR E DACEY R DEFERRARI NOTICE 035132 REVIEW DATE MARCH 30 1995 SUBJECT NEW VENDOR FOR 35MM FILM PRODUCT 35mm ONE FILM SENSITIVE MATERIAL LIMITED DISTRIBUTION Internal Polaroid Pack X U S Service Centers 4X5 X International Film Mfg Large Format X International Subsidiaries Integral X 35mm All Introduction amp Marketing Stategy Beginning in the second quarter of 1995 Polaroid will begin to sell 35mm OneFilm manufac tured by Agfa in Germany This new Onefilm will be designated as OF1 and is suitable for most consumer snapshots and family picture users Onefilm OF1 incorporates a combination of technologies including a new interlayers to prevent dye migration b stabilizers to assure fresh film results even with prolonged shelf or camera storage c better bleachability for good results when processing the negative d computerized manufacturing technology for consistently high quality As a result OneFilm OF has greater exposure latitude than the previous OneFilm and is less grainy over Packaging
81. is used Scroll through the list and look for the two newest Sequence files created The newest files are the ones that have the most recent date and time as listed in the Modified column of the Explorer window Double click on a Sequence file to open it with Notepad Ask the user to quickly scan each of the two Sequence files and look for one or both of the following example messages 11 03 52 840 readModuleData Error1 Code 146 11 03 53 120 readModuleData Error1 Code 128 The first characters of the message are the time that the error occurred and can be ignored The most important part of the information is the number seen within the parentheses Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Parallel Bulletin V2 N1 Page 1 of 2 Note that the 146 and the 128 numbers are the unique identifiers of the firmware fault If you see these numbers along with the readModuleData listing then the firmware problem is the cause of the error message seen by the customer Solution Clear the error condition by removing and replacing the pack of film that s in the printer After the film pack has been removed and replaced the customer can start printing again If you only open an
82. jumper If the setting you noted is 340h change the jumper setting Step 10 Install the Host Adapter board per the Installation Guide in one of the ISA slots usually a black colored connector in your PC Choose a slot so that the SCSI board won t touch the sides of any other board when it s installed Step 11 Connect a SCSI device example a slide scanner to the connector on the Host Adapter board outside the PC and turn on the power to the device and then to your PC Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N3 Page 6 of 7 Step 12 Install the EZ SCSI Lite version 4 x or 5 x using the instructions printed on the disk This disk will update the SCSI files and drivers that were copied from the Windows 95 CDROM to the latest versions After installation is complete you will see a message asking if you want re start your PC now Click on the OK button and allow your PC to re start Note EZ SCSI Lite Version 4 does not install the sparrow mpd driver needed for the 1505 board The default sparrow mpd driver that comes with the Windows 95 will remain The latest drivers can be found on Adaptec s website at www adaptec com Step 13 Install the software for the SCSI device no
83. manufactured starting in March 1994 PID 618697 will have this statement engraved on the outside tab of the Picture Removal Door See Figure 1 The part number for the door is 1A2145B Please note that the engraved doors are available for repair inventories only through special order This camera also has the strengthened Decorative Plate 1A2157K described in Product Alert JOSH 94 20 dated August 17 1994 In all other respects the camera is the same as the latest Vision cameras made in 1994 FIGURE 1 PICTURE REMOVAL DOOR FOR KOREAN MARKET VISION CAMERAS THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS SUBJECT VISION PICTURE REMOVAL DOOR FOR KOREAN MARKET 4 y yw E ee POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 95 22 SPECIAL DATE FEBRUARY 22 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE SUBJECT WORLDWIDE INTRODUCTION OF BadgeCam AND BadgeCam Date CAMERAS BACKGROUND A unique new extension of the Joshua Camera design produces high quality attractive badges instantly combining a VISITOR l portrait with custom designed PASS artwork World City Press The new BadgeCam PID 619410 can produce temporary visitor A R TORI a
84. modified Baseblock Assembly will be available by April 30 1994 from Material Services in Cambridge Order through normal sources as needed Fig 1 New Rear Lens Baffle 1A2723 for Joshua Cameras THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS y A E eee POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 13 SPECIAL DATE APRIL 5 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE NEW JOSHUA SHUTTER FLEX CONNECTOR CAP amp REMOVAL TOOL SUBJECT shorts etc These are the result of mismatched shorted or absent electrical connection between misaligned Connector contacts and the Flex streets see Fig 1 In addition the Connector Cap could be difficult to remove without breaking SOLUTION To answer these and other problems a new Flex Connector Cap P N 1A2358A Issue 2 and above see Fig 4 and a Retainer Removal Tool P N 13589 have been developed As Figs 2 4 show the Tool has a thin blade with a beveled hook tip When the blade is inserted straight into the Connector Cap it disengages the Cap s internal locking tab The hook or tang on the tip of the blade facilitates lifting the Cap straight up and off the Connector PARTS A
85. new firmware version 1 4 has two added features and a requirement as listed below Requirement When version 1 4 is installed into a camera back the self test must be run The self test performs two functions it identifies the camera back version and initializes the counters in eeprom NOTE Since the identification process uses the perforation sensor to determine which camera is attached the operator must ensure that the perforation sensor is free from any obstructions Make sure there is no film in the camera when the self test routine is initiated Feature 1 When the self test routine is started a hexadecimal cycle counter will be flashed on the LCD as a record of how many cycles the camera has performed in it s lifetime beginning with this firmware release ex Hex Decimal O0OBO 176 cycles 2 On power up the version of the firmware will be displayed To order parts indicate part number full part name and quantity desired Give exact shipping instructions and complete shipping and billing address Address all parts orders to Polaroid Corporation Material Services Department 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved EI Service Bulletin Polar
86. only JP501 has any functionality associated with it This jumper controls the Watchdog timer that prevents power on initialization errors Action Solution JP501 should be set according to the following table Normal usage is to enable the circuit Pin 1 2 Pin2 3 JP501 Disabled Enabled Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base o EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 03 24 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980324102437JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware ESD Damage Details Diagrams Products Affected Cause Action ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Subject Situation The Manufacturing line has experienced a high failure rate of capacitors and active circuits on the entire ProPalette line While monitoring one of the power supply lines some substantial ESD transients were observed whenever the operator adjusted the yoke of the CRT during Functional test The measured voltages were bipolar with a total range as high as 55v Reason These components are n
87. orientation Click OK Once back in the Quark page setup window click on the printer button at the bottom This will bring up the LaserWriter print dialog box Make sure the printer selected is the device you want to output to Make sure the destination is Printer Note By changing destination from printer to file will cause the desktop printer to create and save the PS file in the location of your choice This will not print directly to the RasterPlus queue Once you ve confirmed the device and destination click Print This will bring you back to the Quark Page Setup window where you must clickPrint from here Your file will now spool to the desktop printer create a Postscript file PS then advance into the RasterPlus queue Once in RasterPlus the file will either sit in the queue or start processing out to your device This will be determined by how your Send RIP output to options are setup in RasterPlus You should now be ready to output directly from all versions Quark APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 07 14 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990714090321 JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software SWERR Error Message Unknown analog board version Category The purpose of this message is to alert
88. package includes Advansys Super SCSI on CD ROM Applications contained on the CD ROM 1 Allow the user to directly connect to the Advansys website to download drivers 2 Do SCSI bus troubleshooting 3 Install drivers for the Advansys 922 board 4 SuperView allows the user to see SCSI devices that are on the bus Contact Gerald DiBello Ce mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N9 Page 1 of 1 v4 Repair Info Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base o RIB Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 11 04 96 Product Type Film Recorder Document 961104161822JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Received on Film RED FILTER REPLACEMENT Details Diagrams Problem Some ProPalette 8000 units produce an uneven flat field color The condition is particularly noticeable when printing black and white images on color film The center of the image is cyan and the outer edges are magenta The symptom often results from a defective out of specification red filter and replacing the filter according to the following procedure usually corrects the problem _Affected Units This problem ha
89. red in color The filter name indicates the color observed when a white light is viewed through it CAUTION Be sure to wear white cotton gloves when working inside the compartment to avoid fingerprints on the filters and CRT face 5 Press one of the filter retaining tabs to release the filter Figure 3 and lift the filter out of the wheel 6 Insert the replacement filter in the wheel by pressing the tab positioning the new filter and releasing the tab 7 Pivot the spring mounted stepper motor shaft away from the filter wheel pivot mount the filter wheel back on the pivot and release the stepper motor shaft so it contacts the outside of the filter wheel Note Be sure the filter wheel lip is located in the photo interrupter slot Figure 2 8 Reinstall the filter wheel snap ring on the pivot shaft 9 Pivot the stepper motor shaft away from the filter wheel and verify that the wheel rotates freely 10 Clean the filters 11 Reinstall the filter wheel blinder 12 Clean the CRT face 13 Reinstall the bottom access door Filter Filter 7 weet sites Here Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP Int l Subsidiaries Special Figure 3 Removing a filter from the wheel CPS Tech Services CPS Operations CPS Materials Manufacturing Engineering Design 1996 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or dist
90. refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N3 Page 3 of 7 Tip In most cases a feature of EZ SCSI from Adaptec is the reason the SprintScan is not recognized as an Imaging Device One of the features of EZ SCSI is a generic scanner device driver that provides a simple control for a generic scanner The generic driver blocks the SprintScan from being recognized as an Imaging Device wo Uninstall Adaptec EZ SCSI or EZ SCSI lite Check and be sure if the user has his or her original disks before uninstalling Open the Device Manager Select the Scanner listing with the mouse pointer Click on the Remove button Re boot the PC After Windows 98 re boots open the Device Manager Check to see if the Scanner is now listed as an Imaging Device 9 The user can now re install EZ SCSI or EZ SCSI lite ONO Step 3b Missing sys files Two critical Windows 98 files that are needed to have a scanner recognized as an Imaging Device must be present on the host PC These files should load from the Windows 98 CD the first time the scanner is recognized you get a message telling you to put the Win 98 CD in the drive These files are not loaded in a standard Win 98 install or when upgrading from Win 95 For some reason they sometimes aren t installed The files are SCSImap sys SCSlIscan sys After installation both files reside in the following path C WWINDOWS SYSTEM32 DRIVERS The
91. repair should be checked to determine date of manufacture If they were made before the second quarter of 1995 a piece of black foam tape should be adhered to the right side of the molded mirror light seal See Figure 1 1 8 THICK BLACK FOAM TAPE 1 4 LONG X 5 8 WIDE FOAM TAPE LINED UP WITH BOTTOM EDGE OF LEG MOLDED MIRROR LIGHT SEAL AS VIEWED FROM THE FRONT FIGURE 1 TAPING THE MOLDED MIRROR LIGHT SEAL TO PREVENT LIGHT LEAKS THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS L y EE EE ee POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l E SUB p a No PROCAM 94 3 SPECIAL DATE FEBRUARY 11 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO PROCAM REPAIR PERSONNEL FROM FRANK BLESZINSKI suBIECT PROCAM BLACK BAR INSTALLING NEW BELLOWS CONE ASSEMBLY amp CHECKING ERECT SWITCH ACTUATOR CLEARANCE PLUS VISIBILITY OF DATE IMPRINT BACKGROUND Some ProCam Cameras manufactured before September 1993 may not fully erect or may produce a picture with a Black Bar across the bottom These problems may be further aggravated when a camera loaded with film is stored in a cool environment To address this problem Camera Manufacturing has been using an improved Bellows Cone Assembly P N 1A5790A CPS since September 1993 The new
92. rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product Product Type Category ProPalette 8000 Film Recorder Product Group PDI Hardware Date 09 05 97 Document 970905091846JF Posted By Jordan Freedman HARDWARE UPGRADE Details Diagrams The following circuit board assemblies have been updated in the ProPalette 8000 From To Analog PCB Assembly 1D9710A 1AH823A Digital PCB Assembly 1D9575A 1F5570A These changes reflect the latest build revision J of this product Please update all of your documentation Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP Int l Subsidiaries Special CPS Tech Services CPS Operations CPS Materials Manufacturing Engineering Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 Date 09 15 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970915151919JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware SIZING ERRORS Details Diagrams PROBLEM Recently there have been alignment sizing problems with the ProPalette 7000 product It has been dis
93. service providers of a solution to a problem that ProPalette Service providers may experience when replacing an Analog board Product Affected ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Details Immediately after replacing the Analog board in a ProPalette the following error message may appear after the firmware version is displayed in the LCD display during the power up sequence self test SWERR dp2layer cpp 215 Unknown analog board version Resolution The firmware must be upgraded to the latest version A unit may give the Unknown analog board version error message if the analog board is changed without upgrading the firmware on the Digital board The older firmware may not recognize the newer analog boards All board upgrades are hardware backwards compatible with the proper firmware APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN cera 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 2 No 10 From New Products Service Support Group Date November 11 1998 Subject PolaColor Insight vers 2 X and Win 98 e Category Product Alert The purpose of this message is to alert Service providers of a problem that occurs when installing PolaColor Insight version 2 X on PC s running Window 98 e Products Affected SprintScan 35 SprintScan 35ES SprintScan 35 LE e Details The custo
94. supply PC board making sure its feet are properly aligned with the mounting holes on the power supply PC board e Install and tighten the four 4 secures that secures the metal protective shield and power supply PC board to the bottom case 8 Install and tighten the three 3 screws that secures the chassis mount assembly to its bottom case supports 9 Install and tighten the four 4 screws that secures the controller PC board to the chassis mount assembly and to its bottom case supports 10 Connect the following electrical cables to the controller PC board e Ji Transport Stepper Motor e J3 CCD PC Board e J4 Filter Wheel Stepper Motor e J5 J6 Power Supply 11 Install the top housing as explained in Section 4 of the SprintScan 35 Slide Scanner Service Manual Figure 1 Metal Protective Shield POLAROID CORPORATION ConsumerServices Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 35mm Scan 96 4 SPECIAL DATE March 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT 35MMSPRINTSCAN FIRMWARE HARDWAREUPDATE Background All SprintScan 35mm Scanner s that are returned from the field with firmware 77 through 85 must be replaced with the latest firmware This Product Alert also lists the past and current hardware updates to the SprintScan 35mm scanner Firmware Updat
95. that a corrupt error log will cause the error message A planned upgrade to the firmware will resolve this problem from happening SWERR osstratup cpp 162 2 Ul This error occurs when the microprocessor in the ProPalette is starting up and it receives an unexpected interrupt 2 UI Resetting the unit with the switch on the back will clear the error There are many reasons that the unexpected interrupt can occur and they all revolve around electrical noise It could be a discharge from the CRT noise on the low voltage power supply or even an external static discharge from someone touching the outside shell SWERR rico cpp 486 perf hi as expec This error occurs when the film perforation after film transport is not what the firmware expects to see There are two models of Ricoh camera s in use and the firmware determines which model is installed by measuring the signal from the perforation sensor If the sensor doesn t see what it expects after initialization then an error is reported This could bea camera film advance problem SWERR dp2layer cpp 215 Unknown analog b Immediately after replacing the Analog board in a ProPalette the indicated error message may appear after the firmware version is displayed in the LCD display during the power up sequence self test A unit may give this error message if the analog board is changed without upgrading the firmware on the Digital board All board upgrades are hardware backwards compatible with the pr
96. that connect the DX pins to the camera edge connector This has no effect on the functionality of the unit An upcoming firmware solution 568 will be to add a new option to the LCD menu Lock Camera Back The default is AutoSense alternatives are 35mm and Bulk 35mm for both models with 4 x 5 6 x 7 and 6 x 8 also available on ProPalette 8000 If the customer starts seeing the wrong camera in the LCD they can lock in the right camera back and continue imaging Resolution 1 With camera lens facing away from you of the circuit board and remove them Use care not to damage adjacent wires 2 Replace top cover 3 Identify the modification by placing a small white dot next to the DX code pins inside the film chamber 4 Update the configuration code for the ProPalette Old Revision New Revision ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 P R APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 8000 Date 03 25 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990325130433JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Hi Voltage Cable Assembly P N 1F5479A Category Performance The purpose of this message is to alert service providers to a problem that has become apparent with the replacement Hi Voltage cable assembly P N 1F5479A Product Affected Pro
97. that scanners manufactured before January 1998 could also be affected because TDK could not supply information on the length of time that bad parts were produced Failed part identification Failed parts exhibit an open circuit wnen measured with an ohmmeter See Figure 1 You can measure the resistance of L3 from the top of the board by measuring across points 1 and 2 in Figure 1 If L3 is defective it will measure as an open circuit Top view of Controller Board Figure 1 Top View of Controller Board Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N4 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN cra 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 2 No 5 From New Products Service Support Group Date May 12 1998 Subject SprintScan PolaScan 35 Plus Firmware Upgrade to V5 94 e Category Product Alert The purpose of this message is to alert service providers regarding a firmware upgrade for the SprintScan PolaScan 35 Plus e Products Affected SprintScan 35 Plus and PolaScan 35 Plus e Details e Beginning May 1998 firmware was upgraded from Version 5 90 to 5
98. the CCD board connector This defect applies to all SprintScan 4000 s The manufacturer is working on a solution to the problem When the manufacturer implements a solution a Bulletin will be issued to notify the field NOTE This Bulletin only suggests a method to fix the cable detaching defect It is also suggested that the fix be applied to all units returned for service even if the cable has not detached Local repair policy for the SprintScan 4000 should be consulted before implementing the fix suggested in this bulletin Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N8 Page 1 of 3 The following suggested repair method has been approved by the manufacturer of the scanner 1 Lift the scanner cover using the special tool P N CPS 541 see SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N6 dated May 26 1999 or some other suitable method 2 Remove the two door switch cable connectors and the power switch cable connector from their mating connectors on the front of the main logic board see Figure 1 In most units a wire retainer at the top left of the main logic board retains the power switch assy wires Release the retainer so the all five power switch assy wires are free see Figure 2
99. the firmware Since you have already changed the firmware you should see that version 1 04 or later is installed Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N6 Page 3 of 7 Em jago Hop SCSI Hrag Win SFI 3 Adopter ID D Sesame ID 6 Finmae 1 02 Dips 0 cs2miG2 27 TKN 269 FLSCS2 31 FimiD 1842 LOCO gr Number of Score I6 Cadtvatcninfo 172 Figure 3 Changing the Config Code a Start up SprintScan Direct or Photoshop or application b Make the Sprintscan Control Panel window active c While holding down the Alt key touch the B key on the host computer keyboard After you see a warning message dialog box about using the Debug function Cancel it Anew menu choice appears in the Preview window named Debug See Figure 4 below SprintScan 35 Preview File Image Help fe Datatype BIE T tee lcco ino cn Ga Fe a 1 foo 3 foo 2 foo 10 foo afo 11 foo Gf afr 12 foo 5 foo 13 foo 6 foo 14 foo 7foo 15 foo na w Bump Data Array Figure 4 Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of print
100. the noted date codes If the lines or strikes have been barely visible there is a possibility that running some test cycles with good media will clean the heads If the lines or strikes indicate a heavier buildup the heads may have to be cleaned with alcohol There may be instances where cleaning the heads with alcohol will not remove the buildup and lines still appear on test prints In these cases the head must be removed and a new thermal head installed in the printer A T eee POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB SPECIAL P A NO TX94 6 DATE JULY 11 1994 TECH SERVICES QUAL CONTROL MAT L SERVICES OPERATIONS TO FROM SUBJECT LIST NICK CURRERI STRIPPED GEAR IN TX1100 TX2000 THERMAL PRINTERS lem The gear in question 6437411 is identified as key number 25A in Parts List 2 of the revised TX1100E Printer Parts Catalog dated June 1994 Analysis of this problem has determined that the gear can be stripped as a consequence of a media jam Specifically if message Error 14 is displayed on the printer readout it is an indication of a jam which must be cleared by a repair person If the printer is unplugged when message Error 14 is displayed the error message will not reappear when the machine is plugged in again and the customer will likely att
101. the positive side of the 22 mf 35 Vdc capacitor to the left hand lead of C31 4 The components should be fastened to the board with a non conductive adhesive Ensure that no leads lay across any conductors or components a CRT FIX jpg APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 03 23 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990323103749JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software SWERR ferrhist cpp Error Message Category Performance The purpose of this message is to alert service providers to a problem that ProPalette customers may experience Product Affected ProPalette 8000 amp 7000 Details The ProPalette will display an error message in the LCD panel The system passes the initial power on diagnostic test but will not go into the READY state It stops and with the error of SWERR ferrhist cpp 189 Error burning ERR After the initial diagnostics finish the just powered on message is generated as an error and written into flash memory as it is supposed to do If the error history in flash has somehow become corrupted it will set an error and attempt to restart and you re in a circular loop This problem is resolved in firmware version 565 705 and later Three attempts are made to write to
102. the situation the Customer will be instructed to return the defective Polaview prepaid and insured in the original or comparable packaging to Polaroid 784 Memorial Drive Cambridge Ma 02139 Attn Industrial Repair The Polaview will be repaired or exchanged and then returned to the Customer within 5 working days after the receipt of the defective unit by Polaroid International If outside the U S Customers must contact the nearest Polaroid Office addresses are in the rear of the User Manual Early Return Program To provide Polaroid with early information on Customer acceptance and performance of the Polaview an Early Returns Program is being implemented Under this program all defective Polaviews will be initially analyzed against performance standards estimated failure rates and estimated reliability standards in an attempt to isolate deviations address comments and questions from Customers and to recommend solutions Reports highlighting Early Return findings and information will be issued Warranty Policy All LCD Panels are warranted for one year from the date of purchase OutofWarranty Policy The procedures will be the same as they are for warranty repairs except the Customer will be charged for work performed parts and labor Parts Documentation Parts and Documentation for the LCD Panels will be available as follows DP1500 DP1800 3000 Parts Catalog 7 1 94 7 1 94 Parts Availability 8 15 94 7 1 94
103. this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N2 Page 4of6 gt Missing Profile This RGB image does not have an embedded profile Specify desired input conversion Input Conversion From Monitor calibrated to 1 8 gamma gt J To RGB Color gt j Engine Built in Intent Perceptual Images M Black Point Compensation d Make sure the Input Conversion choices are as shown in the illustration From Monitor calibrated to 1 8 gamma To RGB Color Engine Built in Intent Perceptual Images Black Point Compensation checked 5 Printing using color management profiles with Epson Inkjet 800 Following are some suggestions for setting up an Epson Stylus Color 800 Printer to print accurate images that were scanned using PolaColor Insight The Macintosh version of the printer driver dialog boxes is shown in the illustrations Windows dialog boxes are similar a The best quality results are obtained by using glossy inkjet photographic paper Make sure that the printer is set correctly for the paper that s used b For Space choose Colormatch RGB from the dropdown menu c Access the Main printer settings dialog box and click Advanced then More Settings See illustration Coptes 1 Pages all oC Citta tances Mode _ o Current Settings F Q Automatic f gt
104. units can be ordered from Polaroid Customer Service Support Material Services Department 748 Memorial Drive Cambridge MA 02139 1 Early Returns The first 25 defective units that are returned should be replaced and the defective unit forwarded with a completed Incident Awareness Form sample attached to Polaroid Corporation Attn Bob McCune Joe Dow Nor 4 1 Norwood Manufacturing Center Upland Road Norwood MA 02062 Fax a copy of the completed Incident Awareness Form to Ed Dacey in Cambridge at 617 577 4892 Incident Awareness Forms are available from Ed Dacey or Russ Battle at 784 Memorial Drive Cam bridge MA 02139 phone 617 577 2959 or 577 2921 2 Normal Returns Beyond the warranty period replacements for defective units can be purchased from CSS Material Services Department for 39 95 All defective units must be sent to Polaroid Customer Support Servic es Material Services Dept 784 Memorial Drive Cambridge MA 02139 TRAINING A Light Lock unit will be sent to each Polaroid Customer Service location in the Americas Europe and the Far East Customer service personnel should use the unit by following the instruction book and by observing the picture decal on top of the unit Light Lock is used in a manner similar to the cur rent manual draw string closeup lens attachment unit so there should be no need for any additional formal training A T POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support
105. use parts from earlier models in place of damaged re launch camera parts PARTS AVAILABILITY The unique piece parts for re launched Spectra and Image cameras will be available from the Material Sevices in Cambridge Massachusetts in the first quarter of 1994 Please order from normal sources Material Services will not make a final buy on existing decals buttons covers etc As older parts run out they will be replaced with the current updated parts The Materials Matrices on the following page show all the unique parts for the new models FRONT BACK FIGURE 1 NEW IMAGE IMAGE2 MODELS SPECTRA MODELS NOT AVAILABLE FOR PHOTO LEEELELRE RE RE RRR ERS POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int EXP SUB P A NO Spec 94 15 SPECIAL DATE February 3 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM ED DACEY SUBJECT NEW GOLD FLASH SHIELDS BACKGROUND During the first quarter of 1994 all manufacturing facilities will phase in the use of a new gold colored flash shield in place of the current peach colored shield This change will be made in all 600 line Sun hard body cameras Impulse Fixed Focus and Auto Focus cameras and Spectra Image cameras being manufactured Studies of the value of replacing the shield on folding 680 cameras are still underway Over the past several years
106. various improvements in photographic emulsions i e Star to Hybrid to Hybrid IV have resulted in a color offset between indoor and outdoor pictures that is now considered to be unacceptable The use of the new gold colored flash shield will yield color performance improve ments of 40 measuring color performance of flash pictures versus ambient pictures It is expected that this change will be perceived by our customers as an improvement which will lead to increased film sales REPAIR POLICY It is recommended that repair facilities replace the peach flash shield with the gold flash shield on any of the above listed cameras received for any repair Follow the instructions in the applicable Service Manuals for guidance in replacing the shields Inventories of flash assemblies with the peach flash shield should be reworked to the gold shield dis card all peach flash shields THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS PARTS AVAILABLITY Gold colored flash shields will be available after February 20 1994 Order them under the following part numbers CAMERA GOLD FLASH SHIELD P N 600 Line Sun Hard Body 550167E Impulse Fixed Focus Impulse Auto Focus and T91611C Spectra Image Please order from normal sources y A O EE POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION
107. version 3 When version 3 of Insight is installed without uninstalling version 2 the problem will not be seen This is the preferred method for installing Insight 3 Contact Gerald DiBello Email DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N1 Page 1 of 1 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN cra 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 PolaColor Insight Vol 2 No 2 From New Products Service Support Group Date May 17 1999 Subject Color Matching Tips for Insight v3 or later and Photoshop 5 x Products Affected SprintScan Models 4000 35ES 35 Plus 35LE 45 Problem You are using Photoshop version 5 x on a Macintosh or Windows PC Your scans and prints have color casts that are not seen on the original scanned image Its a good possibility that your are not following the Adobe recommended color management procedures required for Photoshop 5 x Solution Photoshop 5 Color Management Brief Summary A scanner interprets an image as certain RGB values according to the scanner s particular specifications and light sensitivity A given monitor displays RGB colors according to the specifications
108. 1 From New Products Service Support Group Date October 26 2000 Subject Windows 2000 SCSI error message seen when starting Insight Author Gerald DiBello Category Software Info Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to alert Telephone Support and Repair organizations regarding Windows 2000 and PolaColor Insight support issues Products affected PolaColor Insight version 4 5 4 5 1 and later Details When starting PolaColor Insight the user sees this error message Specified module could not be found and SCSI support found but no SCSI boards available In all cases the SCSI card was correctly installed because it is seen in the device manager Resolution 1 Checking to see if a SCSI card is recognized by Windows 2000 a Right click on the My Computer icon b Choose Properties Select the Hardware Tab Click the Device Manager button Check to see if a SCSI card is listed under the SCSI Controllers category If a SCSI card is shown go the Step 2 If not it is possible that the SCSI card is not seated correctly in its socket on the PC s motherboard gt 00 9a 0 xe Nn N a 2 Update the ASPI layer If it s an Adaptec SCSI card go to http Awww adaptec com support files upgrades html and download the file ASPI32 exe 3 Run ASPI32 exe to update or newly install an ASPI layer The software installer requires a re boot of the PC Note Just like the older Windows NT 4 an ASPI layer is not included with the operatin
109. 30 seconds Move the camera back to bring the second card into the exposure position Without exposing the second card pull the film frame Peel the film and examine the frame for signs of light leaks If the camera back or back plate have to be replaced for any reason also replace the two light seals 1A3902B and 1A3903B These light seals are identified in Plate 6 of the ID 4 Parts Catalog as key numbers 1 and 2 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS x A POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB p a no D4 94 17 SPECIAL DATE JUNE 10 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM DICK CURTIS SUBJECT NEW ELECTRONICS PACKAGE AND SHUTTER FOR ID 4 CAMERAS BACKGROUND Starting in June 1994 Manufacturing will be using a new electronics package and a new Polaroid designed shutter in the ID 4 camera The electronics package consists of four new pc boards display board mirror motor board ranging board and logic board The primary change on these boards is the use of modified connectors which should reduce the incidence of accidental uncoupling The shutter is designed to be easy to disassemble and reassemble without the need for special tools or fixtures INTERCHANGEABILITY The new ele
110. 570A Is06 or higher If an earlier issue digital board is used this method will work if the EPROM U103 has been upgraded with the ProPalette ROM v548 P N102423 Procedure Replace EPROM U103 on Digital board 1F5570A with part number 102423 Verify proper operation Ordering Information Polaroid Corporation Telephone 800 343 4846 or 781 386 5649 201 Burlington Rd Fax 781 386 5606 Material Services e mail Parts Department Polaroid com Bedford MA 01730 APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 Date 06 04 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990604102024JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Green Tint Resolution Category Performance The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a solution to the overall green color cast to their images This will be apparent when an image is exposed onto Kodak Elite II film Product Affected ProPalette 7000 Details The color transmission characteristics of the filters used in the ProPalette 7000 have changed due to process variations in the manufacturing of the filters The color properties for which the film table was designed have changed appreciably Since the manufacturing inventory contained a mix of old and new filters the color cast problem is not appa
111. 781 386 5471 Fax 781 386 561 1 RasterPlus Windows Edition Version 3 0 3 for Polaroid Software Information Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to provide Telephone Support and Repair organizations with information on the features of the new RasterPlus Windows Edition v3 0 Products Affected ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Series HR6000 C15000 Cl3000 Details RasterPlus Windows Edition v3 0 has been released as of the date of this bulletin The new software has the following feature changes New Feature Summary Windows 2000 support New User Interface New PostScript Level 3 PDF support Software Availability July 14 2000 PID Numbers 115445 Software CFR All ProPalettes 115533 Software for Cl and HR 115446 Software Upgrade All Palettes Note A previous version of RasterPlus mustalready be installed on the computer for the upgrade to install RasterPlus Version 3 0 3 Page 2 New Feature Listing Windows 2000 Support RasterPlus Windows Edition v3 0 fully supports Windows 2000 Professional and Windows 2000 Server with all the files needed for a seamless installation Notice Previous versions of RasterPlus RasterPlus95 v2 0 or earlier do not support Windows 2000 and may cause problems in the printing subsystem of the operating system NEW Visual Print Workflow with Archive The power of RasterPlus has never been easier to use With the new three step visual print workflow incoming files are placed
112. 94 for the SprintScan and PolaScan 35 Plus slide scanners The new version firmware corrects a potential problem of the CCD Config code resetting itself e Serial number suffix of scanners containing the NEW firmware is D e Beginning serial number of scanners with NEW firmware C801487D e Resolution Background First let s review SprintScan Product Alert 97 2 that talks about SprintScan Polascan scanners using version 5 90 firmware with new modified CCD boards When the new modified blue filter CCD board was introduced beginning with scanner Serial Number F7xxxxC a feature called the Config code standing for Configuration was added The Config code is a way to tell the scanner firmware what type of CCD is being used You set the Config code by using LabVIEW Image Performance Test or application software to read and or change the Config setting For example if an older CCD board is replaced in a scanner with a new modified type the Config must be reset from a O toa Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N5 Page 1 of 2 The Config setting procedure changes when a Controller Board has the new version 5 94 firmware installed The 5 94 firmware was changed i
113. 94542JF KnowledgeBase Polaroid 06 17 98 09 48 35 AM Use the camera adjust feature built into the driver application In RasterPlus95 the procedure is detailed on page 3 29 of the software manual that accompanies the CD ROM for Windows For the Macintosh software the procedure is on page 3 14 of the manual The date of the manual in either case is 3 97 Approvals Entered by Jordan Freedman 06 17 98 Approved by Joseph J Oleary lIl LNOTES POLAROID US 06 17 98 10 00 13 AM 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission v4 Repair Info Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base o RIB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 07 02 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 98070208431 0JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Image Quality Received on Film Horizontal Line Artifacts Details Diagrams Issue The ProPalette product is susceptible to horizontal line artifacts in the image These notes are suggestions that point to the possible causes for these artifacts Details 1 Check to make sure that no other electrical devices are close enough to the unit that could cause electro magnetic interference Monitors and electric motors are common culprits Never stack film recorders Never run a film recorder back to back with the computer s monitor or CPU 2 Check to make sure that the surface use
114. APPROVALS 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 8000 Date 11 24 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 981124102322JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware CRT Serial Number Verification Product Affected ProPalette 8000 Category With the introduction of firmware version 564 the ProPalette now has the capability to store the serial number of the unit in flash memory This functionality is required so that the installed firmware can adjust the exposure parameters appropriately for the different CRTS that are available for the ProPalette 8000 Details ProPalette 8000 s have been manufactured with two types of CRT the original AEG and the current Thomas tubes Future improvements in the CRT are currently planned The eighth character in the serial number defines what type of CRT is installed it can only be a blank T or W in the serial number otherwise a software error will be reported on the LCD panel Blank means AEG CRT clear gun initial production T indicates a first generation Thomas CRT black gun our current production W means the future 2nd generation CRT white gun future production The firmware will change the color balance amp cos4 parameters to compensate for the installed CRT based upon the serial number This
115. B2218A Retainer Plate Assembly 13 1D1020A Cushion 2 14 1B2209A Opening Spring 15 1B2239A Exposure Cable Solenoid Assembly 16 1A4740A Connector 4Pin Comes with assembly 17 1B2221A Compression Spring 18 1B2207A Pivot Walking Beam 19 1B2222A Plunger Adapter 20 770B90A Roll Pin 2 21 2725070 Polarizer Assembly in Current Product 22 797105A Compression Spring 23 770890A Roll Pin 24 794B95A Brightener Solenoid Assembly 25 1 B3255B Screw 256 Panhead 26 1 B2204A Lens Mounffng Plate 27 1B2211A C Element Mount 2B 1B3301C Pin Dowel 093 Diamet 29 1 B2206A Shutter Blade Bottom 30 182205A Shutter Top Blade ye ee POLAROID ia Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P a No ID4 95 21 SPECIAL pate AUGUST 1 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM DICK CURTIS SUBJECT UPPER MIRROR MOTOR ASSY PROBLEM IN VERTICAL ID 4 s PROBLEM If you receive an ID 4 vertical format system for repair with complaints of multiple indi cator lights illuminating on the display board and or a shutter malfunction the problem may be caused by a small piece of black masking tape on the mirror carrier This problem is most apt to occur in vertical format systems manufactured during Octo ber of 1994 The black masking tape was used in a rework of horizontal format ID 4 s and s
116. CD ROM is scheduled to be available July 1999 gt English version including Adobe PhotoDeluxe 2 0 PID No 103224 gt Five language version without PhotoDeluxe PID No 103242 New Feature Listing Macintosh Version New Scratch Disk Selection Description During image processing on Macintosh computers PolaColor Insight software stores temporary files on the hard disk The disk used for these files is called the scratch disk If necessary you can select a different drive for use as a scratch disk with these steps Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N4 Page 1 of 2 1 Click Preferences on the Edit menu 2 Click the Scratch Disk popup and select a disk drive 3 Click OK New Settings File Converter Description Allows settings files that were created in earlier versions of PolaColor Insight to be recognized and used by version 3 5 Macintosh and Windows New 12 bit per channel 36 bit raw image file format Description PolaColor Insight Version 3 5 allows images to be saved in a 12 bit per channel format intended for highly sophisticated image processing with other applications or for scientific and analytical uses These 12 bit per chann
117. CONNECTOR Fig 1 Restyled Spectra I Image Camera urrently includes nq Ju the restyling program the Spectra A Spectra SE Image E te and Spectra 2 1 mage 2 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS LAUNCH PROMOTION Introduction of the restyled cameras will be supported by regional promo tions and publicity as well as dealer co op and POS materials WARRANTY U S MARKET For the U S market each camera line will carry the following warranty SE Elite Lifetime A Five years 2 One year For markets other than the U S please consult the marketing managers or the Restyled Camera Operations Manual CUSTOMER SERVICE Spectra cameras with a 12 digit code with serial number beginning with K4 October 1994 and ending with either F for Spectra SE Image Elite E for Spectra Image A or D for Spectra Image 2 are restyled cameras Example K4BxxxxxVHBE In addition to the various Warranty periods listed above the camera lines will also feature SE Elite Glass coated lens perfect picture guarantee program U S Image Elite NPPK only A and 2 Standard Warranty No early returns program will be needed but customer data will be reviewed to identify any issue related to the restyled components PID NUMBERS
118. Cameras manufactured from mid June 1993 onward NOTE Old Pick Assemblies with flag can be identified in older Cameras manufactured before mid June 1993 by moving the Pick forward and viewing the flag in the bottom of the Viewfinder Change the Pick Assembly only if it is defective PART AVAILABILITY Pick Assembly P N T12540SK09 is available from Material Services in Cambridge Order through ormal sources n The older Pick Assemblies are not interchangeable with the new P N T12540SK09 design thus you G should maintain supplies of both styles Fig 1 Redesigned Pick Assy P N T12540SK09 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS REPAIR POLICY tab height reduced 4 POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO SPECIAL DATE TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO EEST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE NEW JOSHUA COUNTER WHEEL P N 1A2084B SUBJECT Both of the new Counter Wheels have a slightly shorter and wider cam or tab to actuate the End Of Pack EOP Switch to solve a problem caused by interference with the EOP switch wire This wire could trap the Counter Wheel producing a false End Of Pack signal and preventing the Counter Wheel from resetting
119. Configuration code to be changed are e Slide scanner has modified type Config 1 CCD but incorrectly configured for it Slide scanner does not have modified type Config 1 CCD but correctly configured for it Config code set to 1 should be 0 For PC or PC Compatible Computers Reading CCD Configuration Code 1 Start up PhotoShop or SprintScan Direct application 2 Check Configuration code under the Help menu in the SprintScan 35 Preview window 3 Select Help menu and then choose Diagnostic The Diagnostic window Figure 3 appears indicating e Firmware Version e CCD Configuration Note The example shown in Figure 3 indicates that a Config 0 CCD is ina SS35 Plus slide scanner with version 5 90 firmware i SprintScan 35 Plus Preview File Image Help Info Ed SCS Manager Win4SPI 32 Adapter ID 0 Scanner ID 6 Firmware CCD Type CS270032 TK270032 2 6 3 PLSCSI32 3 1 FilmID b706e3 L1 CO Number of Scans 15 Calibration Info FFFF 0000 Figure 3 Diagnostic window Changing CCD Configuration Code 1 Start up Photoshop or SprintScan Direct application 2 Activate SprintScan Control Panel window 3 While holding down the Alt key press B key on the computer keyboard Once the warning message dialog box appears about using the Debug function cancel it The Debug menu choice Figure 4 appears in the Preview window i SprintScan 35 Preview File Image Debug Help i Datatype M
120. D 100 Camera will be available in the Horizontal format only APPLICATIONS MARKETS The ID 100 System is designed for non DMV applications with low to medium print volume Expected users include manufacturing and service companies schools hospitals local government agencies etc THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS 4 New ID 100 Photo ID System cont d 2 WARRANTY U S A Polaroid warrants the ID 100 Camera Die Cutter and Laminator for one year from the date of sale WARRANTY OUTSIDE U S A A warranty for non U S A customers will be developed by Polaroid subsidiaries EARLY RETURNS U S A To provide an opportunity for complete product analysis all ID 100 Systems will be centrally repaired by the manufacturer during the Early Returns Program The Early Returns Program will exist for the first six months after introduction or the first 50 units whichever comes first An Incident Awareness Form IAF should be completed by the first Polaroid representative in contact with the customer Systems to be serviced and the IAF should be shipped to Polaroid Corporation 784 Memorial Drive Cambridge MA 02139 ATTN Dwayne Billingsley Use of exchange units issued by Oak Brook will be promoted for custom ers requiring service SERVICE PLAN U S A Ongoing After the Early
121. Dig Pal 95 8 SPECIAL DATE October 30 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM ARVIN ARVIND SUBJECT USER MANUALS FOR CI3000 CI5000 HR6000 DIGITAL PALETTES User Manuals for the Digital Palette Color Film Recorder line are now available through Material Servic es in Bedford Massachusetts The table below shows the part numbers of each of these manuals Please make the necessary pen and ink additions to your copy of the Digital Palette Film Recorder CI3000 CI5000 and HR6000 Parts Catalog dated January 1995 Part No Part Description 1E0529A HR6000 CI5000S CI3000S Digital Film Recorders Hardware Manual 1E0528A HR6000 CI5000S CI3000S Digital Film Recorders DOS Software Manual 1E0527A HR6000 CI5000S Digital Film Recorders Macintosh Softare Manual Please order these manuals through normal sources THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS A T POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB P A NO Dig Pal 95 9 SPECIAL DATE October 30 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM ARVIN ARVIND SUBJECT INTRODUCTION OF NEW 35MM CAMERA BACKS ADAPTORS FOR DIGITAL PALETTE LINE Fi gt New 35mm Came
122. E 2 LOOK THROUGH SHUTTER LENS FRESNEL MIRROR DIRT WILL BE IN SHARP FOCUS C C MIRROR DIRT OUT OF FOCUS 3 LOOK THROUGH EYE LENS FRESNEL DIRT SCRATCH ALWAYS IN SHARP FOCUS TMC WON T LAY FLAT CHECK FOR BAFFLE WIRE N S THOUGH HOLE S IN BAFFLE CHECK BAFFLE D ISTORTION CHECK FOR BENT TAKING BAFFLE WIRES CHECK FOR D IRT IN MAIN FRAME SLOT FOR TMC CHECK FOR INNER VIEW FINDER EYE LENS CLIP N S TO MAIN FRAME CHECK FOR LONG PIN SHORT PIN CHECK FOR INNER VF EYE LENS PUSHED IN TOO FAR AT BOTTOM S FEATURE OF BAFFLE HITS TAKING MIRROR ONDUAN GREEN LIGHT ALWAYS ON 1 CHECK FILM SHADE HANG UP BLACK BAR TAKING BAFFLE WIRE NOT SEATED IN BAFFLE PROPERLY DISTORTED PIVOTS ON VIEWING MIRROR CARRIER BENT TAKING BAFFLE WIRE S BENT BAFFLE FLASHING ON MAINFRAME PIVOT AREA INNER VIEW FINDER EYELENS CLIP NOT SEATED REAR SEAL NOT SEATED ON V M C BELLOWS NOT SEATED PROPERLY IN REAR SEAL RECOCK LINK BENT FORWARD 10 FLASH ON MAIN FRAME ABOVE TMC PIVOT 11 BROKEN MAIN FRAME POST BY RECOCK LINK HOOK CAONIDKNARWNE CAMERA CYCLES W DOOR OPEN 1 CHECK THAT VER AND B WIRES ARE SEATED PROPERLY INTO DOOR LATCH SENSOR AND ERECT SENSOR 2 CHECK THAT DOOR LATCH IS IN THE MIDDLE OF THE BOTTOM CHUTE SLOT WHEN THE DOOR IS OPEN A T ep POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT
123. EPT 22 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM BILL BOBROWSKI SUBJECT INTRODUCTION OF THE POLAROID PICTUREDRIVE LINE BACKGROUND Polaroid is introducing a new line of removable computer hard disk drives which are intended primarily for users with high memory storage needs These include graphic designers desktop publishers imaging and multi media experts There are three drives in the line and they are called PictureDrive 270 can read and write 3 5 cartridges in 270MB and 105MB formats PictureDrive 200 can read and write 5 25 cartridges in 200MB 88MB and 44MB formats PictureDrive 88 can read and write 5 25 cartridges in 88MB and 44MB formats Each PictureDrive is based upon proven Winchester drive mechanism technology and each uses fast reliable SyQuest cartridges Each drive also features automatic error detection correction and extensive defect management The PictureDrive 270 typical of all three drives is shown in Figure 1 Figure 1 Picture Drive 270 with SyQuest Cartridges 4 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS DESCRIPTION Each of the PictureDrives has a SCSI II interface to provide fast access times In fact the PictureDrives are described as the only secondary storage drives which are fast enough to be primary drives They have burst data transfer rates of up to SMB per second
124. EXE or HQX is downloaded from the Polaroid web site APPROVALS 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 01 11 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990111163912JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware OSSTRTUP Error Message Details There have a number of non fatal error messages reported from the field The displayed error message will typically read SWERR OSSTRTUP CPP 155 2 UD These are caused by a static charge generated by the Mylar film substrate when the film is pulled out of the film canister to load into the mounted 35mm camera The discharge path into the ProPalette is through the DX encoding pins that contact the film canister This is aggravated by the extremely dry seasonal weather Resolution Two workarounds will help to eliminate this problem Reset the ProPalette with the switch on the rear chassis This will clear the non fatal error and allow proper operation Pull out 1 2 inches of film from the film canister before installing it into the mounted 35mm camera This will allow the built up charge to be dissipated before the DX pins are engaged APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Serv
125. FLASHMAN and follow the same instructions APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 05 25 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990525083938JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Adaptec 1542 SCSI Controller Category The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a problem that customers may experience when communicating between an Adaptec 1542 SCSI card in a Wintel PC and a ProPalette that has firmware version 567 707 installed Product Affected ProPalette 7000 and ProPalette 8000 Details A problem in firmware version 567 707 will cause the RasterPlus driver to incorrectly report that the ProPalette is either disconnected busy or off This firmware was only available from the Polaroid web site to resolve a SCSI problem encountered by the G3 Macintosh No product was shipped from the factory with this version Resolution There is no work around for this hardware software configuration A new version of the firmware 568 708 which will work with this combination is being tested and will be available from the Polaroid web site The new firmware will address this SCSI issue supplementary film names have been added to the Lock Film Names menu and the Lock Camera Type function has
126. Gear These changes were made in Joshua A and Date models beginning with mid May 1994 E4 production The new ROM was installed to help reduce film jams and or mid cycle problems Spe cifically it ignores the Full Chamber Switch a source of electrical contact noise see Fig 1 and in conjunction with the new Timing Gear allows the DKEC switch For the Joshua Date the ROM 11 Shutter PC Board Flash Tube Assembly is P N 1A2438D They are not interchangeable The new Timing Gear which must be used with the new PC Board Flash Tube Assembly is P N 1A2077B see Fig 2 to electrically open and close only once per cycle not twice as previously Note the cam action of the Timing Gear in Fig 2 PART NUMBERS The ROM 11 Shutter PC Board Flash Tube Assembly for Joshua A Cameras is P N 1A2485E p THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Joshua ROM 11 Shutter PC Board Flash Tube Assy amp Timing Gear Two DKEC Switch closures ROM 10 control with standard 5 Wire Switch and std Timing Gear 4 mid cycle failures occurred Note noise on Full Chamber Switch im One DKEC Switch closure ROM 11 with std 5 Wire Switch amp new Timing Gear no failures ROM 14 ignores noisy Full Chamber Switch signal Two DKEC Switch closures ROM 10 with gold plated 5 Wire Switch amp std Timing Gear No noise on Full Ch Switch no failures Fig 1 DKEC
127. H IT REFERS The serial number contains the following information lst 2nd charac charac Month Year A Jan 7 1987 B Feb 8 1988 C Mar 9 1989 D Apr 0 1990 E May 1 1991 F Jun 2 1992 G Jul 3 1993 H Aug 4 1994 J Sep 1995 K Oct 6 1996 L Nov 7 1997 I omitted Example This camera was manufactured on 3rd charac Day of 4th 8th charac letter Consecutive Manufacturing Config the month Serial No A 1 B 2 etc Z 24 5 25 6 26 To 27 8 28 9 29 0 30 1 31 I amp O omitted 00001 thru 99999 M Dec etc N F 3B 99999 NAFA 1993 with sequential serial 99999 in Norwood and carries the Baseline Configuration A is a Joshua type and Model A 9th charac Location Norwood Vale of Leven China 10th 1lith 12th charac charac charac letter Group Bo SAA EF I amp O Joshua omitted AS Baseline B Non scratch CaS Datet series Crescent fix D Rear Lens Baffle rev Baseblock amp Cres fix fully implem by 9 27 93 T E B Shutter PC Bd to ROM 11 and new Timing Gear 1A2077B Product Model y A E eee POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 9B SPECIAL DATE FEBRUARY 22 1995 TECH SERVICE
128. Harro Limbo at 784MD 2B in Cambridge Massachusetts at PTN 221 4424 Kim Wyman at 565TS 8M in Cambridge Massachusetts at PTN 226 6011 Stephen McGrogan at Vale of Leven Scotland at PTN 240 2378 A ny ay POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB P A NO DIGPAL 94 5A SPECIAL DATE DECEMBER 9 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM NICK CURRERI SUBJECT NEW HR 6000 HIGH RESOLUTION DIGITAL PALETTE PERFORMANCE DESCRIPTION A new high resolution Digital Palet creat tte Color Film Recorder for ti ng professional quality 35mm slides in min and workstations introd prints and chromes utes from personal computers has recently been uced by Polaroid The new HI at rig optics dynamic R 6000 P ID 619282 shown N t contains enhanced Polaroid a hig focus h precision 3 CRT and circuitry which produces 4000 line resolution slides which are sharp out to the edges and corners The HR 6000 reproduces up to 24 bit color images using a proprietary internal 33 bit color exposure process delivering smooth ramped backgrounds with up to 16 7 million colors New HR 6000 High Resolution Digital Palette Color Film Recorder THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERV
129. I VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY Details Diagrams Problem Almost all of the ProPalette 7000 high voltage power supplies manufactured between June and September 97 have difficulty starting at 28V This is within the acceptable range of the power supplied by the low voltage power supply Reason The vendor agrees that the design was not robust enough for the variation in components The date code is embedded in serial number in the format yymmxxx Solution All ProPalette 7000 s with start up problems or non repeatable failures should be checked for HV Power Supply compliance All those units that are affected should go back to Service for repair The unit must be re aligned at a qualified Service Center after a replacement of the high voltage power supply Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 12 22 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 971222095003JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software MAC OS8 Details Diagrams Subject Situation Palette for Macintosh v4 1 2 softwa
130. ICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS n O O HR 6000 Digital Palette CFR cont d ae a FEATURES The new HR 6000 Digital Palette for both IBM and Macintosh computers can utilize more than 20 types of film It can be equipped with camera backs for the following films 35mm 31 X 41 pack film 3 x 4 AutoFilm 4 x 5 pack film Bulk film back from third party source o000o0 0 COMPATIBILITY The HR 6000 is a universal color film recorder for both IBM and Macintosh computers On both platforms it supports networking with Zenographics SuperPrint for the Digital Palette for Windows Graphx RasterPlus P S for DOS Windows and Digital Palette software for Macintosh WARRANTY The HR 6000 Digital Palette is warranted for one year from date of purchase by original user Warranty extension in the form of service contracts will be available Contract types and periods will be described in a later bulletin SERVICE U S A The HR 6000 is the latest addition to the CI 3000 CI 5000 product line and as such will have the same repair policies and technical assistance provi sions An Early Returns Program operating in the first few months following prod uct introduction will analy defective units returned to 784 Memorial Drive in Cambridge Analysis will compare defects to performance stan dards estimated failure rates and reliability standards in an effort t
131. ICH IT REFERS SERIAL NUMBER CODE JOSHUA SERI ES CAMERAS The serial number contains the following information lst charac Month oll a is s AG c o Y o DIR ORR O ll Q S TET e Th as Ga D D G iQ j J Sep K Oct L Nov M Dec I omitt Example June 2nd 1993 2nd charac Year 7 1987 8 1988 9 1989 0 1990 1 1991 2 1992 3 1993 4 1994 1995 6 1996 7 1997 ete ed This camera was manufactured on 3rd 4th 8th 9th 10th 11th charac charac charac charac charac letter Day of Consecutive Manufacturing Config Product the month Serial No Location letter Group A 1 00001 N Norwood A Z F B 2 V Vale of etc thru Leven I amp O Joshua Z 24 C China omitted 5 25 99999 6 26 A 7 27 Baseline 8 28 9 29 B 0 30 Non scratch 1 31 C I amp O Datet series omitted Crescent fix F 3 B 99999 NAFA with sequential serial 9 99 99 in Norwood and carries the Baseline Configuration A is a Joshua type and Mo del A IE Rear Lens Baffle rev Baseblock amp Cres fix fully implem by 9 27 93 E Shutter PC Bd to ROM 11 and new Timing Gear 1A2077B 12th charac Model y A E eee FROM LIST A RUSSELL D BATTL POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT A
132. IT REFERS A KUNKNNNRNRN NU 1 Remove the camera front cover 2 Remove the two screws securing the strobe assembly and lift the assembly aside to the extent its electrical leads allow This provides access to the shutter solenoid 3 Refer to Figure below Remove the three screws holding the retaining plate and disengage the extension spring between the plate and the interceptor Set the retaining plate aside 4 Firmly seat the solenoid in its nest on the mounting plate being certain that it is properly aligned with the walking beam Apply a thin bead of hot melt glue Black and Decker 22235 on both sides of the solenoid as shown 5 When the glue has cooled apply pressure to the solenoid It should not be able to move up or down or side to side and must be aligned with the walking beam If these conditions are not met repeat steps 4 and 5 6 Reassemble the shutter and the camera head 7 Power up the camera head and cycle it five times to ensure that the blades are opening and closing correctly If they are not determine the reason and correct it 8 Mark the letter G after the serial number on the camera head to indicate that this procedure has been done 9 Keep a record of the number of camera heads returned for this failure and whether any camera heads are returned for this failure after the hot melt glue procedure has been completed This information will be needed for the monitoring program mentioned earlier
133. Insight Version 3 b New Support for the SprintScan 45 c New Tone Curve tab adds tone curve correction white and black eyedroppers d New Support for the newly released SprintScan 4000 scanner e New PolaColor Insight plug in for the Macintosh e Details PolaColor Insight and Windows 98 Version 2 of PolaColor Insight would only recognize a SprintScan under Windows 98 if it was registered as an Imaging Device see SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N1 Version 3 of Insight drops this requirement When installing a SprintScan under Windows 98 it should appear in the Device Manager as a Polaroid Scanner For reliable operation ASPI must be functional and up to date with latest revisions from Adaptec version 4 57 as of the date of this bulletin and the miniport driver for the SCSI host adapter that s used should be the most current revision You can check for a functional ASPI layer with the program named ASPICHK exe that s available on the Adaptec website As of the date of this bulletin it is available at the following address http www adaptec com cgi bin drivers pl Note that Adaptec has some miniport drivers that are just for Windows 98 use the special driver if it exists Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document
134. Interchangeability SprintScan 35 with Filter Wheel SprintScan 35 with Light Tunnel Old Style Board Direct Replacement Can be used as a replacement with following change changes e Resistor R5 must be unsoldered and removed New Style Board Can be used as a replacement with Direct Replacement following change changes e Remove resistor R5 from the old PC Board being removed and solder itonto the new replacement PC board e Remove optical switch U4 from the old PC Board being removed and solder itonto the new replacement PC board e Connect filter wheel assembly cable to connector J4 POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 35mm Scan 97 1 SPECIAL DATE April 1997 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM Gerald DiBello SUBJECT 2 PIXEL WIDE STREAKS CAUSED BY DEFECTIVE A D CONVERTER U18 Background One to two percent of SS35 Plus controller PC boards P N AA0977A produced in 1996 may have a defective A D converter U18 P N XR D8794AIK Defective A D converters cause random vertical streaks spaced 2 pixels apart in the scanned images Suspected A D converters have a date code less than 9646 Figure 1 Controller PC board 9603 A D Converter U 18 Figure 1 A D converter location THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MA
135. K ey Replacing the chips should resolve the problem defined above Verify image quality before performing a geometery realignment on the unit APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product Product Type Product Group Category ProPalette 8000 Date 02 05 99 Film Recorder Document 990205102212JF PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Hardware 1AH823A Analog Board Modifications Performance The purpose of this bulletin is to provide service providers with a board modification process to upgrade the 1AH823A Analog board Product Affected 1AH823A Analog board for the ProPalette 8000 Details These procedures will upgrade the functionality of the 1AH823A Is01 or Is01B Analog board for the ProPalette 8000 to match the functionality of the 1AH823A Is01C in two steps Process Step 1 1AH823A Is01 to 1AH823A Is01B U18 Protection This modification is required to protect U18 on the Analog board from high voltage discharge from the CRT yoke Ensure that the added components have very short leads and are mounted as close as possible to the pins of the U6 and U31 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1 Connect a diode 2 Connect a diode 3 Connect a diode 4 Connect a diode between pin 2 and 4 of U6 cathode to pin 2 between pin 2 and 7 of U6 cathode to pin 7 between pin 2 an
136. LERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 9A SPECIAL DATE JULY 5 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS This is an UPDATE of Product Alert JOSH 94 9 dated 2 27 94 SUBJECT JOSHUA A and DATE CONFIGURATION E ADDED TO A THROUGH D wo guration E is announced for Jos help reduce mid cycle and film jams is de dated E designation appears as the 10t opened All present Joshua configurations are summarized below Configuration Effective Description Letter Date On th h character of the 12 character serial number A 7 29 92 Baseline Configuration B 3 15 93 Non Scratch Fix 8 23 93 Date Camera Series Crescent Fix D 9 24 93 Added Rear Lens Baffle revised Baseblock Crescent Fix fully implemented by 9 27 93 Film Support E 5 5 94 ROM 11 on Shutter PC Board and new Timing Gear reverse side of this bulletin i in the 12 character Serial Number code Confi Shutter PC Board is upgraded to the ROM 11 chip and a new Timing Gear 1A2077B is being used How these new components scribed in Product Alert JOSH 94 t The i Leda on a label inside the Camera and visible when the Picture Removal Door is s an explanation of the information contained hua A and Date Cameras indicating that the THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHIC
137. Letter Advanced Ay Portrait More Settings Custam s Save Settings 2 Superfine 1440 dpi Q MicroWeave 0n psa coor 2 High Speed on Media Type Photo Quality Ink Jet 1 gt Lalor Q Black amp Colorsync MrrintSelectedArea Space ColorMaten RGB 3 4 Printer Color Management d In the More Settings dialog box select see illustration Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N2 Page 5of6 a eo f Color Hf Print Quality Superfine 1440 amp a Quamty superne 1440012 G cotor adjustment Mediatype Photo Qualityink Mode ms Brightness w Ppt Contrast SEIIS EESE saturation See SSE Halfoning cyan a Error Dittuston z Magenta aree If cmc Yellow noccocad ooococcc a Microw eave O Phototnhance O Super ColorSync Profile EPSONStanda gt High Speed aa sees Rendering Intent Perceptual 5 ii O flip Horizontal Heed Finest Detall Help j Cancel j T Superfine 1440 dpi for Print Quality Error Diffusion for Halftoning Epson Standard for ColorSync Profile Perceptual for Rendering e Clo
138. MENT PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 35MM Scan 95 5 SPECIAL DATE June 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT STREAKING CAUSED BY DEFECTIVE VERTICAL CLOCK DRIVER U9 PROBLEM Recently a scanner was returned for repair with the customer complaining of streaks in the images This particular scanner had been upgraded with an issue 02 Controller Board 1E6536 Additionally the Sensor Board 1E6533 had been upgraded to issue 02 Through thorough engineering analysis the cause of the streaking was positively determined to be a defective vertical clock driver U9 This failure warrants special attention because aside from the streaking the scanner was normal in every other aspect The streaks were not visible in all images and it is likely that this unit would have passed LabView testing Because of the subtlety of this failure mode all scanners returned for repair should be subjected to the following test before they are returned to the customer OVET THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS TESTING 1 Connect the negative lead of a DC voltmeter to the scanner back panel ground a Place the voltmeter positive probe on the VCLK NEG pad of the Sensor Board see Figure 1 the voltage should be 6 0 VDC 5 volts 3 Now place the voltmeter positive probe on the VCLK POS pad of the Sensor Board Fig
139. Monitor mode See ProPalette 8000 Service Manual Section 4 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Procedure 1 Disable watchdog timer Enable Monitor mode Connect ProPalette to computer through COMM port Turn on ProPalette Run terminal emulator Confirm communication to ProPalete Upload FLASHMAN HEX to ProPalette Run FLASHMAN HEX Remove the Control Code by entering the commands R lt cr gt 1 lt cr gt 10 Note that code block 1 is gone 11 Upload the new Control Code by entering the commands H lt cr gt 1 lt cr gt Respond to the question Enter data name string with CONGO Wh the_firmware lt cr gt At the prompt Ready to receive hex file Press Pg Up Re lt cr gt Type in the fully qualified path to the CNTRL HEX file if it isn t in the active directory d path xxCNTRL HEX lt cr gt xx KA for the ProPalette 8000 xx VT for the ProPalette 7000 12 After the upload is complete wait until the flash is programmed and the Flashman menu re appears 13 Note that code block 1 is back 14 Shut down the ProPalette 15 Enable watchdog timer 16 Disable Monitor mode 17 Turn on the ProPalette and verify that it functions properly Contact Jordan Freedman via E mail Freedman Jordan Internet freedmj1 polaroid com Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design
140. NDOWS SYSTEM where C is the typical letter designating the root drive A second way to get the driver is to download it from Microsoft Connect to the following Microsoft FTP site on the World Wide Web ftp ftp microsoft com services whql drivers win95 printr Download the file named A1701 exe A1701 exe is a self extracting file that once expanded contains the lpd vxd file Copy this file to the WINDOWS SYSTEM folder After the file is updated restart the PC After restarting try printing again Print time should now be about 30 seconds Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Parallel Bulletin V1 N1 Page 1 of 1 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot Parallel Vol 1 No 2 From New Products Service Support Group Date October 9 1998 Subject Problems with Printer Installation Operation Compaq Deskpro PC s Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this message is to alert Telephone Service and Repair providers regarding the solution to problems the can happen when installing the ColorShot Parallel on Compaq
141. NUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS This failure requires special attention because aside from the vertical streaks the slide scanner operates normally in all other aspects The streaks will not be visible in all scanned images and it s possible that the slide scanner will pass a LabView test Because of the subtlety of this malfunction it is recommended that all SS35 PLUS slide scanners returned for repair with serial numbers from H6 XXXXX Y to M6 XXXXX Y X is a number from 0 to 9 Y is a letter from A to Z be tested before they are returned Serial Number Identification and location Identification The serial number identifies the SS35 PLUS slide scanner as follows Notes Ifthe slide scanner serial number _is from H6 XXXXX Y to M6 XXXXX Y X is a number from 0 to 9 Y is a letter from A to Z testing is required Perform the A D Converter Streak Test procedure in this Product Alert e Ifthe slide scanner serial number is not from H6 XXXXX Y to M6 XXXXX Y X is a number from 0 to 9 Y is a letter from A to Z no testing is required Month A January H August Sequential Number ri 00634 B Year 6 1996 Hardware Configuration Level 7 1997 Location Figure 2 The Serial Number is located e On the outside of the shipping carton e Bottom of the slide scanner Serial no on bottom of the slide scanner SERIAL NO NO DE SERIE S N M601490B Figure 2 Serial number location Checking and Testing Tools N
142. O DOC Palette for Macintosh Information RP95INFO DOC RasterPlus95 Information TROUBLE DOC Palette Troubleshooting Information aa NOTE These files are formatted for MSWord v7 0 trouble doc PaletQnA DOC pro8info doc rp95info doc macinfo doc Distribution APPROVALS DX Int l EXP L CPS Tech Services L Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission v4 Software Info Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base o SIB Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 06 11 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970611160418JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Received on Film COLOR TUNE Details Diagrams Subject Situation Palette ColorTune a film tables utility for matching the computer monitor to the film output of a ProPalette 8000 is currently available on Polaroid s FTP site Both Macintosh and Windows 95 versions are available Actions Solutions The easiest way to get to Polaroid s FTP Internet site is from the World Wide Web site From Polaroid s Home page www Polaroid com please click on Software Drivers and Film Table Files at the bottom of the ProPalette 8000 More Info page This procedure will bring you directly to the P
143. OL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM NICK CURRERI SUBJECT UPGRADING THE HR 6000 TO B CONFIGURATION Problems with HR 6000 CRT s combined with luminance stability problems have led to needed design changes All HR 6000 A type configurations that are returned from the field must be upgraded to a B type configuration Table 1 shows the two HR 6000 configurations and their differences Table 1 HR 6000 Configurations BACKGROUND Configuration A Configuration B Firmware 5 05 5 06 Version Monitor PC Original 01 PCB Reworked to 02 PCB Board CRT Old Phosphor Old Phosphor CRT Clamp 120 oz in 120 oz in Adjustment Adjustments Luma Same as CI 3000 5000 R18 6 0 ft 1 150 AutoLuma Same as CI 3000 5000 VRI 200 6 0 ft l Dark Current Same as CI 3000 5000 Same as CI 3000 5000 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Table 2 lists and describes the upgrades to B from A configurations Upgrade Firmware 5 06 Monitor PC Reworked to Board issue 02 Autoluma Monitor PC Board Calibration Logic PC Board Table 2 HR 6000 Upgrades Description Includes 5 06 changes for autoluma Change E PROM to version 5 06 Set potentiometer R29 to 270 K ohms Set potentiometer R55 to zero 0 ohms Change resistor R34 to 1 3 M ohms Set R18 luminant to 6 0 ft 1 150 Set VR1 autoluma to 200 6 0 ft 1 Function Elimin
144. ORATION Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB P A NO 35mm 94 4 SPECIAL DATE April 14 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM FRANK BLESZINSKI SUBJECT INTRODUCTION OF TWO NEW POLAROID 35MM CAMERAS FOCUS FREE AND AUTOFOCUS DATE BACK MODELS Background Polaroid has been marketing two low cost 35mm cameras in the U S under the names Polaroid One Film Camera Autofocus and Polaroid One Film Camera Fixed Focus These models will be discontinued To fill their place in the product family a new line identified as the 1240 series is being introduced The 1240 line consists of two new compact 35mm cameras an autofocus model with a date imprint feature and a focus free fixed focus autoflash model These cameras have been designed and manufactured for Polaroid with an exclusive Polaroid body design Introduction of the new cameras is planned for May of 1994 in the Americas Australia Scandinavia and European Export markets Other European introductions will coincide with the September 1994 Photokina Exposition It is expected that the cameras will be introduced in a variety of kits which may include Polaroid 35mm color print film AAA alkaline batteries a pouch a camera strap an instruction booklet and the camera Additional informatio
145. PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Image Quality Image Tilt Details Diagrams l Subject Situation Reports of tilted and otherwise misaligned images have been filtering in over the past three months for the ProPalette 8000 This issue is easiest identified by examining a strip of film that has been exposed by the ProPalette 8000 and observing every image on the strip having an identical rotation of a few degrees from zero Severe cases show the corner of the image being clipped off on every image Rotated images are caused by the yoke of the CRT slipping and or rotating during extremely severe shipping conditions of ProPalette 8000 units This issue has been limited to the ProPalette 8000 model due to its heavy yoke assembly relative to the ProPalette 7000 There have been no reports of rotated images on the ProPalette 7000 Products Affected ProPalette 8000 film recorder Actions Solutions An Engineering Change Notice ECN has been issued with a solution for this issue The yoke assembly is normally held in place by a torqued metal band collar and hot melt glue All ProPalette 7000 and 8000 units are now manufactured with an abrasive paper collar applied to the neck of the CRT before the yoke assembly is added This self adhesive collar provides a more effective means of preventing the yoke from rotating on the CRT neck during shipping This manufacturing process change is in addition to the hot melt glue and clamp that
146. Palette 8000 Details All replacement cable assemblies are wired with the 150 Vdc lines reversed on the J34 connector that plugs into the analog board This is recognized by observing the green black twisted pair wires on the connector The correct orientation is to have the green wire on the outside pin As supplied the black wire is on the outside pin lt see MON STER JPG gt Resolution The resolution is to re wire the connector properly in either one of two acceptable methods Snap the cap off the connector Remove the wires and re install properly Ensure that the wire insulation is pierced properly when the wire is inserted into the connector Replace the connector cap or Cut the wires approximately 1 back from the connector body Place heat shrink tubing on the cut wires and move it back along the wire so that it is out of the way Strip back sufficient insulation on all four wires to ensure a good connection Cross connect and splice the wires with solder Move the heat shrink tubing up over the splice and heat the tubing to protect the connection monster jpg APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 04 05 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990405153958JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Image
147. Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer software Note Not applicable to Windows 98 because the drivers are updated To correct this error 1 Insert Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer CD 2 Double click My Computer 3 Double click CD 4 Double click UpdateLPTDriver exe in the Utility folder This updates the parallel port driver If printer errors continue call Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Specialist at 1 800 432 5355 Installation of Web Browser Plug in Installation of the Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer plug in allows Web browsers Netscape or Internet Explorer to function as an imaging application This allows you to print Web images directly from a Web site e Install Web browsers Netscape or Internet Explorer before installing the Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer plug in e Reboot the system after installing Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer driver To install Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer plug in Insert Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer CD Double click My Computer Double click CD Double click setup exe in the plug in folder PO S Internet Explorer 4 Windows 95 environments require a current version of Microsoft s JavaScript Engine for successful execution of the Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer plug in Refer to JavaScript Engine for Internet Explorer IE version of Polaroid ColorShot Plug in paragraph for additional information JavaScript Engine for Internet Explorer IE version of Polaroid ColorShot Plug in
148. Printers should be updated to the correct firmware version at this time Polaroid s FTP site on the Internet has two files that contain the correct version 562 firmware http ftp polaroid com pub imaging output cfrecord prop8000 Currently the easiest way to get to the FTP site is from Polaroid s home page Please follow these steps for easy access to Polaroid s FTP site Internet access to Polaroid s home page is at www Polaroid com From the home page press the Products button From the Products page press the Color Film Recorders button From the Color Film Recorders page press the More Info button under ProPalette 8000 At the bottom of the ProPalette 8000 Information page press Software Drivers and Film Table Files akWANM This method will bring you directly to Polaroid s FTP site a storage area for the very latest ProPalette 8000 information including film tables software upgrades firmware upgrades and self service documentation files For Macintosh access file PRO8V562 hqx For PC Windows access file PRO8V562 EXE Both files are self extracting Double click to open them and read the README TXT file for important information before beginning NOTE The Macintosh installer requires that the ProPalette 8000 is set to SCSI ID 4 Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations En
149. ProComm Plus must be available See Notes Knowledge Base bulletin 980714142633JF for correct configuration If a different terminal emulator program is used ensure that the configuration parameters are set to the indicated values Know how to disable enable watchdog timer See Notes Knowledge Base bulletin 98032513401 8JF Know how to enable disable Monitor mode See Notes Knowledge Base bulletin 9810070938 18JF Know how to upload a hex file to the ProPalette See the ProPalette Service manual section 4 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Configuring a PC to Upload a Hex File Procedure Disable watchdog timer Enable Monitor mode Connect ProPalette to computer through COMM port Turn on ProPalette Run terminal emulator Confirm communication to ProPalete Upload FLASHMAN HEX to ProPalette Run FLASHMAN HEX by typing the command g O lt cr gt Virtual Flash 0 will be displayed by default see Fig 1 Perform the necessary operation see examples Exit the terminal emulator Shut down the ProPalette Enable watchdog timer Disable Monitor mode Turn on the ProPalette and verify that it functions properly Examples Reload firmware Confirm you are in vFlash0 Remove the Control Code by entering the commands R lt cr gt l lt cr gt Note that code block 1 is gone Upload the new Control Code by entering the commands H lt cr gt l lt cr gt Respond to the question Enter data name string with the_firmware lt cr gt At the prompt Ready
150. Quality ProPalette Color Quality Category The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a non subjective method to evaluate the color balance of a ProPalette Details Color balance will be evaluated by measuring the color densities with a transmittive densitometer and evaluating the measured readings The standard image file GRAYCARD TIF will be exposed on Kodak EliteChrome film to the ProPalette with an imaging application The file is placed in the film tables directory when the imaging application is installed This image should provide densities between 1 5 and 0 7 density units Independent of the ProPalette the film itself and its processing must obviously meet this specification This can be checked by producing an optical image by a daylight exposure of a MacBeth chart or an 18 gray card with a 35mm camera or by xenon strobe and a neutral density step wedge This baseline image should also have a density between 1 5 and 0 7 density units Evaluation The absolute difference between the color densities must be less than or equal to 0 06 density units Absolute value of max Delta density Raensity Gaensity 0 06 Rgensity Baensity 0 06 Baensity Gensity 0 06 APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 Date 04 13 99 Product Type Film Reco
151. RD TIF image to Elite II film and evaluate the flat field for color purity The color should be gray without a green tint If a color tint is still visible then return the unit to Service for additional repair APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission f Polaroid Knowledge Base EI Service Bulletin Product Raster Plus For Macintosh Date 07 13 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990713091546JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Errors Printing with PostScript Page Layout Programs Category The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a solution to a problem that RasterPlus for Macintosh customers may experience Product Affected RasterPlus for Macintosh Details Using the new released version of RasterPlus for Macintosh may generate error messages or display errant behavior with PostScript page layout programs Customers will expect to be able to print from all PostScript applications because RasterPlus is a PostScript level 2 and 3 RIP Printing from PowerPoint works well but problems have been observed with QuarkXPress 3 32 and 4 0 Illustrator 7 and 8 and PageMaker 6 5 Either error messages Quark 4 0 PageMaker 6 5 the image is dramatically cut off Quark 3 2 PageMaker 6 5 the copies to print are 0 so it doesn t print Illustrator PageMaker or the colors are ex
152. REFERS y A E eee POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 11 SPECIAL DATE APRIL 5 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLI m SUBJECT IMPROVED JOSHUA FLEX PLUG FOR SWITCH BLOCK P N 1A2905A of both the Plug and the Flex when the Plug is inserted This improved design is identified by the issue 05 designation IS05 molded into its top surface see Fig 1 REPAIR POLICY An issue 5 or later Flex Plug should be used 1 Whenever the Flex Plug Switch Block of any issue is removed from the Camera removing the Flex Plug subjects it to stress replacement with a new Plug is recommended and 2 Whenever work is performed using an updated 5 Wire Detail Switch P N 1A2708A or P N 1A2708B Repair Drive Cover T22067SK01 or the new Drive Cover 1A2067A These parts and their application in Joshua repair procedures are described and shown in Product Alerts JOSH 94 8 and JOSH 94 10 The 5 Wire Detail Switch P N 1A2708B and Flex Plug Switch Block 1A2905A Issue 05 will be used in Cameras manufactured beginning late February early March 1994 BACKGROUND In the continuing engineering efforts directed at product improvement the Flex Plug for the Swi
153. RVICES OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM R BATTLE D BILLINGSLEY SUBJECT ANALYZING BLACK BAR PROBLEMS IN JOSHUA PRINTS POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Service Support TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT TMC Viewing Mirror Carrier VMC Bellows Baffle Recock Link or Mainframe parts To help isolate the cause a procedure for systematic analysis and remedial action is attached to this Product Alert Illustrated below is the camera mounted on a test fixture Joshua Sled P N 1360 required to complete the proce dure and samples of Black Bar prints You may wish to review the videotape TMC Troubleshooting Guide recently sent to key repair facilities This videotape is available from Polaroid Camera Products Services Technical Service Department Bed IA 2 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 When ordering please refer to Product Alert Josh 95 23 dated April 15 1995 and the videotape Black bar can become progressively larger with succeeding prints Black Bar problems in Joshua prints have been traced to a variety of causes including the presense of foreign material in the camera e g adhesives as well as distortion and binding associated with the Taking Mirror Carrier Joshua Camera Mounted on Sled Typical Black Bar Prints p THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS
154. Replace C1 C2 with luf 500V Ceramic Capacitor Figure 2 Subject Data Card PC Board Layout A ny ay POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB P A NO TX 94 4 SPECIAL DATE FEBRUARY 28 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES TO LIST QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS FROM NICK CURRERI SUBJECT NEW TX 100 amp TX 2000 THERMAL PRINTERS NON USA MARKETS BACKGROUND Two new A6 size thermal printers of improved design Model TX 1100 and Model TX 2000 are being introduced to replace the existing TX 1000 and TX 1500 Printers Features include 8 bit color and 60 second imaging time Media is the same as used by the TX 1000 At this time the new Printers will be sold only in the non U S A markets FEATURES lt O O o PAL signal compatibility o Field or Frame capture o PUB 15 625 kHz compatibility o S VHS compatibility o Remote control optional o Mirror reversal Both Printers are of the same general design but the TX 2000 has these additional features o Cetronics input 0 RS232C input THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS o Stored image preview o Negative reversal o Multiimage I 2 4 16 25 pictures print o IEC 601 approved o 8 bit continuous tone o 60second print tone o Four and eight picture video in
155. S MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS LIST This is an UPDATE of Product Alert JOSH 94 9A al FROM RUSSELL D BATTL dated 7 5 94 SUBJECT JOSHUA BADGECAM CONFIGURATION F ADDED TO A THROUGH I GI Product Information bulletin 95 22 dated Feb 22 1995 The F designation appears as the 10th character of the 12 character serial number located on a label inside the Camera and visible when the Picture Removal Door is opened All present Joshua configurations are summarized below Configuration Effective Description Letter Date A 7 29 92 Baseline Configuration B 3 15 93 Non Scratch Fix 8 23 93 Date Camera Series with Crescent Fix D 9 24 93 Added Rear Lens Baffle revised Baseblock Crescent Fix fully implemented by 9 27 93 Film Support 5 9 94 ROM 11 on Shutter PC Board and new Timing Gear m 9 26 94 BadgeCam and BadgeCam Date camera models On the reverse side of this bulletin is an explanation of the information contained in the 12 character Serial Number code Configuration F is announced for Joshua Series Cameras to indicate the BadgeCam and BadgeCam Date versions of Joshua These new models in the Joshua series designed for making full color instant ID badges at low cost are described in New o 4 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT
156. S 8A Corrective Action PC If no writable storage devices on SCSI bus hard drives etc run with no external terminator with a short SCSI cable MAC Run with scanner 157 in SCSI chain closest to host computer and place the external terminator at the end of the chain Replace termination power diode Phillips PRLL5817 with BYD77A Note Replacement ofthe termination power diode reduces the scanner termination power to a voltage lower than the hostcomputer reducing the banding effect significantly as long as the host or another SCSI peripheral provided nominal termination power Host computer must not have blown termination power fuse e Try to repeat problem with a lower table on the list If it occurs with the last few tables switch film tables e Replace firmware with version 1 02 or above e Try to repeat problem with a lower table on the list If it occurs with the last few tables switch film tables e Replace bulb e Replace firmware with version 1 02 or above Problem 2 Con t Table 1 Low Level Band Problems Con t Cause Really dim bulb with CCD susceptible problem may occur with negative film tables Polaroid One Film 94 Agfa Optima 96 Polaroid HD3 9C Raw Negative AE Generic Negative AE Corrective Action Try to repeat problem with a lower table on the list If it occurs with the last few tables switch film tables e Replace bulb e Replace firmware with version 1
157. SI is handled on Windows computers with one important exception the SCSI card for the G3 is set to occupy PCI bus Address 1 rather than 0 All Palette software for Macintosh was written to assume Address 0 As a result none of the Macintosh software currently available for Palette film recorders will work on a Power Macintosh G3 Products Affected All Palette film recorders with SCSI interface excludes the CI 3000 All Macintosh software including CFRUpdate the firmware update utility Actions Solutions There are four major initiatives currently underway to provide a solution to this platform incompatibility issue 1 Palette for Macintosh has been revised and is currently being tested with the Power Macintosh G3 A software patch will be made available on Polaroid FTP site 2 ProPalette 7000 and 8000 firmware has just been released and is currently available on Polaroid FTP site 3 RasterPlus for Macintosh is being modified by Graphx and is currently being tested in Polaroids SQE laboratory This software is still on schedule for a March 8 release 4 Palette Export and CFRUpdate will be revised and posted on Polaroid FTP as available NOTE This problem is not unique to Polaroid film recorders Most SCSI devices from other manufacturers will experience similar problems with the Power Macintosh G3 computers APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distribute
158. Scan 35 Ultra Details Problem Customers report that when they try to scan or preview a negative typically positive scans work OK they get error messages Examples e 30000H errors e Change Light Bulb messages even though bulb is new e Calibration error message any type especially when scanning negatives Resolution Background TDK the manufacturer of inductor L3 used on SprintScan and PolaScan 35 Ultra Controller Boards has informed Polaroid Manufacturing that a potential defect in their production process can cause the part to fail prematurely When L3 fails the A to D converter loses its power supply TDK has now changed their production process to fix the defect Since receiving notification from TDK about the potential defect our Controller Board manufacturer has taken the following actions 1 Purged their inventory of all suspect parts 2 100 screening of L3 beginning in March 1 1998 3 All old stock of L3 has been purged Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N4 Page 1 of 2 Units affected All 35 Plus units manufactured between January and February of 1998 The serial number range of these scanners is ASXXXXXC to BBXXXXXC It should be noted
159. Scan Service Bulletin V1 N14 Page 1 of 2 45tp CCD REV X Figure 1 CCD Board rear view b Controller Board Revision Level Revision level information can be found at the rear of the circuit board see Figure 2 near the SCSI connectors Revision level marks are shown as X Y in Figure 2 where X A and Y a number Figure 2 Controller Board rear of board top view e Contact Gerald DiBello E mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V1 N14 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 2 No 4 From New Products Service Support Group Date April 23 1998 Subject SprintScan 35 Plus amp PolaScan 35 Ultra Controller Board L3 Defective Category Hardware Failure The purpose of this message is to alert telephone support and service providers regarding a potentially defective part on SprintScan 35 Plus and PolaScan 35 Ultra Controller Boards If the part fails customers will report error messages related to calibration failures when they try to a scan or preview a slide Products Affected SprintScan 35 Plus and Pola
160. Service Bulletin V3 N9 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croea 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 PolaColor Insight Vol 2 No 1 From New Products Service Support Group Date April 14 1999 Subject PolaColor Insight version 3 x for the PC Error message seen when user tries to Open the application e Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to provide Telephone Support organizations with information on how to correct a PolaColor Insight version 3 installation problem e Products Affected SprintScan Models 35ES 35 Plus 35LE 45 4000 used with a PC e Details Customer has installed PolaColor Insight version 3 X on their PC and previously had version 2 installed When they open the application the following error message appears IQA error Unable to initiate the image processing library e Resolution The error will only occur when the user uninstalls version 2 of PolaColor Insight before installing version 3 After Insight 2 is uninstalled the file named PlItbxc dll is not removed Pltbxc dll is a file associated with IQA If this file is left behind when Insight 2 was uninstalled the IQA files from Insight 3 are not installed and the error message IQA error Unable to initiate the image processing library is seen To correct the problem delete the file Pltbxc dll that is in the C WINDOWS directory After the file is deleted re install PolaColor Insight
161. T779 T339 The defect is exhibited in the Hybrid IV products T600 and Spectra Image film as fogging that ranges from flat colors with a faint yellow cast throughout the entire photo to a bright yellow fog with a faint image in the photo The defect as seen in Star chemistry film T779 and T339 lines is the same except that the fogging is blue Intensive studies have been undertaken to determine the cause of the problem but no conclusions have been reached to date ACTION If you receive any customer complaints that fall within the parameters of the problem description above gather any finished photos the remaining film pack and any packaging components box pouch etc and send them to the nearest Film Customer Liaison office The Liaison office should then forward the material to Polaroid Corporation Attn Shari King R 2 Reservoir Facility 868 Winter Street Waltham MA 02154 1274 QUESTIONS If you have any questions concerning this notice please call either Ed Dacey in Cambridge 577 2959 Shari King in Waltham 386 0184 or Benno Vaan Holt in Enschede 244 1421 Polaroid Corporation Consumer Services 784 Memorial Drive Cambridge MA 02139 4639 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR ED DACEY SHARI KING NOTICE FIN 094126 REVIEW PAUL FLEMING DATE SEPTEMBER 9 1994 SUBJECT REVERSED SHEET ON T 331 PRODUCT T 331 SENSITIVE MATERIAL
162. TIONS TO LIST FROM DICK CURTIS SUBJECT END OF ID4 MANUFACTURE SHUTTER SOLENOID DISENGAGING FROM LENS MOUNTING PLATE This Alert serves notice that manufacture of the ID4 camera system will be discontinued after November 1995 A final buy of D4 parts is currently being planned by Technical Services Logistics BACKGROUND Some D4 Polaroid shutters manufactured between July 1994 and April 1995 have been returned for repair with a blades not closing complaint When the camera head was opened it was found that the solenoid had disengaged from the lens mounting plate and in some instances the solenoid plunger was completely bypassing the walking beam Investigation by Manufacturing determined that the cause for this problem lay in the fact that the lens mounting plate post heights do not fall within specification Posts 1 and 2 shown in the illustration are 0 030 too high while post 3 is 0 020 too high Thus the retaining plate cannot compress the cushions sufficiently to keep the solenoid in position CORRECTIVE ACTION Monitoring is continuing to determine the full extent of this problem and also to determine whether the modification outlined below is a satisfactory solution Since current analysis indicates that the problem will occur at a very low rate less than 2 the following minimal action is thought to be adequate OVer THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH
163. The IE version of the plug in requires the JavaScript engine Microsoft Scripting Engine for Windows 95 The engine may be downloaded from Microsoft s Web site http www microsoft com msdownload vbscript scripting asp after selecting the applicable language version of the engine i e US English x86 Alpha and following the instructions Tips Reinstall the Web plug in if the Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer Driver Software is uninstalled and reinstalled The latest version of the Web plug in and other Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer related software is available for downloading Visit our Web site www polaroid com Polaroid Photo Printer Parallel Bulletin V2 N2 Page 3 of 3 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN cma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot From New Products Service Support Group Date December 21 1998 Subject Netscape Browser Plug In Released e Category Software Info Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to alert Telephone Service providers regarding the release of a Netscape Plug in The plug in allows any ColorShot Digital Photo Printer to print images found on the World wide web e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot Parallel or USB digital photo printers e Details Features Netscape Plug in Version 1 1 has been released for the ColorShot Digital Photo Printers The software can be downloaded from www ColorShot com The Plug in works as an extension of
164. VAILABILITY The Flex Connector Cap and Retainer Removal Tool will be available after Mar 1 1994 from Material Services in Cambridge MA Order through normal sources REPAIR POLICY Once the Connector Cap has been removed it is recommended that a new Cap is used since the old one may have been damaged Discard existing stocks of the old Connec tor Cap PROBLEM Partial or crooked insertion of a Joshua Shutter Flex Connector Cap can cause a variety of problems including no power to the Shutter no darkslide a midcycle _ 4 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Flex street 1 misses Connector contact 1 N onesto contact 2 Connector contact 1 Fig 1 Connector Cap incorrectly inserted at an angle misaligns Flex streets and Connector contacts UOY Incorrect Correct so L Issue mark molded on Cap ge Step added to flex ramp i l to keep Flex seated Fig 4 New Flex Connector Cap P N 1A2358A Retainer Removal Toci P N 13589 Tang on bla e engages underside of Cap y yw Ee ee POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 14 SPECIAL DATE JULY 11 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE
165. a Camera Jams cont d The 5 Wire Detail Switch P N 1A2708A has been redesigned with larger ground plane contact areas in the TRIM Lighten Darken and DKEC Darkslide End of Cycle Switch es to assure more positive switching see Fig 1 NEW TRIM SWITCH GROUND PLANE ORIGINAL GRDUND PLANE NEW WIDER GROUND PLANE Fig 1 New 5 Wire Detail Switch P N 1A2708A The Drive Cover has been modified to correct both a Viewfinder problem and contact bounce in the DKEC Switch and is available in two different forms The Repair Drive Cover P N T22067SK01 see Fig 2A must be used when installing the new 5 Wire Switch in Cameras with the Serial Numbers and Configuration Codes shown in the first three lines of Table A These Repair Covers are easily iden tified by a silver X marked on their upper side and two extended pins over the Viewfinder opening On the Camera Mainframe be sure the features in the View finder area look like those in Fig 2B The extended pins on the Repair Cover seat in the two notches shown on the Mainframe Two notches if Viewfinder aren accept extended pins on Drive ever Shiver Xon apposite side Extended pins 7 Fig 2A Repair Drive Cover Fig 2B Early Mainframe Configuration P N T22067SKO1 takes Repair Cover at left Servicing Joshua Camera Jams cont d 30 A new Drive Cover P N 1A2067A see Fig 3A has the notch ra
166. a series cameras The new VMC P N 1A2114B has thick er mounting tabs A in Fig 1 to solve a problem of the VMC slipping out of the Baseblock and causing light leaks To accept the new thicker VMC tabs the mating slots in the Baseblock have also been enlarged The new Baseblock is P N 1A2573D Inventories of both old VMC Bellows Assembly P N 1A2114A and the new VMC Bellows Assembly P N 1A2114B should be maintained since the new VMC can be used only with new Baseblocks 1A2573D and the old VMC will not fit snugly in the new Baseblock slots See chart on reverse side PART AVAILABILITY The new VMC Bellows Assembly is available from Material Services in Cambridge MA Order through normal sources Fig 1 New Joshua VMC Bellows Assembly with thicker tabs A J THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS ET Old Baseblock New Baseblock New version of Baseblock Mfd 7 94 A E ep POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 20 SPECIAL DATE SEPT 8 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE SUBJECT IMPROVED SHUTTER DECORATIVE PLATE JOSHUA CAMERAS BACKGROUND The shutter Decorative Plate on Joshua series
167. ables directory can not be found discard the Polaroid Film Tables directory found inside the System folder of the Macintosh Re install the Palette for Macintosh drivers for the Palette model that is going to be used If a different Palette film recorder will be used on this same system at a later date it will be necessary to place the existing film tables into a temporary directory to hide them from Palette Export and then perform a Palette for Macintosh installation for the new film recorder model NOTE This only affects Palette Export for Macintosh and will only affect resellers sales people and product demonstrators that are most likely to use more than one Palette film recorder model on their Macintosh Distribution APPROVALS x Int l EXP Int l Subsidiaries Special _ CPS Tech Services CPS Operations CPS Materials _ Manufacturing Engineering Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission v4 Software Info Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 SIB Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 04 23 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970423083038JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Received on Film PAGE SIZE FOR FILM RECORDERS Details Diagrams The purpose of this Technical Application Note is
168. ack background date print after installing Date Module Mask THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS ProCam Date Print Background Mask cont d 2S REPAIR POLICY This modification should be done only on customer request Be sure the customer understands that the black background will appear in every pic ture even if the date display is turned OFF MASK INSTALLATION PROCEDURE see Fig 2 1 Insert the Mask into the Installation Tool as shown in Inset A of Fig 2 with the straight and angled edges of the Mask flush with the edges of the Tool jaw CAUTION Handle Mask edges carefully they create th imaging edges in photo 2 Latch the Tool arms to hold the Mask in place 3 Open the Film Door and illuminate Date Module Tunnel with a work light 4 Insert the Installation Tool with Mask into the film slot area locating the angled Side of the Mask toward the centerline of the Camera 5 Locate the two tabs on the Mask above the DCM Mirror and below the top of the Tunnel B Housing Inset B of Fig 2 6 Press the Mask into the Tunnel until the two tabs click into place 7 Unlatch the Tool arms and remove it from the Camera 8 Inspect the Mask for proper fit and take test photo Fig 2 Installing the Date Module Mask in a ProCam Camera PARTS AVAILABILITY Date Mo
169. actor of two has occurred in TPX film All other characteristics of this film are within specifications and the customer will experience no deficiencies in image quality once an adjustment has been made for the proper exposure This product has been shipped worldwide Customer Resolution A notice has been packaged with the film that explains the increase in sensitivity and the corrective course of action to take The notice reads as follows Attention This material is more sensitive than the product you are currently using Please reduce your exposure level by 50 to achieve the same results that you are accustomed to Thank you This notice should be sufficient explanation in most cases If further explanation is needed however you should explain that a 50 reduction in the level of exposure could be accomplished by reducing the intensity of the radiation by 50 or by reducing the duration of the radiation by 50 Image quality is unaffected so film replacement is not expected Corrective Action Normal film sensitivity is expected for TPX film manufactured in the future Contact Please direct questions to Phil Cravotta Worldwide Customer Support Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 USA Phone 781 386 5651 E mail cravotp polaroid com Distribution Polaroid Service Centers Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN maaan 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 PolaColor Insight Vol 3 No 1
170. ady motion Each vertical line on the finished print is an indication of the media slipping Further checking found that the buildup occurred only with certain media and only when the prints being processed were in the medium density range For medium density prints the thermal head temperature is at a value that results in the donor ribbon occasionally hanging up instead of slipping past the head as it properly should This action does not occur with high density or low density images OVer THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS 4 VERTICAL LIN VERTICAL LINES Le Figure 1 Example of Vertical Lines Strikes in Thermal Printer Images The next phase of the investigation was to determine why procesing medium density prints resulted in a buildup on the thermal head The problem was traced to a batch of media donor ribbon which has an incorrect coating Normally any residue on the head is cleaned by the action of the media feeding through the machine However the buildup from the incorrectly coated media donor ribbon is so great when medium denisty prints are being processed that the normal cleaning action does not work In fact each pass of defective media causes the buildup to increase Lines or strikes which are most pronounced are from heads that have the greatest residue buildup Product tracing has determined that the defective media is in lots which was made in December 1993
171. ails 1 New Feature Listing compared to version 1 1 New features in Version 1 2 of the Parallel Photo Printer software e A single page Release Notes document is included with the new software A copy of the release notes is attached to the last page this bulletin e LPT vxd parallel port drive update for Windows 95 computers The CD ROM now contains a LPT vxd parallel printer port driver updater in the Utility folder If the user sees Communication Error Occurred messages or encounters slow printing files takes 5 minutes or more to print the LPT vxd file should be updated Instructions for updating the file are included in the Release Notes e English only Web browser printer plug in version 1 23 for Internet Explorer version 4 and Netscape version 4 or later A new feature is included with this version of the software Users can now print images note some image types are not supported directly from their web browser Previously this software was only available on the Polaroid website The Release Notes a copy is on the last page of this Bulletin include instructions on how to install the web plug in software Note Version 1 23 is an update to a version 1 1 that previously was only available on the Colorshot com website See ColorShot Bulletin V1 N1 released in December 1998 e JavaScript Engine update instructions for Internet Explorer version 4 The users of Windows 95 PC s may require a JavaScript Eng
172. and are mounted as close as possible to the pins of the U6 and U31 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 1 Connect a diode 2 Connect a diode 3 Connect a diode 4 Connect a diode between pin 2 and 4 of U6 cathode to pin 2 between pin 2 and 7 of U6 cathode to pin 7 between pin 2 and 4 of U31 cathode to pin 2 between pin 2 and 7 of U31 cathode to pin 7 gina gil giles Sere ra 4 U18 FIX JPG U35 Protection This modification is required to comply with U35 design limitations on the analog board 1 Cut the trace between the two feed through topside coming off of Q7 C 2 Cut the trace bottom side between CR12 anode and the trace between DC35A and DC35B 3 Connect a jumper wire bottom side from DC35B left side to R123 right side 15VA 4 Connect a jumper wire bottom side from CR12 anode to R125 right side 15VB 1AE545A bot jpc 1AE545A top jpo Digital Analog Converter U34 must be populated with a DAC16 007 this is recognized by a white dot in the pin 1 identifier position Step 2 1AE545A Is02 Is05 to 1AE545A Is05B Is06 This final step is required to further protect the CRT from possible burns It defines the changes outlined in the manufacturing deviation notice Dev No 18555 1 Connect two 1N4004 diodes in series between the bottom end of R45 anode and U4 12 cathode 2 Connect the negative side of a 22 mf 35 Vdc capacitor to the junction of the two diodes defined in the previous step 3 Connect
173. appears directly in the ColorShot film frame after the link is selected and you can skip Step c c Select the View Image choice in the drop down menu Note that the image name and its file type appear next to the View Image choice Make sure the image is a jpg tif or omp file d The image appears in a ColorShot window in a Spectra film size frame Controls for Number of images to print a Print button and a Refresh button are under the frame e Right click on the image to access the rotation controls and Preferences from the drop down menu f Use the Preferences choice to make adjustments for Best fit Fill frame IQA controls and a Print preview feature g Note The better the quality of the original image the better the print quality Low resolution images may appear pixilated when printed Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Bulletin V1 N1 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Service Bulletin Worldwide Customer Support Services No PAF120399 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Tel 781 386 5651 Fax 781 386 5611 Subject T55 Film wood grain Defect Author Philip J Cr
174. apter check and see if the host adapter and scanner are recognized at bootup time The first time you connect a scanner to a PC running Windows 95 or 98 you must see the scanner recognized during bootup In most cases you see the board s on screen listing just after a CNTRL gt A prompt listing and before the point when the Windows 95 or 98 screen appears If the adapter has a BIOS you will see a listing for any SCSI devices example Polaroid 35MM is the listing for a SprintScan 35 that are connected to it and their SCSI ID number Example An Adaptec 2940 and an Advansys 922 both have BIOS chips If the scanner is not listed at bootup time the card may be incorrectly installed Example board connector is not completely pushed into the mating connector on the PC s motherboard After the SCSI card is installed correctly go to Step 1c Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N3 Page 1 of 7 Step 1b If the card is an older ISA type example Adaptec 1505 or 1505AE you must use a utility like Adaptec s SCSI explorer to see if the scanner is at least recognized by Windows Note that non plug and play SCSI cards install differently than a plug and play board The
175. are errors and the picture count when the error last occurred Note that one of these errors is JUST_POWERED_ON HE 1 When a normal reset or power on occurs this error is generated and we know how many times the unit has been powered on A histogram of all the startup errors and the picture count when the error last occurred The last 10 software error messages and the picture count when they occurred 8 A full autoluma history 64 samples of the last 3 autoluma failures SYNTAX The proper command structure for this host side utility is errstat By default the utility will access the port COM 1 of the host computer The help file is accessed with the command errstat ERROR MESSAGES ASYNC_POWERED_ON HE 1 Just powered on ASYNC_PREV_EXP HE 2 Previously exposed film ASYNC_MOVEWHEEL HE 8 Error moving filter wheel ASYNC_NOFILM HE 4 Ran out of film ASYNC_CAL_DARK_X1_NOT_REPEAT HE 5 ASYNC_CAL_DARK_X1_BAD HE 6 ASYNC_CAL_DARK_x10_NOT_REPEAT HE 7 ASYNC_CAL_DARK_X10_BAD HE 8 ASYNC_CAL_SCALE_NON_LINEAR HE Q ASYNC_CAL_NOT_STABLE_IN_TIME HE 10 ASYNC_CAL_CRT_NOT_BRIGHT_ENUF HE 11 ASYNC_CAL_CRT_NOT_DIM_ENUF HE 12 ASYNC_CAL_CRT_BRT_NO_INCREASE HE 13 ASYNC_BADVRAM HE 14 ASYNC_BADVIDDATA HE 15 ASYNC_GIOFAIL HE 16 ASYNC_UNKNOWN_POWERON_FAILURE HE 17 ASYNC_TOO_BRIGHT HE 18 ASYNC_BAD_DAUGHTER_BD_ID HE 19 GAL code is
176. argin until the door bottoms out c If the camera does not dark slide replace the Door Latch Erect Assembly 1B6649A Mid Cover pelh Procam Figure 1 Checking Erect Switch Clearance Using Actuator Gage or 0 0120 Shim Stock 3 Replace the old Bellows Cone Assembly with the new improved design Bellows Cone Assembly PN 1A5790A CPS For removal instructions see Section 3 pages 3 31 and 3 32 of the Pro Cam Service Manual When installing the new Assembly particularly note the several alignment points between the Assembly and the Mainframe as shown below A Figure 2 Replacing the Bellows Cone Assembly 3 1 Compress the erecting hinge mechanism and hold the Bellows Cone Assembly in the collapsed position as shown 3 2 Holding the Assembly at an angle as shown insert it into the Mainframe 3 3 Metal edge A slips under lip B on the Gear Drive Keep the wires from being caught under A or B route them as shown 3 4 Seat end C of the hinge pin in its recess and then tabs D and E into their respective slots Replace the screw holding C 3 5 Complete the installation by seating the Assembly on the Mainframe locating pins and engaging the Assembly legs on the Mainframe bosses F and G 4 Reassemble the camera and check for proper operation and picture quality PARTS AVAILABILITY Initial supplies of the new Bellows Cone Assembly 1A5790A CPS will be shipped to NPKK Enschede and Atlanta Additiona
177. ariations in the bolt length Solution A nipping tool will be provided to the authorized repair centers This tool will remove the excess length of the bolt All 4x5 camera s in US inventory will be modified to provide a clearance hole for the bolt Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission v4 Software Info Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 SIB Document Details Product HR 6000 CFR ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Raster Plus 95 Date 02 27 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980227160439JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Received on Film PowerPoint amp Win NT Details Diagrams Subject Situation Printer driver settings for PowerPoint from Office 97 will not stay after the program has been closed Occurs under Windows NT only when running RasterPlus 95 The resulting error message is Wrong camera back installed Products Affected All CFR s running Raster Plus Software under NT ctions Solutions To make the printer driver retain the settings for use with any program LE PowerPoint Freelance Graphics etc Follow the steps listed below Go to the sta
178. at ed inside the battery compartment Units with simple instructions will be packaged in a B Flute box identified with the product name on the outside THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS BATTERY COMPARTMENT INSTRUCTION BACK VIEW DECAL MEASURING TAPE FRONT VIEW FIGURE 1 LIGHT LOCK CLOSEUP UNIT MARKETING STRATEGY Light Lock targeted for April 1994 distribution will initially be sold as part of Law Enforcement II and Heath II kits in the U S markets Additionally it will be sold in the U S as a separate accessory The list price for the Light Lock accessory is 49 95 The PID number for a Light Lock unit is 618929 Business Marketing is now considering a trade in program for owners of the manual unit The trade in program will be handled by an outside house and at a price to be determined by Marketing International Marketing groups are reviewing the Light Lock concept to determine if their markets would like to carry the unit Current manufacturing plans are to fabricate 10 000 units per year for all markets REPAIR SERVICE STRATEGY Light Lock is warranted for 1 year except for the replaceable batteries Units under warranty that are determined to be defective excluding battery failures will be replaced with a new unit Customers will be asked to return all defective units for the purpose of failure analysis by the design team Replace ment
179. ates saturated photocell autoluma errors bug Optimizes autoluma dynamic range Note In conjunction with firmware provides more capability for CRT s that drift up and down Provides better range capability to accommodate varying monitor luminance The following paragraphs describe how to upgrade the monitor PC board and how to re calibrate the autoluminant function MONITOR PC BOARD UPGRADE Refer to Figure 1 1 Turn off and unplug the HR6000 Digital Palette Film Recorder 2 Remove the cover 3 Remove the paper guard from the rear of the monitor PC board Figure 1 4 Using an ohmmeter set potentiometers R29 to 270 K ohms e R55 to zero 0 ohms 5 Using a soldering iron and a solder sucker remove existing resistor R34 and replace with new resistor R34 which has a value of 1 3 M ohms 6 Replace the EPROM with version 5 06 Note These changes will optimize the autoluma dynamic range In conjunction with the firmware will provide more capability for the CRT s that drift up or down 7 Plug in and turn on the HR6000 Digital Palette Film Recorder 8 Re adjust autoluminance to the new autoluma calibration specifications as described below AUTOLUMINANT ADJUSTMENT The autoluminant adjustment for the HR6000 Digital Palette Film Recorder is identical to the CI3000 CI5000 Digital Palette Film Recorder except for the following Specification Adjustment Location 6 ft 1 150 R18 Monitor PC Board 200 6 ft
180. avotta Date December 3 1999 Service Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to alert service providers to a deviation in the quality and or performance of a specific film manufacturing cycle Product Type 55 P N Film Manufacturing Codes The following positive codes and expiration dates are affected G9OXXXXXXXX April 2000 H9OXxxXXXxx May 2000 JOXXXXXXXXX June 2000 KOXXXXXXXX July 2000 Issue A problem has occurred in the coating of the positive sheet resulting in a non uniformity of the image that can be described as a wood grain pattern The pattern appears in the instant print only and is most prominent in the light gray areas Pictures already taken and print coated will not worsen with age However aging of unprocessed film will cause an increased wood grain effect when the film is used The negative is not affected by the defect and customers who refrigerate their film will slow down this age related pattern This product has been shipped worldwide Customer Resolution Replace any film held by customers who have this problem Corrective Action Film return issues should be dealt with on an individual basis The film is not being recalled from the dealers because most of the film has already been sold through to the end users Also customers who only use the negative may be indifferent to the quality of the instant print and customers who refrigerate their film may not experience the problem In an eff
181. ay to find problems with the ASPI layer is to have the customer download an executable program called ASPICHK exe from the Adaptec website Once the software is loaded on the customers PC they should run it This application allows the technician to recognize problems like missing files and mismatched file version numbers See Figure 1 for an ASPI check sample on screen display window An Adaptec SCSI card requires the following four ASPI files file version numbers are current as of the date of this bulletin WNASPI32 DLL version 4 57 Location C WINDOWS SYSTEM WINASPI DLL version 4 57 Location C WINDOWS SYSTEM APIX VXD version 4 57 Location C WWINDOWS SYSTEM IOSUBSYS ASPIENUM version 4 57 Location C WINDOWS SYSTEM Troubleshooting Tools amp SCSI Board Manufacturer Service Phone s Adaptec SCSIcheck exe and the latest miniport drivers are available from Adaptec at http www adaptec com support files upgrades html Adaptec Tech Support Monday Friday except holidays 6 00 AM 5 00 PM Pacific Time Call 1 408 934 7274 Worldwide support check Adaptec s website Advansys SuperSCSI utility is included with Advansys card bundled with scanners Win 98 95 Miniport drivers are available from http www advansys com support fastultra htm Tech Support operates from 8 30AM to 5 30PM PST Monday through Friday except holidays Telephone 800 525 7440 or 408 383 9400 Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins ar
182. ber If necessary pry the clip off the lower member using a tool which will not mar the finish of the unit A soldering aide is ideal for this purpose Remove the second adaptor clip in the same manner Roller Cover V ak Adaptor Opened IP oo a Pry up and out Orient the lower member over the main member and secure the two assemblies by snapping the adaptor clips in place Note that the top of the adaptor clip is narrower than the base The base fits under the main member while the top snaps over the lower member 4 Lift the lower member off the main member and remove the end clip Close the roller cover and check the operation of the filmholder If the filmholder does not work properly be certain that you have assembled the unit properly If you cannot get the unit to work properly return it to the nearest Polaroid Authorized Repair Facility April 95 Roller Cover Adaptor Clip Adaptor Clip Lower Member Main Member Roller Cover Adaptor Clip Adaptor Clip Lower Member Main Member Pry up and out Pry up and out Roller Cover Opened End Cap End Cap A LEE ep POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 545 95 32 SPECIAL DATE SEPT 25 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS
183. bly and disengage the Pack Frame from the Door Assembly refer to Page 4 12 of the Service Manual Now open up the Door Assembly enough to permit viewing the two or three character Configuration code marked on the Mainframe It is located just below the Battery Contacts and near the Film Pick Assembly The first two characters denote the gear side configuration the third character denotes th configuration of the opposite side Dp NOTE After Oct 93 the Configuration previously marked in silver grease pencil or lead pencil is not marked on Mainframe To read the molded in Mainframe Configuration open the Film Loading Door Assembly and disengage the Pack Frame from the Door Assembly see Page 4 12 of the Service Manual Now open the Door Assembly enough to see the configuration letter molded in the Mainframe near the small projecting tab see Fig 4 NOTE By inserting the tip of a small bright penlight into the film chamber below the end of the Pack Frame it may be possible to read the molded configuration letter without having to disengage the Pack Frame Fig 4 Locating the molded in Configuration letter Servicing Joshua Camera Jams APPLICATION OF NEW PARTS Camera Serial No G2 thru L2 L2 A3 B3 C3 A3 B3 C3 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 E3 F3 G3 F3 G3 H3 J3 K3 J3 K3 L3 M3 Silver ink Configuration A GI thru BLI Gl BME thru CCG
184. bulletin is to provide Telephone Support Service organizations with information regarding certain customer reported error messages The error messages are seen when using PolaColor Insight version 3 0 or 3 1 on a Macintosh or Windows PC e Products Affected SprintScan 4000 e Details The user has version 3 0 or 3 1 of PolaColor Insight installed in their computer Macintosh OS 1 User reports seeing Error 1003 when they launch PolaColor Insight 2 User reports seeing Error 17899 when they click on the Preview button Windows 95 98 or NT 4 User reports seeing the following error when they click on the Preview button Firmware Error Unknown Sense Code Please Call Polaroid Customer Support for Assistance e Resolution One possible cause for the error codes listed above is that the scanner door is not closed If the customer reports seeing the error codes listed in Details it is possible that the scanner door is not locked in the up position The scanner door must be closed before the scanner will operate Note Mac OS error 1003 is a scanner not recognized error If the door is closed and error 1003 is still seen check for SCSI card problems cabling problems scanner malfunctions example status lamps not on steady and SCSI ID conflicts with other devices Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to chan
185. button after making the selection Step 6 Next you will see a dialog box saying Windows can install your hardware using the following settings Note two items The two digit Interrupt Request number Windows 95 assigns and a three digit Port Address Example Interrupt Request 11 and Port address 340h Step 7 Click on the Next button Step 8 The system will now ask you to place the Windows 95 installation CD ROM in the CD ROM drive to install resources needed for the Host Adapter Note It will only do this if you do not have the drivers and files needed for the Host Adapter pre installed Follow the instructions carefully After the installation is complete shut down the computer Second Install the SCSI Host Adapter board Step 9 Set the IRQ jumper on the board to the IRQ number that you noted in the first part of this procedure Example The default IRQ setting for the AVA 1502AE is 10 If this IRQ was noted in Step 6 don t change the jumper position The default IRQ setting for the AVA 1505 is 11 If this IRQ was noted in Step 6 don t change the jumper setting If the IRQ you noted in Step 6 was not the default change it now For instructions on changing the jumpers consult the Installation Guide that came with the board or look on the board for a jumper setting chart Set the port address jumper to the address you noted in Step 6 If what you noted is the board default setting typically 140h don t move the
186. c motors are common culprits Never stack film recorders Never run a film recorder back to back with the computer s monitor or CPU Check to make sure that the surface used to hold the film recorder is vibration free This is particularly important with the medium format and 4x5 camera backs The 4x5 camera should never be used without bolting it to the ProPalette Banging on the surface during exposure will cause image artifacts Ensure that the computer CPU and the film recorder are plugged into the same power outlet and share a common ground to eliminate the possibility of a ground loop problem Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 03 25 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980325134018JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Digital Board Jumper Configuration Details Diagrams Subject Situation There are four jumper blocks on the ProPalette Digital board 1F5570A There are designated as JP201 JP202 JP501 JP601 At the present time
187. cally YES B Expand blank lines YES C Expand tabs YES D Character spacing millesec 0 E Line pacing 1 10 sec 0 F Pace character 0 G Strip 8th bit NO H ASCII download timeout 10 seconds I CR translation upload NONE J LF translation upload STRIP K CR translation download NONE L LF translation download NONE D o pcplus pdf Pcplus doc Distribution APPROVALS EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base o EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 07 22 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980722113223UF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Installation Restoration of ProPalette Firmware Details Diagrams Category Performance The purpose of this bulletin is to alert service providers of a method to restore corrupted firmware in a ProPalette If the Control code has been corrupted there is no way to communicate with the unit and it is necessary to re install the firmware This procedure will not restore or modify the calibration data Product Affected ProPalette 7000 and ProPalette 8000 Details e Know location of current FLASHMAN HEX file e Know location of current KACNTRL HEX file e Terminal emulation program ProCcomm Plus must be available See Notes Knowledge Base bulletin 980714142633JF e Know how to disable enable watchdog timer See Notes Knowledge Base bulletin 98032513401 8JF e Know how to enable disable
188. canner with a normal operating A D converter Notice the selected area that was chosen for the final scan Selected Area for Final Scan Figure 3 Preview scan of streak target image normal operating A D converter Final Scan of Streak Target Image Normal Operating A D Converter The file Normal ADC Figure 3 is an actual JPEG format file that was saved after the Scan button was selected Just the selected area Figure 4 in the Normal Preview screen is shown It is the magnified image 1 4 of a portion of the streak target produced from a slide scanner with a normal operating A D converter Further magnify the image to 1 1 Use the scroll buttons in the window to view the scanned area Figure 4 Final scan of selected area no streaks Preview Scan of Streak Target Image Defective A D Converter The file Defective Preview Figure 5 is a screen shot showing a Adobe Photoshop window after Acquire SprintScan 35 is selected from the File menu The right side of the image shows the steak target preview image produced on a slide scanner with a defective A D converter Notice the selected area that was chosen for the final scan Also notice the vertical lines that show even in the preview scan Selected Area for Final Scan Figure 5 Preview scan of streak target image defective A D converter Final Scan of Streak Target Image Defective A D Converter The file Defective ADC Figure 5 is an actual JPEG format file that wa
189. ced or distributed in any form without permission v4 Software Info Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base o SIB Document Details Product Cl 3000S Cl 5000S HR 6000 CFR ProPalette 8000 Date 03 18 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 97031812561 9JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Received on Film MULTIPLE CFR INSTALLATION Details Diagrams Subject Situation Palette for Macintosh the Chooser level driver for Palette film recorders provides three possible installations one for the Cl 5000S the HR 6000 SE and the ProPalette 8000 If multiple installations are performed on the same computer and a different model film recorder is selected during one of the additional installations the resulting Polaroid Film Tables directory contains a mixture of Cl HR and or Pro8 film tables This will work fine for Palette for Macintosh Chooser level driver and Si Print Assistant the batching utility The problem exists when Palette Export for Macintosh the Photoshop Plug in is used Palette Export will report that the Polaroid Film Tables directory can not be found This error message is incorrect Actually the directory exists but has unknown film tables contained within Products Affected ProPalette 8000 HR 6000 SE Cl 5000S Palette Export for Macintosh v1 1 5 Palette for Macintosh v4 0 2 Actions Solutions If Palette Export for Macintosh reports Polaroid Film T
190. ces a problem with the acetate overlay he should be directed back to the dealer who supplied the acetat Customers with BadgeCams carrying an acetate overlay installed in the camera will be asked to return a defective unit to the special network dealer from whom the camera was purchased The acetate should be removed by the dealer who will then send the camera minus the acetate to the appropriate Center or Subsidiary for service If the acetate overlay is in the film pack and it appears that the problem is in the camera the customer should remove the acetate from the film pack and return the camera to a Service Center or to a local subsidiary No special test equipment is required for BadgeCam servicing but special Star Tester or B Tester exposure values should be used Strobe Exposure at 4 5 feet 0 497 0 25 STOP Ambient Exposure at 100 candles ft 0 371 0 25 STOP NOTE Tests should be done without acetate in Camera No early returns program for BadgeCam is planned TRAINING Self training packages will be supplied to all service centers con sisting of BadgeCam descriptive literature unique parts information and a BadgeCam familiarization videotape Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB SPECIAL TECH SERVICES QUAL CONTROL P A NO Josh 95 23 DATE April 15 1995 MAT L SE
191. cessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N5 Page 1 of 3 you would normally choose a sample script double click on the script icon and this opens the script for editing The following three sample scripts contain references that Applescript can t find and it appears to the user that the script will not run and can t be edited 1 Run Batch Folder 2 SS 4000 Batch w Notify 3 Run Multiple Scans sample Getting Applescript help Two new sources for Applescript learning tools are 1 Your HD Apple Extras AppleScript About Applescript 1 3 6 version number varies depending on what you ve installed on your Mac This document gives a very brief intro to Applescript 2 Apple s Help Center found on the users hard drive and http www apple com applescript Resolution Following are workaround suggestions that will give users a way to edit the three sample scripts that to the user appear to be non functional All the other sample scripts included with Insight 3 5 may be edited without the need for workarounds The English only version of PolaColor Insight 3 5 for the Macintosh that s currently as of the date of this bulletin found on Polaroid s website will be modified After modification all three sample scripts that currently have pr
192. ch your Palette film recorder to your PC via the SCSI port Upgrades for RasterPlus95 to build 46 can be obtained by contacting David Hemingway at Polaroid in Cambridge Massachusetts USA Please call 617 386 3511 ccMail or email David at hemingd polaroid com In the US disk sets can be obtained by calling Polaroid Technical Support at 800 432 5355 NOTE If you use the SCSI port to connect your Palette film recorder to your PC it is not necessary to upgrade your RasterPlus95 software from build 43 the previous release at this time Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 02 27 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970227160743JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Installation RASTERPLUS95 SCSI ERRORS Details Diagrams Problem After installing RasterPlus95 on a desktop PC running under WIN95 RasterPlus95 does not see the ProPalette as a SCSI device and returns a busy disconnected or off status when trying to produce an image through the SCSI port The ProPalette was seen
193. ckwards and S Start will appear after the film has been fully rewound Whenever the camera door is opened the counter resets to S start For ambient exposures the focus distance for both camera models is 4 to infinity For flash exposures the range for both models is as follows 4 1 2m to 10 3 0m using ISO 100 film 4 1 2m to 12 3 7m using ISO 200 film 4 1 2m to 14 4 3m using ISO 400 film The flash is automatic in both models and is turned on off automatically by a sensor On both models a red LED is on during charging to indicate Do Not Fire Strobe charge is insufficient during this time and if an exposure is attempted underexposed pictures may result A green ready LED lights when the flash is charged indicating OK to Fire The lens system for both cameras has two plastic elements and a coated glass front element The system has a normal focal length of 34mm and an aperture of f 5 6 for both ambient and flash modes Serial Number The serial number is located inside the camera door see illustration below The first letter of the code identifies the assembly line which manufactured the camera The next two digits indicate the month of manufacture The fourth digit identifies the year of manufacture Additional code letters or numbers will be used to identify significant changes in camera design tooling or assembly EXAMPLE 3 074 D 3 indicates the camera was manufactured on assembly line 3 07 i
194. configuration only needs to be altered once On subsequent runs of the LabVIEW tester you may leave the CCD Configuration at Do Not Update Reading and Changing Configuration Using Application Software Under certain circumstances it is possible for the Config code to revert back to a 0 even though it was changed to a 1 If this happens scanned negatives will have an undeniable blue hue and positives will have extra saturated blues The code can be changed in the field using the SprintScan or PolaScan application software Use method 1 for a PC or 2 fora Macintosh computer 1 Windows based PC Reading the CCD Config Code To change the CCD configuration code in the field you need version 2 7 or higher of the SprintScan application software You will only need make a configuration change if you have found that the scanner has the modified type Config 1 CCD but is incorrectly configured for it The customer will notice that scanned negatives will have an undeniable blue hue and positives will have extra saturated blues Start up Photoshop or the SprintScan Direct application on your PC You can check the configuration code under the Help menu in the Sprintscan 35 Preview window Select the Help menu and choose Diagnostics The Diagnostic window as shown in Figure 3 provides information on the Firmware version and CCD configuration This example shows that a Config 0 CCD is ina SS35 scanner with version 1 02 of
195. connector screws must always be installed after reworking a unit It is tempting to leave them out especially if you can t find the proper tools These screws connect the circuit board ground to the chassis ground which eliminates ground noise from the image especially when imaging with the SCSI port Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission M4 Product Alert Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 PA Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 01 14 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970114162151JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Received on Film ADOBE 4 0 amp WIN95 SOFTWARE ERROR Details Diagrams PROBLEM A problem exists between the latest version of Adobe Photoshop ver 4 0 and Palette Export for Win95 The second time that an image is outputted the application will abort with a Memory Access Violation the PC will continue to operate This problem is not apparent with earlier versions of Photoshop or Windows CAUSE This is caused by a bug in the version 4 software from Adobe The memory stack is corrupted because an internal index register in the CPU is improperly
196. correct method to install these cards is included in this bulletin After the SCSI card is installed go to Step 1c Step 1c Scanner hardware recognition After the host adapter is correctly installed the hardware recognition step is next If the scanner is not seen in the Device Manager but the host adapter is seen something is wrong with the scanner host adapter the SCSI cabling or the PC itself Don t bother to do anything else at this point besides getting the scanner recognized Note At this time it does not matter whether ASPI software or a TWAIN interface is installed correctly you can worry about this later You must be sure that the miniport driver for the host adapter is the right one it s the latest version and installed in the right place A listing of many popular host adapter miniport drivers that lists their current version numbers can be found in Table 1 After you get the scanner recognized in the Device Manager but you still cannot Preview or Scan an image go to Step 2 Tip Look for extra copies of the SCSI card miniport driver If you find extra copies on the users hard drive delete them Example The Advansys 922 board uses ASC mpd as its miniport driver You will find this file in C WINDOWS SYSTEM IOSUBSYS Step 2 Correcting ASPI layer problems in Windows 95 amp 98 If the user has an Adaptec SCSI card go the Step 2a If the user has an Advansys SCSI card go to Step 2b Step 2a The easiest w
197. covered that incorrect resistors as specified by the most recent BOM are being installed in the boards REASON During manufacturing pilot Spring 97 it was discovered that the center point of the sizing process required movement and as a result R56 R55 R108 of the vertical channel and R6 of the horizontal channel were changed These changes were found to fix the sizing problems These changes were incorporated as an ECN which is released The PCB manufacturer apparently is still using the original BOM to build the ProPalette 7000 analog board which explains why the sizing problems have reappeared Units that have been shipped and passed the initial sizing adjustment pose no risk for customer returns Units that may have failed sizing on the first try and passed with a subsequent attempt may cause in some instances an image smaller than desired by the customer equivalent to a sizing failure The fix for this would be to replace the incorrect resistor values with the correct ones SOLUTION To determine if the correct resistors are installed look at R55 and R108 which are power resistors near the top of the unit near the analog board heat sink If these resistors are labeled 47 ohms then the wrong values have been installed if they are labeled 40 ohms the correct values have been installed The proper values must be installed according to the following chart Correct values Incorrect values
198. ct Type 669 film Manufacturing Codes The defect occurs randomly and may exist in any film lot although not all film lots will have the problem Issue Polacolor 669 ER film is showing early signs of pod smear Although the problem is exacerbated with age it has recently been present in customer returns with as much as six months left on the expiration date The customer will describe this defect on the phone as streaked pinkish streak pink swirl or part of the picture is covered in pink This problem can be reduced considerably if the film is stored in a refrigerator This product has been shipped worldwide Customer Resolution When customers return film for pod smear replace the film with fresh dated film that is less than three months old having at least nine months left on the expiration date On a temporary basis do not use a film coupon as compensation for pod smear We want to make sure that the customer s replacement film is fresh in order to minimize the possibility of a recurrence of the same problem in the replacement film which could be brought on by aging If you are unable to obtain replacement film with at least nine months left on the expiration date you should notify David Kennedy at the Vale David has agreed to have long dated replacement film shipped directly to the customer from the Vale Send David your request by email at kennedd polaroid com Corrective Action Manufacturing is working on bo
199. cters and begins with one or two letters For example J3340GR or BA90351G The MicroCam serial number is located in the BACK of the film cartridge compartment and it currently consists of six characters For example Do not confuse the CB 33 serial number with the MicroCam serial number The CB 33 serial number is located in the FRONTof the film cartridge compartment on the CB 33 main B4445C event the entire CB 33 camera back or it s door assembly was replaced The serial number was relocated so that the identity of the MicroCam would not be lost in the Customer Support Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 A T ep POLAROID CORPORATION GLOBAL TECHNICAL SERVICES PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO MCAM 94 4 SPECIAL DATE NOVEMBER 14 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM HARRO LIMBO SUBJECT MICROCAM DOUBLE IMAGE PROBLEM PROBLEM A double image problem has been identified with MicroCams manufactured from late March 1994 through August 1994 Serial numbers encompass C4460 to J4000C The problem is estimated to affect 10 of the approximately 4000 units manufactured during this period If you are on Lotus Notes see Service Work Order HE9409 19100829 for a history of this problem SOURCE OF PROBLEM A defective SOC Color Conversion Filter is the cause of the problem This Filter converts 3400 K light to 5500 K for wh
200. ctronics package all four boards can be used with either new or old shutters None of the boards individually is interchangeable with the old boards i e You cannot replace an old logic board with a new logic board an old display board with a new display board etc New shutter assemblies cannot be installed in camera heads manufactured before May 1994 An exploded view and parts list for the new shutter is included with this alert over THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS PLATE 1 ID1033A SHUTTER ASSEMBLY NO ONNNHWN HE WNNNNNNNNNN RR RRR kK rR kK eK O SOoMmAINNMNAWNFR TO AANIADNHPWNFK CO PARTS LISTS 1 ID1033A SHUTTER ASSEMBLY PART NUMBER 2713010 2721190 1 B2214A 1B2215A 1 B7549D 1B2213A 1B2217A 1A6786A 1 B221 OA 1 B2208B 74333B 1D1037A 1D1020A 1 B2209A 1 B2239A 1A4740A 1 B2221 A 1 B2207A 1 B2222A 71710890A 2725070 79710SA 71710890A 794895A 1 B3255B 1 B2204A 1 B2211A 1 B3301 C 1 B2205A 1 B2206A PART NAME Lens F4 5 114mm Spring Detent Aperture Ring Detent Disc Screw 256 Flathead 3 AB Mount Interceptor Extension Spring Spacer 1 Walking beam Screw Plastite Retainer Plate Assembly Cushion 2 Opening Spring Exposure Cable Solenoid Assembly Connector 4Pin Comes with assembly Compression Spring Pivot Walking Beam Plunger Adapter Roll Pin 2 Polarizer Assembly in Current Product Compress
201. cuaee3 ceeede casqunasveos sn 1D5668A LMP Encoder Cap a asic sccedaveecasadscantgeaainaesiaveseoaass 1A2956A LMP Encoder Assembly 00 eceeecccceeeseeseeceeees 1D5681A O MULT SEL ZACH eieiei arsena E TS 1A2981A These unique parts will be available from Materials Services Bedford Massachusetts after April 1995 Each market should assess their needs and order parts from normal sources Repair Procedures Any 636 AF cameras returned for repair must have unique parts replaced with the unique parts listed above Any repairs should duplicate the ruggedizing features provided at original manufacture soldered connections tape reinforcement etc Warranty The 636 AF camera will have a one year warranty from date of sale Early Returns An Early Returns program will be in effect only for reasons of functional performance as follows the first 150 cameras returned from Enschede the first 100 cameras returned from the United States When a defective camera is received it should be recorded on an Incident Awareness Form and copies of the IAF should be faxed to 1 Polaroid Corp Customer Support Services Attn Frank Bleszinski 201 Burlington Road BED 1A 1 Bedford Massachusetts 02130 1406 FAX 617 386 5611 2 Polaroid U K Ltd Ken McElroy Vale of Leven Industrial Estates Dumbarton G82 3PW Vale of Leven Industrial Estates Scotland FAX 011 44 389 5 5101 The camera and the IAF should then be shipped to Ken McEl
202. d 4 of U31 cathode to pin 2 between pin 2 and 7 of U31 cathode to pin 7 pe a ja ps Sere Ta image U18 FIX JPG U35 Protection This modification is required to comply with U35 design limitations on the analog board 1 Cut the trace that connects TP47 to the junction of U35 4 and DC35A 2 Cut the trace that connects DC35A to CR12 anode 3 Add jumper from R54 right side to CR12 anode 4 Add jumper from CR15 bottom right to U35 4 image 1AH823A U35 TIF Digital Analog Converter U2 and U34 must be populated with a DAC16 007 this is recognized by a white dot in the pin 1 identifier position Step 2 1AH823A Is01B to 1AH823A Is01C This final step is required to further protect the CRT from possible burns It defines the changes outlined in the manufacturing deviation notice Dev No 18555 Connect two 1N4004 diodes in series between the bottom end of R45 anode and U4 12 cathode Connect the negative side of a 22 mf 35 Vdc capacitor to the junction of the two diodes defined in the previous step Connect the positive side of the 22 mf 35 Vdc capacitor to the left hand lead of C31 The components should be fastened to the board with a non conductive adhesive Ensure that no leads lay across any conductors or components image CRT FIX TIF U18 FIX JPC 1AH823A U35 tif CRT FIX tif APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any fo
203. d close the film loading drawer the problem will not be fixed the film pack must be removed and put back in Remember that the top piece of film will now be exposed and will be ejected before the next real print is ejected Important If the numbers within the parentheses of the are NOT 128 or 146 or the noted error message does not appear in the Sequence log use information in the ColorShot Telephone Support Guide to help you find other causes of Internal Problem or Communication Problem error messages Contact Gerald DiBello e mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Parallel Bulletin V2 N1 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN crema 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid Photo Printer Parallel Vol 2 No 2 From New Products Service Support Group Date June 17 1999 Subject New Software Version 1 2 Released e Category Software Info Bulletin The purpose of this Bulletin is to notify Telephone Service and Repair Service providers of a new released version 1 2 of the ColorShot Photo Printer Parallel Software e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer Parallel e Det
204. d do an Acquire Import to bring up the Sprintscan application At the top of the Apple menu top left corner of your monitor screen choose About SprintScan 35 The About Dialog box appears as in Figure 5 Stuart joya Teresa Drummey Colin Kernan Carl GD re PAS Ji Lil _ jLayrien st Riga LL aJ a Wayne Palmer v Peter Zelten adi f 1 02 Manufacturing 27 Figure 5 Macintosh About Box The numbers reported at the right bottom of the Dialog box are reading from top to bottom the CCD configuration reported as c0 in our example the firmware version and the software version Changing the CCD Configuration Code using the Application Software a Change the configuration number from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 by holding down the Option key and single clicking the mouse pointer once on top of the Configuration number Another Dialog box appears as shown in Figure 6 Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N6 Page 5 of 7 AN Do not use this feature before contacting Polaroid Technical Support New CCD Type __Program the Scanner_ Figure 6 Macintosh CCD Programming Dialog Box b Change the CCD configuration type by typ
205. d in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 02 24 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990224131 408JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Digital Board 1F5570A Revisions Part R334 C802 C804 U501 U505 Category Performance The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of the revision change history to 1F5570A Digital board Product Affected ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Details The ProPalette D igital board 1F5570A has undergone six revisions since it was initially released This document will define the changes for each revision and detail which parts should be changed to improve the reliability of the board History Each subsequent higher Issue Number ISii incorporates the previous revision changes S01 Baseline release S02 amp IS03 Change of approved supplier and part number for U519 S04 Change the value of R334 in the Watchdog timer from 4 7 Kohm to 3 0 Kohm S05 Change the standoff voltage rating of C802 and C804 from 20 Vdc to 35 Vdc Change of approved supplier and part number for U306 ISO5B Change U501 and U505 from CMOS to LS devices Change of approved supplier and part number for U203 amp U204 S06 Re spin to add functionality to support the ProPalette 80xx design Required Changes The following parts should be changed to bring a functionin
206. d to hold the film recorder is vibration free This is particularly important with the medium format and 4x5 camera backs The 4x5 camera should never be used without bolting it to the ProPalette Banging on the surface during exposure will cause image artifacts 3 Ifthe lines are fuzzy straight regularly repeating lines then check the grounds Ensure that the computer CPU and the film recorder are plugged into the same power outlet and share a common ground to eliminate the possibility of a ground loop problem 4 Make sure the little screws that connect the parallel port connector to the chassis back plane are screwed in make sure the cable connecting the CPU to the CFR is OK If this is OK try a different CPU 5 Ifthe lines are slightly curved lines that go from edge to edge then this could be a hardware version issue Check the serial number suffix to see if the box is an old one that e g may have F dacs in it 6 Ifthe lines are fuzzy relatively short lines then try a different film e g Ektachrome EPP or Fuji Provia Stay away from Fuji Velvia Velvia is especially critical i e it shows lines better than other films We use it to test customers should get better results with other films 7 If the lines are fine black lines straight and extend from edge to edge then they re probably intermittency lines caused if the CRT scan light blinks on and off due to a slow or busy host computer One way to check for this is to expose th
207. data in the slide scanner EEPROM will be changed to operate correctly with the modified CCD After the LabVIEW test is completed the new configuration will be reported at the bottom right corner of the scanner test panel as CCD Configuration This window should read 1 Figure 8b Note The Configuration code only needs to be changed once On subsequent runs of the LabVIEW IPT tester leave the CCD Configuration selection at Do Not Update A CCO Configuration ICED Config 1 z CCD Config 1 CCE Config Pata er Figure 8 CCD config widow Parts Availability Replacement CCD Boards P N 1AJ012A for the SprintScan 35 Plus are available from Material Services Department Polaroid Corporation 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Please order from normal sources 13 Consumer Services Division 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 N N Int l _ EXP L_ sus SPECIAL TECH SERVICES QUAL CONTROL TO LIST FROM Gerald DiBello POLAROID CORPORATION TECHNICAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT PRODUCT ALERT P A NO 35mm Scan 97 3 DATE _August 1997 MAT LSERVICES OPERATIONS SUBJECT SPRINTSCAN 35 35ES amp 35PLUS SCSI TERMINATION POWER Revision Replaces Product Alert 35mm Scan 95 3 June 1995 Problem Macintosh Laptops Slide scanner malfunctions have taken place when a laptop computer PowerBook was connected to it The type of malfunction that took place wa
208. der the HR6000 monitor boards Old part number 1E4391A New part number 1AH901A APPROVALS 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 12 21 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 981221100843JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Firmware Corruption Category The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of the chance to corrupt the alignment parameters during a firmware upgrade when using the Alignment station equipment Product Affected ProPalette 7000 amp 8000 Details The Alignment station has the functionality to upgrade the firmware of a UUT The utility has been designed with a specific work process flow intended If the Alignment station is used to upgrade the firmware of a working ProPalette all of the alignment and calibration parameters in the unit will be lost The work process assumes that an alignment will be performed on the UUT and any high density parameters must be erased before the Alignment station will work correctly High density parameters were implemented with firmware versions 564 for the ProPalette 8000 and 702 for the ProPalette 7000 Resolution The correct procedure to change the firmware of avorking ProPalette is to use the provided capability when the upgrade either
209. dule Mask P N 1B6748 and Mask Installation Tool P N B13605 are now available from Material Services Cambridge MA Order through normal sources A O pp POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P a NO PROCAM 94 5 JUNE 29 1994 SPECIAL DATE TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS LIST FROM FRANK BLESZINSKI SUBJECT PROCAM EXPOSURE SPECIFICATION VALUES The Testing amp Adjustments section of the ProCam Service Manual dated July 1993 contains a series of exposure tests for the camera At the time the manual was written the specification values for the cam era had not been finalized The purpose of this bulletin is to provide you with the testing specifcations It is suggested that you file this bulletin in the ProCam manual and tape a copy next to the tester PROCAM EXPOSURE TESTING SPECIFICATIONS Service Manual Page Number Test Specification 2 10 Ambient Exposure 15 to 35 stops 2 12 Strobe Exposure 35 to 15 stops 2 13 ZLS Graywall 315 ZLS to 395 ZLS 2 14 Hybrid 1 50 to 2 25 2 15 Blade Speed 25 ms to 30 ms THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS y a POLAROID era Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT
210. dy to operate Note If the yellow Ready LED continually blinks flashes the scanner failed its self test routine Check and reseat the CPU if necessary and then repeat the power down power up sequence 17 During the first scan and each subsequent scan that detects drift in the lamp or the front end the scanner initiates its calibration routine Parts Availability Replacement CPU 1F4554A is available from Material Services Department Polaroid Corporation 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Please order from normal sources A 4 y eee POLAROID m Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 REPAIR INFO BULLETIN Int l EXP SUB R 1 B NO 35mm Scan 95 4 SPECIAL DATE June 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT 35mm SprintScan Firmware CPU Update Replacement be replaced with the latest firmware CPU Note System software is resident in the firmware CPU e Intermittent hanging or crashing during a scan e Non repeatable quality from scan to scan e High frequency noise striping in scanned images includes diagonal horizontal or vertical lines e Artifacts at non native resolution settings SprintScan 35mm Scanner s with serial numbers before B500634B must also be replaced with the latest firmware CPU Serial Number Location and Identification Location Fi
211. e 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT 35mm SprintScan Firmware CPU Update Replacement be replaced with the latest firmware CPU Note System software is resident in the firmware CPU e Intermittent hanging or crashing during a scan e Non repeatable quality from scan to scan e High frequency noise striping in scanned images includes diagonal horizontal or vertical lines e Artifacts at non native resolution settings SprintScan 35mm Scanner s with serial numbers before B500634B must also be replaced with the latest firmware CPU Serial Number Location and Identification Location Figure 1 The Serial Number is located e On the outside of the shipping carton All Configurations e Back panel of the Scanner below its SCSI ports First generation to Configuration B e Bottom of Scanner Configuration C and all subsequent Configurations Background All SprintScan 35mm Scanner s that are returned from the field with any of the following problems must THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Identification The Serial Number identifies the SprintScan 35mm Scanner as follows Month A January Sequential Number B February B5 00634 B Year 4 1994 Hardware Configuration Level 5 1995 Rear Panel SCSI Connectors Location of Serial Number Serial Number for
212. e BULLE TIN croma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 2 No 6 From New Products Service Support Group Date May 13 1998 Subject SprintScan PolaScan 35 amp 35ES New Replacement CCD e Category Product Alert The purpose of this message is to alert Depot Repair Service providers of a change in the type of CCD that s now available as a replacement part for the SprintScan PolaScan 35 and 35ES e Products Affected SprintScan 35 and SprintScan 35ES e Details The Polaroid Parts Department has exhausted its stock of the older type of CCD boards used in the SprintScan 35 35ES and PolaScan part number 1E6533A Effective immediately only new modified blue filter CCD boards part number 1AJ011A will be available The new modified CCD board must only be installed in scanners with version 1 04 or higher of firmware After CCD installation the customer must upgrade to version 2 7 or higher of the SprintScan software e Resolution Identifying Existing Firmware Revision Level When you replace an older CCD board with the new modified blue filter type P N 1AJ011A you must first check the scanners firmware revision level The revision level must be 1 04 or higher to work correctly with the new CCD To identify the existing firmware revision level note what is printed on the label of the existing firmware using the following procedure 1 Turn off power to the scanner and disconnect the power cord 2 Remove the to
213. e HR 6000 configurations Their differences are shown below in Table 1 Table 1 HR 6000 Configurations THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Configuration A Configuration B Configuration D Firmware 5 05 5 08 5 09 Version Monitor PC Original 01 PCB Reworked to 02 PCB Reworked to 02 PCB Board CRT Old Phosphor Old Phosphor New Phosphor CRT Clamp 120 oz in 120 oz in 120 oz in Adjustment Adjustments Luma Same as CI 3000 5000 R18 6 0 ft 1 150 R18 6 0 ft 1 150 AutoLuma Same as CI 3000 5000 VRI 200 6 0 ft l VRI 200 6 0 ft l Dark Current Same as CI 3000 5000 Same as CI 3000 5000 Same as CI 3000 5000 IDENTIFYING NEW PHOSPHOR CRT FOR CONFIGURATION D CRT CRT Scientific Label Serial number 2000 or greater located on the right side of the CRT Figure 1 Yoke Syntronic Instruments Label Suffix letter P located on top of the white plastic cover Figure 1 Monitor Wells Gardner Label Issue 02 located below the heat shield and under capacitors C15 PC Board and C16 Figure 2 C17035 2 99409 94 50 A88322PC C17055 1 99409 94 51 Figure 1 CRT RORE C00 MELT I ae Si a Assy1lE4391 A Issue02 P744 Figure 2 Issue 02 Monitor PC Board Identification A POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO
214. e Version Identification There are two methods to identify the version of firmware being used by the scanner e Visual e Software Visual Identification Remove the scanner cover and look at the label affixed to the firmware This label contains firmware version currently being used by the scanner Software Identification MAC Double click the mouse on the SCSI Probe The SCSI Probe will display all the SCSI devices Vendor Product Version Polaroid 35mm Windows Click the mouse on the About Box The About Box will display the firmware version i e 85 Parts Availability Replacement firmware PN 1F4699A is available from Material Services Department Polaroid Corporation 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Please order from normal sources Hardware Updates Table 2 lists and describes the past and current modifications made to the scanner s hardware Table 2 Hardware Modifications Serial Number Suffix Description Function H400235 None First N A N A generation L400500A A Filter wheel Changes filter wheel neutral changed density from 0 5 to 0 6 and ensures scanning uniformity with all color channels M40033B B Controller PC Reduces noise to prevent board modified vertical diagonal lines C5001762C C Adds slot cover to Inhibits filter wheel from chassis assembly over rotating and getting lost stuck or jammed L5110253D D Added e New inverter PC Extends lamp life board e Metal
215. e image that exhibits the problem with some dummy film and once the exposure starts remove the camera from the front of the unit Look in at the CRT and see if the scan is blinking on and off If so the fix is to increase the Pacing value via the keypad Try to use the same image and printing conditions that produced the problem A slow host computer may force the ProPalette to wait for data during a line scan This will result in a regular pattern of dark lines within the image To eliminate this problem Pacing should be enabled on the LCD panel This will insert a user defined wait between scan lines allowing the host computer to process the necessary image data The amount of pacing should be increased in small steps until the data wait lines have been eliminated An excessive pacing time will increase the total exposure time of the entire image Make certain that the computer that the film recorder is connected to is completely DEDICATED to imaging with the ProPalette Every time a message comes in or a key is pressed or the network is polled causes a software interrupt in the CPU These interrupts borrow time from the process of processing the image for the film recorder If the film recorder has to wait for image data data wait lines can appear on the film Use firmware ver 564 or 704 and block mode drivers which makes better use of the printer DRAM to sustain the exposure Distribution
216. e subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N3 Page 2 of 7 Gi ASPI Installation Verification x Adaptec ASPI Windows 95 This utility has checked your curent ASPI installation Version information and the operational status of ASPI are listed below Component Version Date Size WNASPI32 BLL 4 57 1008 12 23 97 48128 WINASPI DBLL 4 57 1008 12 23 97 5600 APIX VXD 4 57 1008 12 23 97 22091 ASPIENUM VXD 4 57 1008 12 23 97 7743 PRODUCTS ASPI is properly installed and is fully operational total of 3 host adapters have been detected Save Exit Figure 1 Adaptec ASPIcheck display window Step 2b Advansys does not supply ASPI for Windows 95 98 PC s on their SuperSCSI CD ROM that is included with the ABP 922 SCSI card The CD ROM installs the miniport driver and the SuperSCSI troubleshooting application Advansys relies on the fact that Windows 95 98 will install an ASPI layer in all new OS installations by default The files Windows installs are e Winaspi dll version 1 00 Location C WINDOWS SYSTEM e Whaspi32 dll version 1 0 0 0 Location C WINDOWS SYSTEM e Apix vxd version 4 00 951 Location C WINDOWS SYSTEM IOSUBSYS Tips 1 If you run Adaptec s ASPI check application on a PC usi
217. e terminations options no changes are needed for the host adapter to work with SprintScans Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N5 Page 1 of 2 Adaptec 2930U Notes Testing has shown that the 2930U a plug and play host adapter when used with a SprintScan No software needs to be loaded on a Macintosh G3 for proper operation with SprintScans Contact Gerald DiBello Ce mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N5 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN crara 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 SprintScan Vol 3 No 6 From New Products Service Support Group Date May 26 1999 Subject SprintScan 4000 Case Opening Tool e Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to provide Repair Service organizations information regarding the availability of a special tool to remove the cover of the SprintScan 4000
218. e two 2 light tunnel hold down screws that secures it in place 5 Re position the light tunnel so it is spaced approximately 1mm away from the slide carrier and then re tighten the two 2 light tunnel hold down screws 6 Manually rotate the leadscrew so the slide carrier moves down until the arm is next to the right side of the light tunnel 7 Make sure there is clearance between the light tunnel and the slide carrier arm 8 Re assemble the slide scanner and then re test it s operation in the Portrait or the Superslide mode Hold Down Interference Screw Occurs Here Slide Carrier Arm Light Tunnel 1mm LL 040 a eS TC C C C CC d Front of Scanner Hold Down Screw Figure 1 Partial Top View of SprintScan or PolaScan Slide Carriage Assembly Checking for Blown SCSI Interface Fuse Equipment Required e SCSI Interface Fuse P N 5N0008001 e Passive Terminator 50 Pin Centronic P N 1E5543A or equivalent 1 Turn off the scanner by setting its Power On Off 1 0 switch to Off 0 WARNING When turning on the system always make sure that the slide scanner is turned on first and then the host computer When turning off the system its the opposite always turn off the host computer first and then the slide scanner 2 Disconnect host computer from the SCSI interface connector Notes Do not disconnect SCSI terminator e If the slide scanner you are testing is a SS35 Plus set the terminator
219. earing from the SCSI bus problems being recognized by some Host Adapter cards esp Adaptec 2940 family boards problem corrected e Resolution The manufacturer began shipping scanners with version 1 80 firmware as of November 1998 Scanners with the new firmware may be identified by the suffix F in the serial number last character of the serial number The new software will be installed in SprintScan 45 s beginning with serial number K801218F this is the estimated cut in serial number Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N11 Page 1 of 3 Upgrading the firmware in the SprintScan 45 requires that two EPROM s be removed and replaced The EPROM s are labeled U49 and U50 Use the following procedure to replace the firmware Tools and Materials Required e Anti static wrist strap e EPROM remover tool e Philips screwdriver Procedure 1 Before removing power from the scanner make sure that the carriage is in the home position Then remove the power cord and SCSI cable from the back of the scanner Note The cover removal procedure in Steps 2 3 and 4 can found on page 7 of the SprintScan 45 Service Manual The manual is on the Electronic Library CD
220. ecognized as an Imaging Device must be present on the host PC These files should load from the Windows 98 CD the first time the scanner is recognized you get a message telling you to put the Win 98 CD in the drive These files are not loaded in a standard Win 98 install or when upgrading from Win 95 For some reason they sometimes don t get installed The files are SCSImap sys SCSlscan sys After installation both files reside in the following path C AWINDOWS SYSTEM32 DRIVERS The two sys files are in a compressed CAB format on the Windows 98 installation CD and therefore not easy to get One way to get the files is to extract them from the compressed file using a procedure outlined in Microsoft Knowledge Base article Q129605 named How to Extract Original Compressed Windows Files Find the article on the web at http support microsoft com support kb articles Q129 6 05 asp Once you are sure that the files are installed go to Step 3 Step 3 Check for and Delete Polasan Inf Use the Find command and look for a file named Polascan inf If found delete the file In most cases you will only find this file if the customer had the scanner working with the old SprintScan software with Win 95 and upgraded to Win 98 After you are sure the file is not on the system do the following 1 Open the Device Manager 2 Select the Scanner listing with the mouse pointer 3 Click on the Remove button 4 Re boot the PC After W
221. ed the dots disappear The easiest solution is to re mount the sensor so as to have the emitting side of the sensor is behind the filter wheel and unable to reflect off the face of the CRT Remove the filter wheel sensor and position it such that blue green wire pair are pointing down toward the bottom of the film recorder This will ensure the correct orientation All film recorders manufactured after 15 December 1997 will have the proper placement Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 02 27 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980227140811JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Image Quality 4x5 Focus Details Diagrams Problem There have been reports of soft focus on one side of the image for some ProPalette 8000 s that have a 4x5 camera attached Reason There can be an interference in the mounting of the 4x5 camera back caused by the toe of the mounting bolt that is used to hold the 35 mm camera mounting mechanism The intermittence of the problem is caused by normal manufacturing v
222. eeded e Anti Static Mat and Wrist Strap e Phillips Screwdriver e EXAR A D Streak Test Kit P N 13700 Includes 1 DSHD Disk 1 Streak Target e Macintosh 68k or Power PC computer with at least 24MB of RAM e Adobe PhotoShop version 3 0 5 or higher e SprintScan 35ES and 35Plus Software for Macintosh version 2 6 or higher Software Installation Load film files Ident4x CV2 and SS35P CV2 from the EXAR kit disk into SprintScan 35p folder Note Path to folder System Folder Preferences SprintScan 35 SprintScan 35p Previewing Streaks Images that may be opened and viewed in Adobe PhotoShop are provided on the disk included with the EXAR A D Streak Test Kit These pictures preview the images seen after scanning the streak target on a test unit Files showing scanned images from normal and defective A D converters are provided There are four 4 image files on the disk e Normal Preview Screen shot Figure 3 e Normal ADC JPEG image Figure 4 e Defective Preview Screen shot Figure 5 e Defective ADC JPEG image Figure 6 Preview Scan of Streak Target Image Normal Operating A D Converter The file Normal Preview Figure 3 is ascreen shot showing an Adobe PhotoShop window after Acquire SprintScan 35 is selected from the File menu Note For later versions of Adobe Photoshop Import SprintScan 35 is selected from the File menu The right side of the image shows the steak target preview image produced on a slide s
223. eeds of 200MHz or above like a Pentium 200 233 and 266 Palette Export can cause software errors SWERR to appear on the ProPalette 7000 and ProPalette 8000 LCD panel This error is the result of the software failing to check the ProPalette s memory availability and sending image data faster than the ProPalette can respond to say that it is not ready full NOTE This has been reported on PC platforms that have processor speeds at 200MHz and above Products Affected ProPalette 8000 ProPalette 7000 Palette Export for Windows 95 v1 3 0 ctions Solutions Polaroid is revising Palette Export for Windows 95 v1 3 0 to correct this problem with fast PC platforms The revised version of Palette Export will be made available on Polaroid s FTP site Another technical bulletin will be created to alert you when the new version of Palette Export is available Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 Date 11 25 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 971125164625JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category H
224. el image files contain the raw image data directly from the scanner without any PolaColor Insight image corrections applied To save an image in this format follow the PolaColor Insight instructions to preview and scan an image Any corrections you make will be ignored When the Save Image File As dialog box appears make sure Scan 12 Bits per Channel is enabled checked This feature is available only when saving as TIFF or Photoshop 3 0 images on Macintosh systems or as TIFF images on PC systems New Autofocus control To reduce the time required for a scan the scanner automatic focus function is normally disabled For most scans at normal sizes and resolutions disabling autofocus does not degrade the image When scanning small areas at high resolutions however enabling autofocus may improve image sharpness To enable or disable autofocus during the final scan 1 Click Preferences on the Edit menu 2 Click the Scanning tab PC systems only 3 Click Enable Autofocus on Final Scan to display or remove the checkmark 4 Click OK New Profile embedding PolaColor Insight version 3 5 software lets you embed color pro file information within image files The result is more accurate color rendition when you view or print these files with Adobe Photoshop software version 5 or later or other applications compatible with the ColorSync color management system or con forming to ICM standards This system uses the color profile informati
225. empt to cycle the machine If this happens there is a strong possibility that the teeth on the gear identified above will be stripped CORRECTIVE ACTION Customers should be advised to send printers to a Polaroid location for repair whenever message Error 14 is displayed on the printer readout Future generations of TX1100 and TX2000 printers will have an electronic redesign that retains the error message even after the machine is unplugged As a result when the machine is turned on again the error message will reappear on the readout THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS 4 CAUSED BY JAMMED MEDIA BACKGROUND A small number of TX1100 TX2000 thermal printers have been found with a stripped gear prob p A a POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO TX 95 7 SPECIAL DATE JAN 6 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM NICK CURRERI SUBJECT CLEARING PAPER JAMS IN THE TX 1500 PRINTER When a paper jam occurs in the TX 1500 printer the READY INK and PRINT button lights all blink at the same time To clear a paper jam do the following l With the unit ON unplug the power cord from the wall Leave it unplugged for about 5 seconds 2 Plug the power cord back in This allows the u
226. er 1 05 Current released version Adds new IQA color profiles for enhanced color performance Available Software Update Files At the time this bulletin was released two software update files exist These small files can be e mailed or put on a floppy disk to send to users If you need these files contact the author of this bulletin Update 1 Installs updates for Windows 98 users only Update 2 Installs version 1 05 color profiles in any version of the software Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Bulletin V1 N6 Page 1 of 1 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN merman 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01703 SprintScan Vol 1 No 14 From New Products Service Support Group Date 12 16 97 Subject SPRINTSCAN 45 CCD amp CONTROLLER BOARD REPLACMENT e Category Product Alert The purpose of this message is to alert service providers that repair the SprintScan 45 regarding CCD and Controller Board compatibility issues e Products Affected SprintScan 45 and SprintScan 45 Pro e Details Problem Replacing a known defective CCD board does not repair the problem and in s
227. er ASC sys Product Summary Multi tasking multithreaded I O disconnect reconnect synchronous and asynchronous data transfer ASPI compliant OS Support Macintosh Windows 95 and 98 Windows NT4 Electrical Termination Single ended Active Not tested for compatibility with Sprintscans Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N9 Page 1 of 2 Package Contents 1 3922 Host Adapter 2 Advansys Super SCS on CD ROM with the following features e Allow the user to directly connect to the Advansys website to download updated drivers Do SCSI bus troubleshooting View SCSI bus Install drivers for the Advansys 3922 board SuperView allows the user to see SCSI devices that are on the bus e Includes ASPI for Windows NT4 3 Printed installation instructions for Windows 95 98 Windows NT4 and Macintosh Contact Gerald DiBello e mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan
228. er the unit serial number will be made available In the interim any units that exhibit this problem should be placed on hold until the firmware fix and correct procedures are available There are no old green filters available for replacement APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 05 10 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990510130756JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Reported SWERR Error Messages This Knowledge Base note will list the common SWERR error messages as they are reported from the field An attempt will be made to explain the error why it occurs how to resolve it and possible planned improvements in the product to eliminate them SWERR ferrhist cpp 189 Error burning ERR SWERR osstratup cpp 162 2 UI SWERR rico cpp 486 perf hi as expc SWERR dp2layer cpp 215 Unknown analog b SWERR ferrhist cpp 189 Error burning ERR This is aresult of the corruption of the portion of flash memory that holds the error log The fix was to remove the error log using FLASHMAN and let the unit re initialize the log The easiest way for the log to become corrupt is to shut off the unit while the log is being written don t know if this was the case for you but it can happen that way Suffice it to say
229. ers of the structure and use of the FLASHMAN HEX host side utility for the ProPalette products The Flash devices in the ProPalette are programmable non volatile memories that are used primarily to store the control code and calibration data for the ProPalette Other programs and data can be placed in the system such as diagnostics and control information The flash contains data blocks of various sizes There is no fixed order of data blocks in flash They are programmed into flash as they are received Data blocks cannot be duplicated there s only one copy of a given data type in flash at any time If a data block is to be programmed and an older copy already exists then the older copy is overwritten A code block is defined by six terms Block number Type Name Version Size Starting segment if applicable Note that the version number does not reflect the version of the firmware installed but rather the version of the program that wrote that specific block of code If the block was written by the firmware then it will reflect the firmware version The physical flash device can be broken into a number of logical virtual flash devices Each virtual flash is independent of the other virtual flash If an erase occurs on one virtual flash it won t affect the contents of the other virtual flash The Flash Manager FLASHMAN HEX is a host side utility that can add data blocks remove data blocks and erase the entire flash FLASHMAN displays the co
230. es Table 1 lists and describes the past and current modifications made to the scanner s firmware THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Version ald 1 0 1 02 Description None Improves uniformity correction e Improves uniformity correction e Tightens amount of drift allowed before the scanner recalibrates e Fixes decimation artifact Fixes timing glitch in new ASIC s Eliminates race condition while scanning on Power PC Eliminates race condition while acquiring image date Eliminates timing bug Masked programmed Eliminated LS YNC time out errors Table 1 Firmware Updates Past and Current Function First generation of firmware Reduces high frequency noise in scanned image e Reduces high frequency noise in scanned image e Improves scan to scan repeatability e Eliminates horizontal lines at non native resolution settings Eliminates scanner hang up caused by timing glitch while scanning Eliminates scanner hang up caused by race condition while scanning negatives Eliminates scanner hang up caused by special software Corrects image line count Incorporates hardware diagnostics Corrected false LSYNC error condition Note Sometimes a scanner with a CCD with a new metal mask fails to calibrate after the new version of firmware is installed If this happens replace the new firmware with version 1 0 Firmwar
231. es using certain negative film files or with scanner s with particularly dimmed bulbs and more negative film files This effect which seemed only to appear in a fraction of the scanners caused a slight increase in the blue signal for one or two lines only at a stop start boundary resulting in a faint blue horizontal band Based on the platform speed available memory scan widths etc stop starts could be invoked as low as half of full resolution Due to the nature of the negative film files the effect may be seen primarily in the blue channel and secondarily in the red It differs in nature to the SCSI related banding in that it appears to be limited to one or two lines and requires a stop start to appear at all In general it is much more difficult to detect than the SCSI related banding which does not necessarily have to be connected to a stop start Problem 1 Table 1 Low Level Band Problems Cause CCD Susceptible Made worse if e Host computer has blown termination fuse or low termination power supply e Scanner s 5 vdc power supply high Controller PC Board Issue 04 CCDsusceptible problem may occur with negative film tables e Fuji Reala 4F e Kodak Ektapress 400 67 e Fuji HG 1600 6D e Kodak Ektar 6F e Fuji Super G 400 75 e Kodak Ektapress 1600 75 Aging bulb with CCD susceptible problem may occur with negative film tables Kodak Royal Gold 77 Fuji HG 400 7D Fuji Super G 100 83 Kodak Gold 88 Kodak VP
232. esh and includes a README TXT file with instructions for performing the software upgrade Please make certain to follow these installation instructions carefully Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base o EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 01 29 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980129161012JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Alignment Error Details Diagrams Problem A single large white spot or two may be visible in the upper right quadrant of the face of the CRT during geometry alignment It is likely that the alignment process will fail because of the image artifact Reason The spots are a result of the filter wheel sensor emitting infrared light that reflects off the CRT and is picked up by the alignment camera Solution It s possible to mount the sensor in either of two orientations and still have the proper functionality If the sensor is mounted in a way that has the emitting side of the sensor on the outside of the filter wheel the dots would appear When that same sensor is revers
233. first wire at the left of the ribbon cable back about an inch from the connector The connector has a key on the bottom Use this key to identify the left wire of the ribbon cable Cut and strip the wire as close to the connector as possible See Figure 1 Cut the leads of three posistors as shown Key on bottom of connector Cut amp strip wire about an inch from connector FIGURE 1 Solder one of the previously trimmed posistors to the wire Use black electrical tape to fully cover the soldered joints and the posistor FIGURE 1 3 Solder one of the previously trimmed posistors to the wire Use black electrical tape to fully cover the soldered joints and the posistor NOTE The shutter blades are heat sensitive Do not try to use shrink tubing in place of the tape 4 Reconnect J2 to the LED board Cut and strip wire from Pin 1 J1 about four inches from connector i Solder posistor to wire Cut and strip wire from n 4 gt a a about six inches from SS foie FIGURE 2 a Using Figure 2 locate connector J1 and disconnect it from the brightness solenoid 6 Identify the wire from pin 1 and trace it back toward the logic board Cut and strip the wire about four inches from the connector 7 Solder one of the trimmed posistors to the wire Use black electrical tape to fully cover the soldered joints and the posistor 8 Reconnect J1 to the brightness solenoid 9 Using Figure 2 loca
234. flash then vFlash 1 is erased and then tried once more Resolution The firmware should be upgraded to version 565 705 or later This can be performed at a Service Center or by using the procedure outlined in the Lotus Notes Knowledge Base article 980722113223 F APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 R 6000 Date 03 24 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990324130140JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Modification to Ricoh Camera Category Performance The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a solution to the ESD problem that ProPalette and HR6000 customers may experience Product Affected ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 R6000 Details This bulletin summarizes the actions to minimize the occurrence of Camera not recognized or 6 x 7 Camera Selected errors seen on ProPalette s The problem comes from an electrostatic discharge to the DX pins inside the 35mm Ricoh camera back which destroys the interface chips The firmware displays some other camera back on the LCD and prevents normal 35mm exposures There has been no indication of this failure for the R6000 but it uses the identical camera body The hardware solution is to cut the wires in the Ricoh camera back
235. g board up to the latest revision level Description Supplier Part Number ROHM MCR18JW302 3 0 Kohm AVX CR32302JT KOA RM73B2BTE 302 22 F 35Vdc SPRAG UE 293D 226X 0035E 2T 22 F 35Vdc SPRAG UE 293D 226X 0035E 2T 74LS244 D igiK ey DM74A LS244AWM ND 74LS257 D igiK ey D M74ALS257M N D These defined changes will bring a 1F5570A board up to IS05B No support will be provided bring the revision level any higher APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 Date 03 05 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 9903051 11710JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Analog Board 1AE545A Revisions Category Performance The purpose of this bulletin is to furnish service providers with a board modification process to upgrade the 1AE545A Analog board Product Affected 1AE545A Analog board for the ProPalette 7000 z Details These procedures will upgrade the functionality of the 1AE545A Is01 Analog board for the ProPalette 7000 to match the functionality of the 1AE545A Is05B Is06 in two steps Process Step 1 1AE545A Is01 to 1AE545A Is02 Is05 U18 Protection This modification is required to protect U18 on the Analog board from high voltage discharge from the CRT yoke Ensure that the added components have very short leads
236. g for any Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N10 Page 1 of 2 SCSI devices example Polaroid 35MM that are connected to it named along with their SCSI ID number 1b If the card is an older ISA type example Adaptec 1505 you must use a utility like Adaptec s SCSI explorer to see if the scanner is recognized 2 Scanner hardware recognition The hardware recognition step is basic If the scanner is not recognized something is wrong with the scanner host adapter or the cabling Don t bother to do anything else at this point besides getting the scanner recognized If it s not recognized at bootup it won t appear in the Device Manager Note At this time it does not matter whether ASPI software is installed correctly or even installed you can worry about this later You just have to be concerned that the miniport driver for the host adapter is the right one and correctly installed Example The Advansys 922 board uses ASC mpd as it s miniport driver You will find this file in C WINDOWS SYSTEM IOSUBSYS When the scanner is at least recognized got to Step 2 Step 2 Check for two required sys Files Two critical Windows 98 files that are needed to have a scanner r
237. g system and must be manually installed by the user The ASPI layer must be present for a SCSI card to work with the operating system Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V3 N11 Page 1of2 4 Start PolaColor Insight and it should now run without error messages 5 Note that there are Windows 2000 specific miniport drivers available for many Adaptec SCSI cards Users should install a new driver if one is available Go to this location to find them http www adaptec com support overview scsiha html find the card number click on and you will go to a page where you can select and download the Windows 2000 specific driver for the card Readme instructions with the driver tell you how to install it Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V3 N11 Page 2of2 Polaroid Software Information Bulletin June 5 2000 Worldwide Customer Support Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Tel
238. g the first quarter of 1994 all manufacturing facilities will phase in the use of a new gold colored flash shield in place of the current peach colored shield This change will be made in all 600 line Sun hard body cameras Impulse Fixed Focus and Auto Focus cameras and Spectra Image cam eras being manufactured Studies of the value of replacing the shield on folding 680 cameras are still provements of 40 measuring color performance of flash pictures versus ambient pictures It is expected that this change will be perceived by our customers as an improvement which will lead to increased film sales underway Over the past several years various improvements in photographic emulsions i e Star to Hybrid to Hybrid IV have resulted in a color offset between indoor and outdoor pictures that is now considered to be unacceptable The use of the new gold colored flash shield will yield color performance im REPAIR POLICY It is recommended that repair facilities replace the peach flash shield with the gold flash shield on any of the above listed cameras received for any repair Follow the instructions in the applicable Service Manuals for guidance in replacing the shields Inventories of flash assemblies with the peach flash shield should be reworked to the gold shield discard all peach flash shields Over j THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS PARTS AVAILABLITY
239. ge as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N7 Page 1 of 1 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 SprintScan Vol 3 No 8 From New Products Service Support Group Date June 23 1999 Subject SprintScan 4000 CCD Cable Detaches e Category Product Alert Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to provide Telephone Support Service and Repair organizations with information regarding a possible hardware problem affecting the SprintScan 4000 Products Affected SprintScan 4000 Details The user reports the results of a Preview scan using PolaColor Insight e When a positive film type is selected they see an all black preview image e When a negative film type is selected they see an all white preview image User also notes that the preview scan time is much longer compared to when the scanner was working normally Resolution Required Tools amp Equipment e RTV Silicon Sealant e Cotton Tipped Applicators see Figure 4 e Long tipped needle nose pliers e Cover Removal Tool part number Polaroid P N CPS 541 Problem The CCD cable connecting the main logic board to the CCD board has come off one of its mating connectors The cable may detach at either end but in most cases detaches from
240. ge power supply controls the trip point of the Power Fail signal With the R32 potentiometer in the full clockwise position the Power Fail signal line trips at approximately 75 Vac The low voltage outputs remain in regulation down to 62 Vac There is no indication of flashing CRT at power levels from 90 to 240 Vac The recommended procedure is to remove the Electronics Draw from the ProPalette to gain access to the Low Voltage power supply Looking at the power supply as it is mounted on the Electronics Draw R32 is a small circular potentiometer mounted on the PC board located below a transformer in the lower right corner of the assembly No electrical measurements are necessary during the adjustment just turn the control fully clockwise and re assemble All units manufactured after June 1997 will have this adjustment performed prior to shipment Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission v4 Product Alert Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 PA Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 07 10 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970710154500JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hard
241. ged from the CRT The initial digital and analog tests should be performed on the unit before that connector is reinstalled on the neck of the CRT This will preclude the generation of any beam current before we can ensure that the unit is functioning The connector on the back of the CRT should be removed if any circuit board is replaced or firmware installed After the initial functional tests are performed and the unit has passed all its internal diagnostics AC power should be shut down on the ProPalette the CRT connector re installed and the unit powered up again At this time it is safe to proceed with any tests that will put light on the tube APPROVALS 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product HR 6000 CFR Date 12 08 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 981208164648JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Video Monitor Board Final Assembly Category The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a change to the part number for the Video Monitor Board Final Assembly Product Affected HR6000 Details The HR6000 Video Monitor Assembly 1E4391A is now incorporated into the Monitor Board Final Assembly 1AH901A This will ensure that the anode clips and caps are installed on the board Please use the 1AH901A part number when you next or
242. gineering Special CPS Materials Design EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 08 26 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970826123156JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Image Quality SERVICE REQUIRMENTS Details Diagrams Problem It is recommended that all El Service Centers periodically evaluate the quality of a ProPalette 8000 repair by producing an image suite on 4 x 5 media in addition to the normal 35 mm media Since some artifacts are not apparent in the 35 mm size all customers who claim to use the 4x5 format should have their unit processed with that size Additional Equipment The following additional equipment will be required to support this effort the last three items are commercially available Polaroid 4x5 camera back for ProPalette 8000 PID 621080 4 x 5 sheet film holders Kodak Ektachrome 100 Plus Professional 4x5 Sheet Film EPP Dark room or changing bag equivalent Additional Skills In addition to training the service personnel with the skills to handle the additional film format the film processing facility must be able to handle the additional size Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All
243. gold and red printing on a glossy black background Image 2 and Spectra 2 models use the same cover assembly as the Image A with a black button SUB P A NO SPEC 94 14 SPECIAL DATE JANUARY 14 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM E DACEY SUBJECT RE LAUNCH OF SPECTRA IMAGE CAMERAS bezel and black insert on a black top cover All four Image and Spectra camera models for International Markets are black with of 4th quarter 1993 for the rest of Europe Small quantities of Image 2 and Image A models are currently selling in Denmark with a target A THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS AMERICAS MARKET The Spectra A will have new front and rear decorative plate graphics with the logo removed from the mid cover and the hot stamp removed from the erect button Graphics may be later added to the gear cover to indicate the film door latch The Spectra 2 model will be painted the same grey as current OneStep and ProCam models and will have new front and rear decorative plate graphics The gripper will be a grey molded plastic and the erect button will be black Spectra A and Spectra 2 camera models will be re launched in the Americas during the Ist quarter of 1994 REPAIR POLICY Any re launched Spectra or Image camera returned for repair must have unique piece parts covers panels or buttons etc replaced with similar parts Do not
244. ground SprintScan 35 mm scanners have been recently returned from the field with two discernible types of low level horizontal band problems Table 1 list the problem types causes and action that is needed to correct the problem Problem 1 This low level horizontal band problem was caused from SCSI termination power load variations The load on the scanner s 5 vdc power supply that was required to supply SCSI termination power during burst activity caused low frequency cross regulation on the power supply s 15 vdc line voltage This coupled into the output images through the CCD As seen on a PC the output images showed low level horizontal bands that tended to be fairly neutral in color and usually had a period of 64k bytes As seen ona MAC the output images showed low level horizontal bands that tended to be faint colored bands which at the highest resolution were grouped into RGB or CMY consecutive bands separated by 32 lines vertically Red to Green and Green to Blue or Cyan to Magenta and Magenta to Yellow Usually only one or two of the bands in a group were visible as a function of the image content color and details When first seen they were most often visible in negatives in areas of flat pastels such as blue sky THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS s Problem 2 This low level horizontal band problem was caused by unexpected CCD behavior when operated under common mod
245. gure 1 The Serial Number is located e On the outside of the shipping carton All Configurations e Back panel of the Scanner below its SCSI ports First generation to Configuration B e Bottom of Scanner Configuration C and all subsequent Configurations Background All SprintScan 35mm Scanner s that are returned from the field with any of the following problems must THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Identification The Serial Number identifies the SprintScan 35mm Scanner as follows Month A January Sequential Number B February B5 00634 B Year 4 1994 Hardware Configuration Level 5 1995 Rear Panel SCSI Connectors Location of Serial Number Serial Number for Configuration C located on bottom of scanner Figure 1 Serial Number Location FIRMWARE CPU UPGRADE REPLACEMENT Required Tools e Anti Static Mat and Wrist Strap e Phillips Screw Driver e Universal PLCC Chip Puller CPU Removal Replacement Caution The Main Controller PC Board is particularly sensitive to static discharges Be sure to use an anti static mat and wrist strap during this procedure 1 Turn off the SprintScan 35mm Scanner 2 Unplug the AC power cord and then remove it from the socket of the scanner HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING Failure to remove the power cord from the scanner could cause severe electrical shock 3 Remove the scanner cover as explained i
246. h the ProPalette Once the firmware is loaded into flash memory the ProPalette will reinitialize and run its startup diagnostics Only the firmware gets changed SCSI ID termination status frame counts etc are unaffected by the firmware upgrade Note If you are using LPT2 instead of LPT1 add the character 2 at the end of the DOS command by typing FWLOAD vtcentrl hex 2 lt cr gt Install the FSN EXE host side utility onto the PC This utility will add the letter F as the eighth character to the unit serial number Note Do not perform these following steps if the observed color is acceptable Execute FSN from the DOS prompt to modify the unit serial number by typing the command FSN interface parallel If you are using LPT2 instead of LPT1 modify the command to FSN interface parallel Ipt 2 There is no similar utility for a Macintosh computer Note Be sure that the color correction is required The only way to reverse this operation is to have the unit sent back to Service Perform a hard reset on the ProPalette The new firmware will interrogate the serial number and make the proper adjustments to the color From the LCD Keypad select Diagnostics Power on Message Confirm that on the initial display the firmware version is 708 dated May 2699 and that on the second display the serial number has been successfully modified by adding the character F in the eighth position Verification Re expose the GRAYCA
247. have identified that refrigeration of the processing pack is a contributing factor While work continues to identify the cause of these streaks manufacturing is recommending that customers not refrigerate the processing pack Refrigeration of the film cartridge is still encouraged and the tip sheet will be modified to reflect these changes along with a goldenrod insert in the film pack NOTE THIS CHANGE EFFECTS ONLY POLABLUE NOT ANY OTHER INSTANT 35mm FILMS When the customer goes to process an exposed film cartridge the code on the cartridge should match the code on the processing pack If you have any questions please contact Brendon Donovan at PTN 225 5206 or Harro Limbo at PTN 221 4424 Polaroid Corporation Customer Support Service 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 1406 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR E DACEY NOTICE 044124 REVIEW DATE APRIL 15 1995 SUBJECT EXPIRATION DATING PRODUCT T 600 HD SPECTRA IMAGE 95FILM PRODUCTS SENSITIVE MATERIAL LIMITED DISTRIBUTION LXI Internal Polaroid Pack LX U S Service Centers 4X5 International Film Mfg Large Format LX International Subsidiaries LX Integral 35mm All All Hybrid IV film products which currently include T 600 HD US T 600 Plus EUR Spectra US T 990 Image EUR Vision95 EUR JoyCam95 NPKK Captiva95 US as well as T 331 B amp W Autofilm
248. he SprintScan 35 Scanner was produced in one configuration with no suffix at the end of its serial number H400235 However continuous improvements to the scanner lead to design Configuration C At present there are now four SprintScan 35 Scanner configurations Their differences are shown in Table 1 Table 1 SprintScan 35 Scanner Configurations Configuration Serial Number Description Function No Suffix First H400235 N A N A generation A L400500A Filter Wheel Changes filter wheel neutral Changed density from 0 5 to 0 6 and ensures scanning uniformity with all color channels B M40033B Controller PC Reduces noise to prevent Board Modified vertical diagonal lines C C5001762C Adds slot cover Inhibits filter wheel from to chassis assembly over rotating and getting lost stuck or jammed Note The first Configuration C unit will be manufactured with the serial number C5001762C This configuration also includes the changes made to configurations A and B THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Configuration Identification Location The Serial Number Figure 1 is located e On the outside of the shipping carton All Configurations e Back panel of the Scanner below its SCSI ports First generation to Configuration B e Bottom of Scanner Configuration C and all subsequent Configurations Identification The Serial Number identifies the Spri
249. he cursor Drag the copy to the Color folder in the other open Explorer window This action will place a copy of the monitor profile with the name unchanged in the Color folder f Close both Explorer windows 3 Setting up Preferences in Photoshop Macintosh Windows 95 98 amp NT 4 A Choosing a Monitor Profile 1 Open Photoshop 2 Choose from the File menu Color Settings gt RGB Setup see illustration z RGB Setup RGB ColorMatch RGB gt Gamma Cancel White Point 5000 K D50 gt J Load Primaries P22 EBU gt Save Monitor Generic RGB Profile M Display Using Monitor Compensation 3 Make the following choices in the RGB Setup dialog box e Select the Colormatch RGB choice from the dropdown menu Note 1 80 Gamma White Point and Primaries will automatically fill in when ColorMatch RGB is chosen e Check the box Display Using Monitor Compensation 4 Click on the OK button and close the RGB Setup window Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N2 Page 3of6 B Profile Setup Macintosh Windows 95 98 amp NT 4 1 Choose from the File menu Color Settings Profile Setup see
250. he piece parts PARTS INVENTORY Examine your parts inventory to determine if the door latch buttons you have on hand are from molds A B C or D If they are discard them and reorder door latch buttons 770689G from Material Services in Bedford Massachusetts They will provide known good door latch buttons Please order from normal sources REPAIR If you receive a Spectra Image camera which was manufactured in the Vale of Leven between September 1993 and May 1995 and which has been returned because it will not close or because the button has come off remove the door latch button and check the mold identification If the button is marked A B C or D replace it with one marked mold 5 6 7 or 8 Door latch buttons with mold marks A B C or D on cameras made June 1995 or later are OK Good Door Latch Button Bad Door Latch Button EE SE NE Q NA Large hook on door latch button fully engages door latch Short hook on door latch button does not Door Latch THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP 600AM 94 43 SUB P A NO SPECIAL DATE February 7 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM ED DACEY SUBJECT NEW GOLD FLASH SHIELDS BACKGROUND Durin
251. hould not be present in vertical systems SOLUTION Removing the tape from the mirror carrier will solve the problem To gain access to the tape see the procedure and illustration on the reverse side Any disassembly necessary is described in Section 4 pages 4 40 to 4 45 of the ID 4 Service M anual THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS REMOVING TAPE FROM MIRROR CARRIER OF VERTICAL ID 4 SYSTEMS 1 Disassemble the camera to the point shown in Figure 1 see Section 4 of ID 4 Service Manual Remove the wire retainer as shown in Figure 1 If the top left corner of the mirror carrier See Figure 1 balloon is not visible and accessible move the mirror carrier up by manually rotating the gear train turn small gear nearest the motor with a fingertip Use a penlight and turn the camera at an angle to see the small piece of masking tape on the top left side of the mirror carrier Remove the tape with tweezers or similar tool being careful not to damage the surface of the mirror carrier MIRROR las CARRIER RETAINER mirror Figure 1 Tape Location on Vertical Format ID 4 Mirror Camier Customer Support Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 POLAROID CORPORATION GLOBAL TECHNICAL SERVICES PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO ID4 95 22 SPECIAL DATE SEPT 25 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERA
252. hts reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 10 29 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 981029132131JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Serial Number Error Check Category Performance The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a solution to a problem that ProPalette service technicians may experience With firmware version 564 704 or higher the ProPalette has the capability to store its serial number in flash memory There is a validity test an invalid serial number will generate the following error message OSWERR FPSRLNUM CPP 134 SERIAL NR CRT MODEL CONFLICT Product Affected ProPalette 7000 and ProPalette 8000 Details The unit firmware and alignment station software use this embedded serial number to set internal parameters for the proper adjustment of the equipment That software error is there to catch invalid information in the eighth character of the serial number and it doesn t respond graciously to Pre Production PPC or Manufacturing Pilot MP units It monitors the eighth position of the serial number for a valid character The model type is specified by the character in the first position of the serial number ProPalette 70008 must have a blank eighth character in the serial number ProPalette 80008 can only have a blank
253. hy download times a Go to the Printers folder and delete the ColorShot USB entry b Go to Add Remove Programs in the Control Panels folder and delete the entry Polaroid IQA for PhotoPrinter c Re boot the PC d Install the new version 1 1 software Continued on next page Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot General Bulletin V1 N1 Page 1 of 2 3 Notes on the new test images included with USB software version 1 1 After the new software is installed the Samples folder placed on the user s C drive now contains new sample images These images are intended for use by the customer to help test the operation of the printer The images look best when printed with IQA turned on a Fish is an image that should be printed in Landscape mode b Flowers is an image that should be printed in Portrait mode Contact Gerald DiBello e mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above
254. ice Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 Date 01 12 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990112141 226JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Analog Board Change Category The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a phase in change to the Analog circuit board for the ProPalette 7000 Units using this board or its re worked equivalent will be defined as a K revision Details An Engineering Change Notice 1S11776 has been released that documents a change to the Analog circuit board for the ProPalette 7000 The complete matrix of change is defined in the following documents Part Number Description Old Rev New Rev Date 1AE543A Analog PCB Schematic 05 06 12 01 98 1AE544A Analog PCB Fabrication 03 04 12 01 98 1AE545A Analog PCB Assembly 05 06 12 01 98 The change reflects the addition of capacitor C801 22 F 35V and two diodes D801 and D802 1N4004 These components are configured to add additional protection against CRT burns Deviation Notice 18554 details the necessary modifications to rework a 1AE545A Is05 board to the Is06 level APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 01 18 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990118092644JF Product Group PDI
255. ich the T 339 Film is balanced Depending on the total exposure time the MicroCam logic varies the length of time the 80C Filter is used during the exposure When the exposure is less than one second the Filter is in place for the entire time and no double image problem should occur If the exposure is longer than nine seconds the 80C Filter is not used at all thus no double image problem here as well But for exposure times in the one to nine second range the double image problem occurs peaking when the Filter is used for 50 of the total exposure time occurring in the four to six second range There is no problem of course when T 331 or T 337 settings are used Cont d THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS A hHYCCSC NNNCt C aSSNNNNCOCt t tid ACTION TAKEN All MicroCam inventories worldwide have been placed on hold Corporate Hold Document issued on 10 26 94 by S McGrogan A procedure has been provided to the subsidiaries for screening these units All defective units are to be returned to the Vale of Leven Manufacturing group attention of Steve McGrogan If a customer s unit is found to have this defect the Shutter Base Assembly part number 1D3430A must be replaced If you are on Lotus Notes refer to Work Order HE940919100829 for a history of this problem QUESTIONS If you have any questions regarding this problem please contact one of the following
256. ide opti mal focus at 3 5 feet 1 1m rather than the normal 5 3 feet 1 6m The BadgeCam s exposure values have been specially optimized for over lays made on the Kodak ColorEase T M Printer Polaroid cannot as sure equal print quality if other manufacturers acetate overlays or printers are used Fig 1A Location of acetate overlay Fig 1B Location of acetate in in BadgeCam Mainframe Acetate is film pack Wear white gloves held in place with double sided tape when handling acetate overlays Fig 2A In camera acetates for Fig 2B Film Pack acetates for left center amp right portraits left center amp right portraits BadgeCam Introduction cont d 3 tia Fig 3 Unique TMC Taking Mirror Carrier framing ovals help position and correctly size subject s head at left center or right BADGECAM UNIQUE PARTS The BadgeCam Shutter Assembly differs from the standard Captiva Shut ter Assembly in the following ways Sol 2 Far Focus Lens Latch Return Spring Latch Actuator Lens Latch and one screw are not present Special Lens Assembly provides optimal focus at 3 5 feet 1 1m Shutter Decorative Plate and Top Cover are imprinted BadgeCam or BadgeCam Date Special Taking Mirror Carrier TMC Assembly incorporates three oval shaped subject framing guides
257. idiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base o EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 04 07 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980407132152JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware ProPalette Revision History Details Diagrams The following tables describe the revision history for the ProPalette family The revision letter designator is the last character of the unit serial number This character should be updated to reflect any change made to the unit Configuration of ProPalette 7000 Lette Description A Original B Firmware corrected for proper spacing of picture frames on new camera backs Jul 1 198 C Firmware re corrected for proper spacing of picture frames on new camera backs Aug 28 1997 D Convert analog board from issue 01 to issue 02 resistor change for sizing failures 8 1 E 4 diodes added to U18 inputs to protect U18 from yoke capactive discharge U35 negative supply disconnected from 15b connected to 15va Nov 13 1997 Configuration of ProPalette 8000 Description A Original B Jumper on analog board C White line capacitor D Time out capacitor dig
258. ification of 1 4 examine the entire image for vertical grey bands while viewing e R G B e Rcolor plane only e Gcolor plane only e B color plane only THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS 3 Repeat step 2 at a magnification of 1 1 scrolling horizontally across the entire image Note If vertical grey bands are visible in steps 2 and 3 the CCD filter is faulty Replace the CCD PC Board 4 Ifthe CCD PC Board is replaced repeat this procedure to verify that the CCD filter is OK A lll lp POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO MCAM 94 2 APRIL 8 1994 SPECIAL DATE TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM H LIMBO SUBJECT INTERMITTENT FAILURES OF MICROCAM REMOTE BUTTON The Vale of Leven manufacturing facility has identified an intermittent failure problem with the Remote Button Assembly 1D3405A of some MicroCam microscope cameras These failures have been limited to MicroCams with serial numbers between B4445C and C4050C Manufacturing estimates that approx imately 3 of MicroCams with serial numbers falling in the noted range may have this problem The suspect MicroCams are identified as follows PID LOT QTY CUSTOMER 618089 008 42 Japan 618089 009 64 Enschede
259. ill not be able to restore the Control code using the Upgrade Firmware option This procedure will circumvent this problem Product Affected ProPalette 7000 and ProPalette 8000 Prerequisite Watchdog Timer Jumper JP501 controls the Watchdog timer that prevents power on initialization errors JP501 should be set according to the following table Normal usage is to enable the circuit Pin 2 Pin 2 3 Disabled Enabled Monitor Mode To activate Monitor Mode from the digital board the state of two startup switches J3 6 and J3 8 on the digital board must be set If both of those points are tied to ground the unit will power up in the Monitor mode All of the pins along the bottom of J3 are at ground potential The LCD panel does not work when you enter monitor mode in this manner and there is no indication that you have been successful Remove the jumpers and restart the system to return to normal mode Procedure 1 Connect ProPalette to the Alignment station in the normal fashion 2 Disable watchdog timer see above 3 Enable Monitor mode see above 4 Turn on ProPalette 5 Setup the Alignment station for the correct product 6 Use the F1 option to upgrade the firmware 7 Shut down the ProPalette 8 Enable watchdog timer see above 9 Disable Monitor mode see above 10 Turn on the ProPalette and verify that it initializes properly 11 Continue with the Alignment station pocedures
260. im Ea Type CCD Info pe ete 1foo 3 foo 2foo 10 foo 3foo 11 foo 4foo 12 foo 5 foo 13 foo 6 foo 14 foo 7 oo 15 foo Ba w Dump Data Array Figure 4 Debug menu 4 Select Rd Wr Datatype from the choices listed in the Debug Menu 5 When the Datatype window appears choose CCD Info from the pop up menu at the top of the window The number appearing in the first column at the top left is the CCD type Note In the example shown in Figure 4 the CCD reads out as a 1 indicating that this particular slide scanner is configured for the modified CCD Change the Configuration from 1 to 0 or 0 to 1 by dragging the beam cursor through the number that appears and then type in the corrected number After filling in the Configuration number touch the Wr Write button with the mouse pointer to send the new Configuration information to the slide scanner EEPROM Confirm the new Configuration by touching the Rd Read button with the mouse pointer Finally to correctly view the change in a scanned image exit the SprintScan application and then restart the SprintScan Direct program or Acquire Import the slide scanner in PhotoShop Note A second method is to select any new film type and then re select the film type desired Either method re initializes the slide scanner so you can correctly scan with the changed CCD Configuration setting For Mac Computers Reading CCD Configuration Code 1 Start u
261. in The purpose of this message is to alert Telephone Service and Repair providers regarding the solution to a problem of a missing USB Root Hub when operating under Win 95 e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot USB printer e Details The Customer tries to install the ColorShot USB printer and it is not recognized A look in the device manager shows that that USB icon is present but only the following text appears when the USB icon is expanded click on sign next to USB gray diamond icon Intel 82371AB PCI to USB Universal Host Controller See image below showing the problem No Root Hub listing is an indication that the PC has an Intel 440LX or 430TX Chipset on it s motherboard that it s not recognized by the USB supplement software System Properties 2 x General Device Manager Hardware Profiles Performance View devices by type View devices by connection CDROM H E Disk drives ca a Display adapters H 6 Floppy disk controllers H 6 Hard disk controllers Ei Be Keyboard al S Monitor H A Mouse Network adapters H Ports COM amp LPT HL SCSI controllers ystem devices E USB lt Intel 62371AB PCI to USB Universal Host Controller Properties Refresh Remove Print Cen Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding th
262. indows 98 re boots open the Device Manager Check to see if the Scanner is now listed as an Imaging Device If it s still shown as a Polaroid scanner go to step 4 Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N10 Page 2 of 2 Step 4 Is scanner registered as Adaptec generic scanner 1 Open the Registry editor and check if an Adaptec scanner driver is the cause of the problem 2 Look in the following path Note this example applies to a SprintScan 35ES or Plus C HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Enum SCSI POLAROID35MM 5 ROOT amp SCSIADAPTER amp 0000X0 Click on the folder ROOT amp SCSIADAPTER to view it s contents in the right hand pane of the Registry window If the class type is ADPT Scanner Note In most cases a feature of EZ SCSI is the reason the SprintScan is not recognized as an Imaging Device One of the features of EZ SCSI is a generic scanner device driver This driver provides a simple control for a generic scanner It s this driver that blocks the SprintScan from being recognized as an Imaging Device Uninstall Adaptec EZ SCSI or EZ SCSI lite Check and be sure if the user has his or her original disks before uninstalling Open the Device Manage
263. ine update The update is needed if printing from the web does not work The new Engine is available from Microsoft via the World Wide Web Instructions on how to get and install the update are included in the Release Notes a copy is on the last page of this Bulletin new features continued on next page Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid Photo Printer Parallel Bulletin V2 N2 Page 1 of 3 e English only Web Printer Plug in On line Help You can learn how to use the web printer plug in by going to the following web URL www polaroid com products digitalphotoprinter plugins index html 2 How to get the Software e CD ROM Order Parallel Photo Printer v1 2 Software PID No is 629403 e Web plug in www Polaroid com go to ColorShot page 3 Installing new Version 1 2 software if an older version exists on the user s PC Note Uninstalling old software is not mentioned in the Readme or Release notes a Go to the Printers folder and delete the ColorShot Parallel or Photo Printer Parallel b Go to Add Remove Programs in the Control Panels folder and delete the entry Polaroid IQA for PhotoPrinter c If the user had a older version of the web browser plug in go to Add Remove Programs a
264. ing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N6 Page 4 of 7 d Select Rd Wr Datatype from the choices in the Debug Menu When the Datatype window appears choose CCD Info from the pop up menu at the top of the window The number appearing in the first column at the top left is the CCD type In the example shown on Figure 4 the CCD reads out as a 1 indicating that this scanner contains the modified Config 1 CCD e Change the configuration from 1 to 0 or 0 to 1 by dragging the beam cursor through the number that appears and then type in the correct number f After filling in the new Config number touch the Wr Write button with the mouse pointer to send the new configuration to the scanner EEPROM g Confirm the new configuration by touching the Rd Read button with the mouse pointer h Finally to correctly view the change in a scanned image you must Exit the Sprintscan application and re start the Sprintscan Direct program or Acquire Import the scanner in Photoshop A second method is to select any new Film Type and then re select the Film Type you want to use Either method re initializes the scanner so you can correctly scan with the changed CCD Configuration setting 2 Macintosh Computers Reading the CCD Configuration Code using the Application Software Start up the Photoshop on your computer an
265. ing in the configuration for the CCD that s in the scanner 1 or 0 c After filling in the new Config number touch the Program the Scanner button with the mouse pointer or press the Return key This action sends the new configuration to the scanner EEPROM To confirm the new configuration select About Sprintscan 35 under the Apple menu and read the new configuration number d Finally to correctly view the change in a scanned image you must Exit the Sprintscan application and Acquire Import the scanner in Photoshop A second method is to select any new Film Type and then re select the Film Type you want to use Either method re initializes the scanner so you can correctly scan with the changed CCD Configuration setting PARTS AVAILABILITY Contact Polaroid Corporation Material Services 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Telephone 800 343 4846 or 781 386 5649 Fax 781 386 5606 cc mail Parts Department Polaroid com Please order from normal sources Contact Gerald DiBello Ce mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N6 Page 6 of 7 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN cra
266. ink spring posts on the Vision JoyCam Captiva main frame See Figure 1 When the post breaks the camera is rendered inoperative requiring a repair that consists of replacing the main frame A repair part has been developed which allows the main frame to be repaired rather than replaced Recock Link Recock Link Recock Latch Recock Link Spring Post Figure 1 Affected Area of Main Frame THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS lt N Repair Procedure NOTE If the post on the main frame has broken there is a liklihood that the recock link spring has fallen into another part of the camera and caused more extensive damage Examine the camera carefully and if additional damage is found make an analysis to determine if the following procedure should be done or if the entire camera should be replaced 1 Remove the main frame from the camera and disassemble it to the point where the area of the broken post is accessible 2 If necessary file down the post area so the surface on the main frame is smooth 3 As shown in Figure 2 orient the repair recock link spring hook 1A2678A over the wall of the main frame and insert it so the flat bottom portion rests in the main frame cavity and the upper hook portion is latched onto the wall Figure 3 shows a correctly inserted repair recock link spring hook 4 Reassemble the camera and cycle it a few times to verify proper opera
267. ion Spring Roll Pin Brightener Solenoid Assembly Screw 256 Panhead Lens Mounting Plate C Element Mount Pin Dowel 093 Diameter Shutter Blade Bottom Shutter Top Blade PARTS AVAILABILITY Material services in Cambridge will continue to stock old electronics boards and shutters as well as the new parts The following chart shows part number for both old and new PART NAME OLD NEW LOGIC BOARD 794238A 1B2995A MIRROR MOTOR BOARD 798234A 1D3318A RANGING BOARD 798059A 1D3316A DISPLAY BOARD 797052A 1D3253A B C SHUTTER ASSEMBLY 271028 ID1033A X A Horizontal Format B Vertical Camera Head C Fixed Back side pull Ploease order from normal sources yl POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP ID 4 94 18 SUB P A NO SPECIAL pate AUGUST 12 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS LIST FROM DICK CURTIS SUBJECT DEFECTIVE CAPACITORS ON ID4 DATA BOARDS BACKGROUND ID 4 camera heads manufactured in late 1992 and most of 1993 are having a higher than expected return rate because of failed Data PC Boards 1A6338A Analysis of the failed boards has isolated the problem to capacitors C3 and C5 on the data board These capacitors yellow in color were manufactured by Hua Jung Co LTD Failure of C3 causes the upper data tube to not fire while fail
268. is applied to the yoke for the same purpose Further testing will reveal whether the hot melt glue continues to be necessary NOTE Due to the difficulty of installation the small number of reports and the re alignment required after installation Service is not recommending this ECN for units that are in the field If a ProPalette 8000 is returned for service it will be evaluated against the rotation specification If the yoke has moved since manufacture the abrasive collar ECN will be added to the serviced unit BF imgtilt PDF imgtilt doc Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product HR 6000 CFR ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 08 19 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980819160722JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Maintenance Cleaning CRT Faceplate Details Diagrams Category The purpose of this bulletin is to alert service providers with alternate methods of cleaning the face of a CRT Products Affected HR6000 ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Details Our CRT manufacturers have been con
269. is document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Bulletin V1 N5 Page 1 of 2 e Resolution The Intel 82371AB PCI to USB Universal Host Controller is part of the Intel 430TX or 440LX chipset found on many PC motherboards In Microsoft Windows 95 special device information INF files are used to specify and define the characteristics of various controller and device classes of the operating system These INF files can be found in the WINDOWS INF directory However the PCI Device ID s for the functions embedded in the 440TX or 440LX chipset are not listed in the current version of Windows 95 OEM Service Release 2 that contains the USB supplement For this reason after installation of Windows 95 in Intel 430TX and 440LX the USB Root hub will not be present in the Device Manager Instruct the customer to download and install a patch that s available from Intel on the World Wide Web The patch makes changes to the MACHINE INF MSHDC INF NODRIVER INF and USB INF files For customers without web access there other ways to get the patch file 1 Check CD ROM installation disks that came with their PC In some cases this file is called PIIXFIX exe 2 Contact the manufacturer of the PC 3 Download the file so that it can be sent to the customer The patch file named Intel R 82371xB INF Update Installer Version 3 2 2 is available as of the date of this bulletin on the web at
270. is in the System Folder Earlier Mac Systems The ColorSync folder is in the Preferences Folder Scroll through the Preferences folder until you find the ColorSync folder and double click to open it so it is open on top of the previously opened System Folder d Again scroll through the Preferences folder contents and find the folder named Polaroid IQA Profiles Look in the folder and scroll through its contents and find the profile named Monitor PC generic 1 8 gam icc e Place the cursor over the profile and while holding down the Option key notice that a sign appears to the right of the cursor drag a copy of the file into the ColorSync folder This action will place a copy of the monitor profile with the name unchanged in the ColorSync folder f Close all open windows Windows 95 98 a Open an Explorer window on the Desktop b Use the Explorer to open the Polaroid Profiles folder in the following path C Program Files Common Files Polaroid Imaging Profiles c Open the Profiles folder so its contents appear in the right hand side of the window Scroll down to find the profile named Monitor PC generic 1 8 gam icc d Open a second Explorer window on the Desktop so that both windows are visible and they do not overlap each other Find the Color Folder in the following path C Windows System Color Open the Color folder so its contents appear in the right hand pane of the open window e Point to the icon for
271. is stored in DRAM and survives until a new error occurs or the unit is reset If there have not been any errors since the unit was last turned on the LCD will say Unit just powered on Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission v4 Product Alert Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base o PA Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 08 26 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970826112926JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Received on Film COLOR FRINGING Details Diagrams Situation A small group of ProPalette 8000 s were delivered to Distribution that might exhibit color fringing along the right side of the image It will become apparent when non standard image resolutions are processed This problem is a result of test firmware that was not upgraded in the unit prior to shipment The firmware is identified as version 562 dated April 25 1997 The firmware date can be determined by selecting DIAGNOSTICS SHOW POWER ON MESSAGE from the ProPalette keypad Solution The released firmware version 562 dated May 23 1997 does not exhibit this problem All ProPalette 8000 Digital
272. ital Board J3 header Contact Jordan Freedman E mail Freedman Jordan Internet freedmjl polaroid com EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 Date 10 20 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 981020134924JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Firmware 705 Upgrade Category Performance The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a solution to a problem that ProPalette 7000 customers may experience when upgrading from firmware version 704 to version 705 Product Affected ProPalette 7000 Details Connect a ProPalette 7000 to a Mac daisy chained first second or third device does not matter Turn the ProPalette 7000 ON and then reboot the MAC Use Cfrupdate to download version 705 VTCNTRL HEX over version 704 dated 8 21 Cfrupdate host displays Unknown Error and the status of ProPalette 7000 LED is memory error 591 Resolution Connect a ProPalette 7000 to a Mac daisy chained first second or third device does not matter Turn the ProPalette 7000 ON and then reboot the MAC After the MAC has been rebooted reset the ProPalette 7000 by pressing the reset button in back of the ProPalette 7000 film recorder Use Cfrupdate to download version 70 TCNTRL HEX control code The user should receive no problems Contact Jordan Freedman E mail Freedman Jordan Internet freedmj1 polaroid com APPROVALS 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rig
273. ital board E Surface mount capacitor on autoluma board F Daughter board CRT burn prevention G Diode on analog board prevent positive voltage from going to negative side of capac H Watchdog on digital board J Version 562 K Firmware corrected for proper spacing of picture frames on new camera backs Jul 1997 L Firmware re corrected for proper spacing of picture frames on new camera backs Al 1997 M 4 diodes added to U18 inputs to protect U18 from yoke capactive discharge U35 Negative supply disconnected from 15b connected to 15va Nov 13 1997 These latest configurations are supported by the following circuit boards rev Analog Digital ProPalette 7000 E 1AE545A Is 2 1F5570A Is 1 ProPalette 8000 M 1AH823A Is 1 1F5570A Is 1 Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission Technical Brief Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 TNote Document Details Product PDI ProPalette 8000 Product Type FimRec Related to Public Private Public Image size on film Details Problem Reported Solution Date Document Posted By Sent To 06 17 98 Knowledge BASE 9806170
274. its power supply and inverter PC boards To rectify this problem it is recommended that a metal protective shield PN 1E1159A be installed above its power supply and inverter PC boards Metal Protective Shield Installation Figure 1 CAUTION The PC boards inside the scanner are particularly sensitive to static discharge Be sure to use an anti static mat and wrist strap during this installation procedure Remove the top housing as explained in Section 4 of the SprintScan 35 Slide Scanner Service Manual 2 Disconnect the following electrical cables from the controller PC board THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS J1 Transport Stepper Motor J3 CCD PC Board J4 Filter Wheel Stepper Motor J5 J6 Power Supply 3 Remove the four 4 screws that secures the controller PC board to the chassis mount assembly and to its bottom case supports 4 Gently lift off the controller PC board so that you can easily access the three 3 screws that secures the chassis mount assembly to its bottom case supports 5 Remove the three 3 screws that secures the chassis mount assembly to its bottom case supports 6 Gently lift off the chassis mount assembly being careful not to damage the CCD PC board 7 Install the metal protective shield as follows e Remove the four 4 screws that secures the power supply PC board to the bottom case e Place the metal protective shield over the power
275. kslide S1 Ok 1 Viewfinder shadows 2 No S1 cycle 3 No darkslide 4 Midcycle failure on darkslide 5 Counter won t Index 6 Dirt in Viewfinder Ti TMC won t lay flat 8 Green light always on 9 Black bar 10 Camera cycles with door open A THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS 1 CHECK FOR MISSING FILM SHADE 2 CHECK DOOR STOP LINK N S TO DOOR STOP 3 CHECK THREE WIRE SWITCH FOR DISTORTED LOWER WIRE SLIGHT BEND NO S1 CYCLE 1 CHECK ERECT SENSOR BIAS SENSOR OVER WITH STICK 2 CHECK FOR BENT WIRE UNDER FLEX PLUG S1B TRIM FILM SPEED S1B S1 A EOP S1 B DKEC FULL C L NO DARK SLIDE BATTERY CONTACTS N S PLATEN N S FLEX PLUG N S 3 WIRE SWITCH N S TO FLEX STREETS DOOR LATCH SENSOR STICKY POWER ACTUATOR SPRING MISSING SPRING MISSING POOR CONNECTIONTO SHUTTER FLEX CSIDARWNE MIDCYCLE FAILURE ON DARK SLIDE 1 PRIMARY PICK DOES NOT RETURN FULLY IN MAIN FRAME SLOT 2 DOOR LATCH SENSOR STICKY TRIP LATCH AND CHECK FOR DOOR LATCH SENSOR MOVEMENT 3 FULL CHAMBER LINK SEATED UNDER OVERIDE SLIDER 4 FULL CHAMBER LINK WIRE N S 5 BROKEN POWER ACTUATOR 6 BATTERY CONTACTS N S 7 VER TO B 8 DKEC SWITCH 9 DOOR LATCH SENSOR HITS FLEX NOT GLUED TO M F 10 FLEX STREETS MISREGISTERED COUNTER WON T INDEX 1 CHECK FOR BENT COUNTER DETENT DIRT IN VIEWFINDER 1 LOOK THROUGH EYE LENS C C MIRROR DIRT DIRT MOVES AS VMC MOVES FROM ERECT TO CLOS
276. l Service Bulletin The purpose of this message is to alert telephone support and service providers regarding issues with ColorShot Software and the Windows 98 Operating System e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot USB printer e Details Two subjects are covered in this bulletin 1 ColorShot software version 1 03 This is the first release that is designed to be fully compatible with Windows 98 2 Correct ColorShot software installation when a Windows 95 PC is upgraded to Windows 98 e Resolution 1 Version 1 03 software is designed to be fully compatible with Windows 98 Version 1 02 can be used but it may have anomalies 2 Before upgrading a PC from Window 95 to Windows 98 the ColorShot software should be removed Use the normal de install procedure to do this A review of the procedure is as follows a Remove the USB cable from the back of the printer b Use Add Remove Programs to remove Polaroid IQA for ColorShot c Delete the Polaroid ColorShot from the Printers folder After the Windows 98 upgrade is complete re install the ColorShot software Note that installation of the ColorShot software on a Windows 98 PC is a slightly different procedure than the one outlined in the existing QuickStart Guide Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be cor
277. l be available as follows Parts Catalog in service manual After October 95 Parts Availability After October 95 Service Manual After October 95 TRAINING Service Centers will be provided with a Service Manual Formal training will not be necessary POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT EXP SUB P A NO ID4 94 16 SPECIAL DATE APRIL14 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM DICK CURTIS SUBJECT LIGHT LEAK IN ID4 2 UP HORIZONTAL CAMERAS Some 2 UP horizontal format ID4 cameras manufactured during 1992 and early 1993 have been returned by customers with a complaint of overexposed subject areas These complaints have been limited to the bottom card the second exposure of the 2 UP format Manufacturing has traced the cause of this problem to misformed light seals behind the camera back and the backplate If the seals 1A3902B and 1A3903B are misformed they allow ambient light to penetrate to the subject area of the bottom card If you receive an ID4 camera with a light leak problem as described above change the light seals and then check it as follows Load a pack of black amp white film into the camera and secure the door Using a light source such as a flashlight shine a light down onto the top of the camera back for a short length of time about
278. l quantities of the new Bellows Cone Assembly as well as the Date Module Assembly 1B6725A the Door Latch Erect Assembly 1B6649A and the ProCam Door Erect Actuator Gage are now available from Material Services in Cambridge Massachusetts A T ep POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO PROCAM 94 4 SPECIAL DATE MAY 31 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM FRANK BLESZINSK SUBJECT PROCAM DATE PRINT BACKGROUND MASK PROBLEM When scene brightness causes the top left corner of a ProCam picture E ee A are PD 4 b l IN B S to be very light the numbers of the date print can be difficult or impossible to read This can happen in outdoor pictures for example in which bright sky or bright objects occupy the date print area of the picture SOLUTION A Date Module Mask P N 1B6748 has been developed which creates a black rectangular background area 1 5 x 0 5 cm behind the white date numerals in the upper left corner of the print see Fig 1 This new Mask produces the black back ground in every picture even if the Date Display is turned OFF A Mask Installation Tool P N B13605 has also been developed for installing the Mask Fig 1 Bl
279. l rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 09 02 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980902140350JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Host Side DOS Utility SN EXE Details Diagrams Category The purpose of this bulletin is to inform service providers about the new serial number feature that is part of firmware versions 564 and 704 Product Affected ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Details This document explains the usage of the host side DOS utility SN EXE to read or write a serial number into the ProPalette The unit serial number can be used by the firmware to modify its functionality based upon the hardware configuration that is imbedded in the syntax of the serial number During initialization of the ProPalette the LCD display reports the unit s serial number and revision numbers of the three main circuit boards that are installed Syntax The most common usage of the utility will be to either read or write a serial number string The command syntax to read the serial number is sn lt cr gt An example on the output report is shown in the following section The command syntax to write the serial number is sn burn string lt cr gt where string is the unit serial number To display the complete hel
280. laColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N5 Page 3 of 3 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croa 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot Printer General Vol 1 No 1 From New Products Service Support Group Date February 16 1999 Subject Software Update e Category Software Info Bulletin The purpose of this message is to notify Telephone Service and Repair providers of ColorShot printer software updates now available to customers via the world wide web e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot Parallel printer PhotoMAX Photo Printer amp ColorShot USB printer e Details 1 Summary of new software available at www colorshot com e New Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator plug in Beta version A printer plug in is now available for Internet Explorer version 4 and Netscape Navigator version 4 or later The plug in allows a user to choose and print many types of images found on the world wide web directly to ColorShot or PhotoMAX printers e Update USB version 1 1 software released Summary of changes Automatic image sharpening when IQA is turned on New color profiles New sample images IQA upgraded to version 1 94 for improved color performance Software now refers to the printer as Polaroid Digital Photo Printer USB 2 How to install the new USB version 1 1 software for Windows 95 or 98 NOTE The new software is a large file Telephone modem users should expect lengt
281. lems Corrected by Changes Change Problems Corrected Firmware Updated from e Prevents horizontal white lines from appearing version 1 4 to 1 6 in final scan when Agfa XRG 100 negative film Note Firmware 1 5 produced but type is selected and user scans at less than never shipped with any full resolution 1950dpi SS35 LE Slide Scanners Prevents vertical white lines at times from appearing in the upper right hand corner of the scanned image Power Supply Changed Vendor TDK to Kentex THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Serial Number Identification and location Identification The slide scanner serial number begins at K7 XXXXX D X is a number from 0 to 9 D indicates firmware revision 1 6 installed Month 7 July Sequential Number wa xxxxx D Year 7 1997 Hardware Configuration Level D indicates firmware 1 6 installed Location Figure 2 The Serial Number is located e On the outside of the shipping carton Bottom of the slide scanner Serial no on bottom of the slide scanner SERIAL NO NO DE SERIE S N K701490D Figure 2 Serial number location Alignment Procedure Note The following procedure should only be performed by Polaroid authorized service centers that have been trained on this product 1 Turn the slide scanner power off and then remove the power cord 2 Remove the lamp 3 Remove the slide scanner top cover 4 Loosen th
282. lide scanner has the modified CCD Board installed but its EEPROM data has been corrupted and it reverted back to the old CCD Configuration code of 0 Slide Scanner Identification with Modified CCD Serial Number Location The slide scanner serial number Figure 1 is located in two places e On the outside of the original shipping carton All Configurations Bottom of the slide scanner Configuration C and all subsequent Configurations Month F July Sequential Number 7 F7 xxxxx C i Year 6 1996 Hardware Configuration Level 7 1997 Figure 1 Serial number Changes to Serial Number with Modified CCD The configuration letter in the serial number is changed to identify slide scanner s manufactured with the modified blue filter CCD SprintScan 35 Plus Serial number are assigned a hardware configuration level of C to identify the CCD change Slide scanner s with the modified blue filter CCD will start with serial number F7xxxxxC Modified CCD Board Identification by Markings Modified CCD Boards can be visually identified as follows e Part Number 1AJ012A e Blue stripe on end of CCD Board cable connector J1 Note Blue stripe is visible after removing the top cover of the slide scanner and looking on the left end of the CCD Board as viewed from the front of the slide scanner Modified CCD Board Service Issues There are service issues that may occur in conjunction with the introduction of the modified
283. ling the firmware the new firmware hex code and a READ ME TXT file with instructions and details about this version of the firmware ftp ftp polaroid com pub imaging output cfrecord A IIM odds Pro8000 or Pro7000 NOTE Contained inside the archives is a file named READ ME TXT This file contains instructions for installing the new firmware Please follow these instructions carefully For best performance with the Apple Power Macintosh G 3 all ProPalette film recorders should have their firmware upgraded to these new versions at this time APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 02 08 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 9902081 11248JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Mac G3 SCSI Software Issues Situation Apple Computer Inc has recently introduced a new line of computers called the Power Macintosh G3 For connectivity the new G3s include FireWire and Universal Serial Bus USB ports only SCSI has been excluded The absence of SCSI presents a problem for connecting Palette film recorders which utilize SCSI to Macintosh computers Apple will soon provide a SCSI adapter card for connecting SCSI devices like the Palette to the Power Macintosh G3 This is similar to the way that SC
284. lity Note the sharpening feature is only active when IQA is on e Lpt vxd version 4 00 953 driver file included on CD ROM This will be a help to the user who does not have web access or any other way to get this updated driver e New test images Test images have changed since version 1 0 2 Installing the New Version 1 1 Software a Goto the Printers folder and delete the ColorShot Parallel b Go to Add Remove Programs in the Control Panels folder and delete the entry Polaroid IQA for PhotoPrinter c If you are installing the printer on a Compaq Deskpro PC Note this does not apply to Deskpro model EN you may need to install a new version of the file Lpt vxd See 3 Installing a new Lpt vxd file d Re boot the PC e Install the new version 1 1 software Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Parallel Bulletin V1 N3 Page 1 of 2 3 Installing a New Lpt vxd file If the customer is experiencing slow printing takes 5 minutes or more to print a picture or have a Compaq Deskpro PC they may have an old version of the Lpt vxd driver on their PC a To check what version is currently installed you can find the Lpt vxd file in the following path C Windows S
285. ll T 2000 Film PID 613917 which is T 669 type film balanced for use with Polaroid Electronic ID Systems ID2000 ID3000 ID4000 is no longer being manufactured It has been replaced by EID UV Film PID 618560 which incorporates an ultraviolet sensitive coating as an additional safety feature EID UV is actually PC ID UV Film which is balanced for the Polaroid Electronic ID Systems The following positive sheet line code suffixes identify the films referred to in this notice Product Suffix T 2000 Film F EID UV Film 48 PC ID UV Film 46 If you have any questions concerning this notice please call Sallyann Hawko at PTN 226 1295 or Harro Limbo at PTN 221 4424 Polaroid Corporation Consumer Services 784 Memorial Drive Cambridge MA 02139 4639 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR H LIMBO NOTICE 104128 REVIEW DATE 10 20 94 SUBJECT Introduction of T 51HC Positive Negative PRODUCT T 51HC Black amp White Sheet Film SENSITIVE MATERIAL LIMITED DISTRIBUTION x Internal Polaroid Pack X U S Service Centers x 4X5 International Film Mfg Large Format X International Subsidiaries Integral 35mm All BACKGROUND We have been notifying customers who use T 51 film that Polaroid would no longer manufacture this product after August 1994 This action was necessary because the vendor who provided
286. loded view The purpose of the foam cushion is to exert pressure against the retainer plate thus allowing the exposure solenoid plunger roll pin to have free movement as it is extended and retracted It has been discovered that these single piece cushions are compressing over time and as a result the solenoid plung er is hanging up keeping the shutter blades open Since November 1994 the shutters used in ID4 cameras use a two piece cushion under the retainer plate The two piece foam cushion is not as susceptible to compression as the single piece cushion The new two piece cushion carries part number 1D1020A CORRECTIVE ACTION If you receive a camera which was manufactured between July and November of 1994 examine the shutter If there is a single piece foam cushion under the retainer plate replace it with a new two piece cushion 1D1020A Even if the shutter has the new two piece cushion examine both pieces to be sure they have not compressed If they have replace them with new cushions THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS IE8400A SHUTTER ASSEMBLY 1 KEY PART e NO NUMBER PART NAME GN 3 1 2713010 LensF45114mm x 2 2721190 Spring Detent 3 1D1035A Aperture Ring ae to 4 1B2215A Detent Disc n5 5 1 B7549D Screw 256 Flathead 33 6 1B2213A AB Mount 7 1B2217A Interceptor 8 1A6786A Extension Spring 9 1B2210A Spacer 1 10 1B2208B Walking beam 11 743333B Screw Plasffte 12 1
287. lug n Play Aic 78xx mpd 3940 3940W ver 2 3 3940U 3940UW 3940AU 39040AUW Adaptec AVA Plug n Play Aic 78xx mpd 2902 ver 2 3 Advansys 922 amp Plug n Play Asc mpd 3922 ver 2 9D Adaptec AVA ISA NOT Sparrow mpd 1505 1502AE Ver 2 05 Table 1 SCSI Host Adapter Information Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N3 Page 5 of 7 Installing an Adaptec 1505 or 1502AE ISA type Host Adapter In a WIN 95 or 98 PC non plug and play Note In most cases you will need the original Windows 95 or 98 Installation CD ROM for this procedure Step 1 Open the Control Panel Start menu Settings Control Panel Step 2 Select Double click Add New Hardware Icon Step 3 The Add New Hardware Wizard now asks Do you want to search for new hardware Select No and click on the Next button Step 4 Next you are asked to select the Type of Hardware Select SCSI controllers It s near the bottom of the scrolling list Click on the Next button Step 5 Select from the Adaptec list the host adapter you are installing Depending on the board you have select Adaptec AVA 1505 SCSI Host Adapter or Adaptec AVA 1502 SCSI Host Adapter Click on the Next
288. m ID100 cameras manufactured before 12 31 95 have experienced subject data card strobe malfunction when photographing either the subject or the data card Source of Problem After analyzing the subject data card strobe malfunction it was determined that the trigger capacitors on both the subject strobe and the data card strobe PC boards were defective Because of the defective trigger capacitors the subject data card strobe failed to fire a Action Taken It is recommended that the trigger capacitors on the subject data card PC board for all ID100 cameras manufactured before 12 31 95 be replaced when they are received for repair whether they have a subject data card strobe malfunction or not Strobe PC board Before 12 31 95 After 12 31 95 Subject Cl 047uf 400V Poly Film C1 luf 500V Ceramic Data Card C1 C2 047uf 400V Poly Film C1 C2 luf 500V Ceramic THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Replacing Subject Data Card Trigger Capacitors Caution Shock Hazard High Voltage It takes approximately 90 seconds to discharge the strobe capacitors down to 48 Vdc Always wait at least two 2 minutes to make sure the strobe capacitors are fully discharged before attempting to remove the subject data card strobe PC board Use a dump probe after the two 2 minute discharge time has elapsed to make sure the strobe capacitors are fully discharged 1 Remove the subject data card strobe
289. ment please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N8 Page 4 of 3 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 3 No 9 From New Products Service Support Group Date July 2 1999 Subject New SCSI Host Adapter bundled with Sprintscans in US e Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this message is to alert service and telephone support providers regarding a new SCSI Host adapter board that will be included with new SprintScans sold for use with a Windows based PC in some regions e Products Affected SprintScan 4000 SprintScan 35 Plus SprintScan 35LE e Details Notes As of July 1999 approximate date a new PCI Plug and Play SCSI host adapter is included with Sprintscan for Windows based PC s in the US and may be an option in other regions The 3922 replaces the Advansys ABP922 host adapter that was formerly included This bulletin replaces SprintScan Bulletin V2 N9 dated October 12 1998 which can be discarded Product Summary Manufacturer Advansys www advansys com Model Number ABP 3922 PID Number 101523 Computer Bus PCI Plug and Play SCSI Connector 25 Pin type D Device Protocol SCSI 1 SCSI 2 and Fast SCSI 2 Interface Protocal Bus Master DMA Bootable Yes Device Support Up to 7 SCSI devices SCSI Transfer Rate Up to 10MB Sec Win 95 98 Miniport Driver ASC mpd Win NT 4 Miniport Driv
290. mer has upgraded their Windows 95 to Windows 98 As soon as the PolaColor Insight application opens the user gets a message stating that No scanners are found A check in the Device Manager shows a listing for a Scanner Polaroid Scanner or ADPT Scanner e Resolution Windows 98 uses a new way of recognizing scanners This new method is known as Still Imaging Technology Using this new technology a scanner can operate under Windows 98 without TWAIN or an ASPI layer Under this new system a scanner is known to the system as an Imaging Device PolaColor Insight version 2 and later will only recognize a scanner if it appears in the Device Manager as an Imaging Device There are two solutions to this problem Solution 1 Note This solution is a copy of the one found in the PolaColor Insight ReadME file Open the Device Manager Select the Scanner listing with the mouse pointer Click on the Remove button Re boot the PC After the Windows 98 re boots open the Device Manager Check and see if the Scanner is now listed as an Imaging Device If there is no Imaging Device Listed go to Solution 2 UE ee ee 6 Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulleti
291. mes up with a Dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 1 In this case the message seen is Where is SendNotification SendNotification is a reference to a third party application that sends an e mail notification to a chosen person when a batch scan is complete this is explained within the script Since the application SendNotification is not found Applescript posts a Dialog box asking where to find it A workaround allowing the user to edit the script is to choose any application on the users hard drive After the application is chosen the name of the application will be inserted within the script and the user will then be able to open the script for editing When editing the reference to the SendNotification application can be removed and the script can be saved with a different name chosen by the user 3 Run Multiple Scan sample script If the user tries to run or edit this script they will see the same Dialog box as shown in Figure 1 asking Where is Blink Debug The workaround to allow this script to be edited is the same as the one for the Run Batch Folder script Contact Gerald DiBello Email DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Po
292. mp and pin on its underside shown in the illustration These Covers are for use in the Camera Serial Numbers and Configurations listed in the bottom four lines of Table A The new Mainframe configuration is shown in Fig 3B and is identified by the raised central rib in the Viewfinder area Fig 3A New Drive Cover Fig 3B Latest Mainframe Configuration P N 1A2067A takes new Drive Cover at left REPAIR PROCEDURES PARTS APPLICATION In all Joshua Cameras with the Serial Numbers and Configuration codes listed in Table A A Replace the existing 5 Wire Detail Switch with the new Switch P N 1A2708A unless the new Switch is in the Camera and B Depending on the particular Camera Serial Number and Configuration either replace the Drive Cover with the Repair Cover T22067SK01 or reuse the old Drive Cover or install a new Drive Cover 1A2067A 7j NOTE During any repair if the Camera has an early Mainframe with a plastic Gear 3 replace it with the new metal Gear 3 P N 1A2808A Servicing Joshua Camera Jams cont d CAMERA ID AND CONFIGURATION CODE LOCATIONS To read the Camera Serial Number open the Picture Removal Door and read the first two characters of the Serial Number printed on the inside of the Door Example In Serial Number G2LQB149NBFA the ID G2 indicates manufacture in Ju ly 1992 To read the Camera Configuration open the Film Loading Door Assem
293. mum component design life 5 years WARRANTY Each PictureDrive has a two year warranty The cartridges carry a five year warranty SCHEDULE PictureDrives have been available in Japan since June of 1993 They were introduced in the USA at MacWorld in Boston in August 1994 It is expected that shipments will begin in late September 1994 The current plan is to have units available only through Macwarehouse until some pending issues are resolved EARLY RETURNS PLAN An Early Returns Plan will be set up with all customer returns failures forwarded to Cambridge An analysis team will be established to examine each return with the intent of providing early market feed back information to the factory Once sufficient data has been collected all returns will be sent to Oak Brook SERVICE PLAN PARTS AVAILABILITY Current plans call for all failed returned units to be sent to Oak Brook for functionality testing only Once testing is completed units will be forwarded to SyQuest for repairs Polaroid will not stock repair parts PRICING PictureDrive PID Sugg List Cartridges PID Sugg List 270 618932 649 00 3 5 270MB_ 618933 99 00 3 5 105MB 618970 69 00 200 TBD 669 00 5 25 200MB TBD 109 00 88 618726 499 00 5 25 88MB 618728 109 00 5 25 44MB 618727 79 00 py hI e ANN POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division 784 Memorial Drive Cambridge MA 02139 REPAIR INFO BULLETIN Int l
294. n V2 N10 Page 1 of 2 Solution 2 1 2 oe ee Contact Use the Find command and look for a file named Polascan inf If found delete the file Uninstall Adaptec EZ SCSI or EZ SCSI lite Note In most cases a feature of EZ SCSI is the reason the SprintScan is not recognized as an Imaging Device One of the features of EZ SCSI is a generic scanner device driver This driver provides a simple control for a generic scanner It s this driver that blocks the SprintScan from being recognized as an Imaging Device You can check the Registry editor and verify the Adaptec driver is the cause of the problem Look in the following path root drive letter usually C HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Enum SCSI POLAROID35MM 5 ROOT amp SCSIADAPTER amp 0000X0 Click on the folder ROOT amp SCSIADAPTER and view it s contents in the right hand pane of the Registry window If the class type is ADPT Scanner then the EZ SCI scanner device driver is causing the scanner not found problem Open the Device Manager Select the Scanner listing with the mouse pointer Click on the Remove button Re boot the PC After Windows 98 re boots open the Device Manager Check to see if the Scanner is now listed as an Imaging Device Re install EZ SCSI or EZ SCSI lite Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The informatio
295. n a scanned image you must exit the SprintScan application and Acquire Import the slide scanner in PhotoShop Note A second method is to select any new film type and then re select the film type desired Either method re initializes the slide scanner so you can correctly scan with the changed CCD Configuration setting 11 CCD Board Replacement Older Slide Scanners If the CCD board fails in an older SprintScan 35 Plus replace it with a modified blue filter CCD Board as follows 1 Make sure that the firmware in the slide scanner is version 5 90 or higher 2 Replace the defective CCD Board as explained in the SprintScan 35 Repair Manual Note Stop at the step where the LabVIEW IPT tester is used to test the slide scanner 3 After starting the LabVIEW IPT tester version 1 02 or higher make the applicable change to the normal test setup Note On the main LabVIEW window is a selection box marked CCD Configuration Up to this point you have been instructed to set the option in this box to Do Not Update Figure 7 CCD Configuration Selection Box Scanner Tester w No Station Name Serial Number or CCD Configuration GMT Origin o e S l SA GMT Ange cde e S l Right Horz Res RGB SL eto er eee Lo ex Macintosh HD Labview 4 folder Constants ssz5 v5 2 Ole Figure 7 Scanner tester w panel 12 4 Change selection to CCD Config 1 Figure 8a As the LabVIEW test runs the configuration
296. n above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N10 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN cema 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 2 No 11 From New Products Service Support Group Date November 18 1998 Subject New Firmware v1 80 Released e Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this message is to alert Service Providers regarding new firmware that has been released for the SprintScan 45 and 45 Pro The new firmware corrects problems with Windows 98 Windows NT and SCSI compatibility e Products Affected SprintScan 45 and SprintScan 45 Pro e Details Reports from the field indicate that the SprintScan 45 has SCSI and operating system compatibility problems with Windows 95 98 and NT version 4 In response to the reported problems the manufacturer has revised the firmware A new version 1 80 firmware the previous version was 1 65 has been tested and proven to solve these reported issues The new firmware corrects these problems e Windows 98 compatibility Scanner is now fully compatible e Windows NT version 4 compatibility i e Scanner not found errors or scanner disappears off SCSI bus after a period of time problem corrected e General SCSI bus problems i e Scanner not recognized on the SCSI bus scanner disapp
297. n can be obtained from the Polaroid 1240 Series Customer Service Information Manual THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS FIXED FOCUS AUTOFLASH MODEL Film Identification Window Red amp Green LEDs AUTOFOCUS DATE IMPRINT MODEL Date Time Display Buttons Date Time LCD Display Product Description The Polaroid 35mm low cost 1240 series cameras are easy to use point and shoot fixed focus and auto focus models They have features such as built in electronic flash a fill flash button built in automatic red eye reduction easy film loading automatic advancing and powered re winding Although we recommend the use of Polaroid Color Print films In 12 24 or 36 exposure rolls the cameras can accommodate ISO 100 ISO 200 and ISO 400 speed color print film of all 35mm brands We do not recommend using 35mm slide films with these cameras Each model camera uses two 1 5 volt AAA alkaline batteries to power the automatic functions and the electronic flash The cameras can also accommodate the use of a single DL123A 3 Volt Lithium battery or CR123A 3 Volt Lithium battery or equivalents A film identification window on the film door indicates the type of film loaded in the camera and the number of exposures in the roll Also a film counter window located on the top of the cam era indicates the number of pictures taken 1 36 During rewind the counter counts ba
298. n for repair This capability is only available in firmware version 564 and version 704 There are 3 classes of errors that are logged e Asynchronous Hardware Errors These are hardware errors where the film printer loses process control the classic being filter wheel jam There are about 35 of these each with own unique error number The explanation of each error code is listed in this document e Asynchronous Software Errors These are just like the hardware errors except there isn t a unique error number A 64 character string is stored with the filename line number and description e Power On Hardware Diagnostics These are tests that are run at startup and generate an error message to the LED and which require an operator keystroke to proceed DETAIL We would like to know what errors have occurred and when Since there is no internal clock in the film printer we keep track of the total number of pictures exposed We use the number of pictures as our notion of time The host side utility will display 1 The serial number of the unit A separate host side utility provides this function 2 The current version of all major circuit boards A list of all production versions is provided 3 The current picture count 4 The time date when these statistics were last reset The command errstat reset_counts will delete all error statistics from the flash memory of film printer 5 Ahistogram of all the asynchronous hardw
299. n one significant way The Config code is now factory set when the chip is programmed to a 1 What this means for service If a controller board with the 5 94 firmware is replaced on a scanner that has an older type CCD board you must reset the Config code to a 0 On the other hand if the scanner has a new modified CCD board you don t have to change the Config since it is by default set toa 1 Changing Config Code When replacing CCD boards or Controller Boards follow these guidelines a If scanner has OLD CCD board and 5 94 firmware Change Config to 0 b If scanner has NEW CCD board and 5 94 firmware No change to Config In both instances check the Config code before returning the scanner to the customer Ordering New Firmware Version 5 94 firmware part number 1AN312A New firmware may be ordered from Polaroid Corporation Material Services 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Telephone 800 343 4846 or 781 386 5649 Fax 781 386 5606 cc mail Parts Department Polaroid com Contact Gerald DiBello Ce mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N5 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Servic
300. n the SprintScan 35mm Scanner Service Manual 4 Position the scanner as shown in Figure 2 Caution Always touch the metal plate supporting the SCSI connectors before touching the Main Controller PC Board 5 Locate the CPU on the Main Controller PC Board Observe its orientation in its socket dot and beveled corner faces front of scanner Figure 2 6 Insert the fingers of the chip puller into the provided slots at the top left and bottom right corners of the socket 7 Remove the CPU by gently but firmly squeezing the handles of the chip puller together oe Properly position the replacement CPU Part number 1F4554A squarely into its socket making sure that its beveled corner goes to the beveled corner of the socket 9 Place a thumb in the middle of the CPU and two fingers underneath it Evenly squeeze the replacement CPU into place Note The replacement CPU should be close to flush and parallel with the top of its socket when it is properly seated Universal PLCC Figure 2 CPU Replacement 10 Install the scanner cover as explained in the SprintScan 35mm Scanner Service Manual 11 Plug the AC power cord into the socket of the scanner and then plug it into an AC power receptacle 12 Turn on the scanner by setting its Power On Off 1 0 switch to On 1 The yellow Ready LED blinks Note After CPU replacement the power up sequence must be cycled twice to turn on the scanner WARNING When turning on the sys
301. nd remove Plug in for Polaroid Photo Printer d Re boot the PC e Install the new software 4 Reprint of Readme file this page and printed Release Notes page 3 that are included with version 1 2 of the Parallel Photo Printer software Photo Printer Plug in Readme System Requirements This is the English Language version of the Photo Printer Plug in and is intended to run on English versions of Windows 95 and Windows 98 The minimum Hardware Configuration includes Polaroid Digital Photo Printer 5 MB of Available Disk Space 16 MB of Memory Super VGA Monitor 1 MB of VRAM Pointing Device Mouse Installation Instructions You install the Plug in by running setup exe that you will find in the folder Plugins located on the CD YOU MUST REBOOT YOUR SYSTEM IN ORDER FOR ALL DELIVERED COMPONENTS TO BE LOADED PROPERLY BY WINDOWS Release Notes If you elect to uninstall the plug in you must run a cache file clean up utility named CleanUp IQADataFiles exe before running the uninstaller Otherwise residual files will be left behind Polaroid Photo Printer Parallel Bulletin V2 N2 Page 2 of 3 Polaroid ColorShot Photo Printer Release Notes Version 1 2 Communication Error Windows 95 ONLY for parallel port users only The parallel port driver requires updating when the message Communication Error Occurred displays This error can occur anytime after a successful installation of the
302. ndicates the camera was manufactured during the month of July 4 indicates the camera was manufactured during 1 994 D indicates the version of the camera supplier internal code Serial Number Warranty Polaroid offers a one year warranty on the cameras Replacement cameras for dealer customer returns will be provided by the manufacturer Polaroid will send exchange units from inventory to its direct customers or wait issue dealer credit Polaroid is responsible for maintaining inventories Defective customer and dealer returned cameras to Enschede will be transferred to Atlanta for return to the manufacturer Polaroid will not repair defective cameras In most cases a customer will return a defective camera to the dealer The dealer in turn will either refund or replace the camera These defective cameras will be returned to Polaroid through the dealer return policy in place and the dealer will receive credit from Polaroid Polaroid Atlanta will accumulate all defective cameras for eventual shipment to the manufacturer The manufactur er will provide new replacements to Polaroid Early Returns The intent of the Early Returns Program is to insure rapid communication of problems in the field to appropriate Polaroid groups This will result in expedient action being taken to solve problems and to help determine the level of product quality being supplied to Polaroid An early returns program will be in effect in Enschede for the return
303. negative for T 51 film indicated that they could no longer supply us Because of the unique characteristics of T 51 customers could not switch to other Polaroid film prod ucts and get the same results To meet our customer s needs we have developed a new film T 51HC as a replacement for T 51 On the reverse side of this page is a summary of selected parameters comparing the characteristics of T 51HC to T 51 Additionally a Technical Data Sheet for T 51HC and a copy of the T51HC Tip Sheet are attached If you have questions concerning this notice please contact Harro Limbo via E Mail cc mail via telephone at PTN 221 4424 or via FAX at 221 4892 OVET COMPARISON OF T 51HC AND T 51 Parameter Spectral Sensitivity Positive Speed Positive Contrast Usable Negative clear in 18 sodium sulfite sol Negative Contrast Processing Time 71 F Expiration Dating T 51HC Panchromatic ISO 320 26 5500 K ISO 200 24 3200 K High gt 3 5 ISO 50 18 5500 K ISO 32 16 3200 K Medium 0 85 30 seconds 12 months T 51 Orthochromatic ISO 320 26 5500 K ISO 120 22 3200 K High gt 2 5 Not available Not available 15 20 seconds 15 months REFER TO FILM TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS FOR DETAILED INFORMATION Polaroid Corporation Consumer Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 1406 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR SHARON KING NOTICE 015129 REVIEW B
304. nes within the image To eliminate this problem Pacing should be enabled on the LCD panel This will insert a user defined wait between scan lines allowing the host computer to process the necessary image data The amount of pacing should be increased in small steps until the data wait lines have been eliminated An excessive pacing time will increase the total exposure time of the entire image Horizontal lines across image can be caused if the CRT scan light blinks on and off due to a slow or busy host computer One way to check for this is to expose the image that exhibits the problem with some dummy film and once the exposure starts remove the camera from the front of the unit Look in at the CRT and see if the scan is blinking on and off If so the fix is to increase the Pacing value via the keypad Try to use the same image and printing conditions that produced the problem Make certain that the computer that the film recorder is connected to is completely DEDICATED to imaging with the ProPalette Every time a message comes in or a key is pressed or Appleshare is polled this causes a software interrupt in the CPU These interrupts borrow time from the process of processing the image for the film recorder If the film recorder has to wait for image data data wait lines can appear on the film Check to make sure that no other electrical devices are close enough to the unit that could cause electro magnetic interference Monitors and electri
305. ng in September 1994 a message has been added to each Spectra film frame The message is located on the back of the frame below the film code Shown below is a sample of the film code with the new message 09417101567 2W 0900 1000 COPIES amp ENLARGEMENTS CALL 800 421 1030 If you have any questions call Shari King at 617 386 0184 PTN 226 0184 or Ed Dacey at 617 386 5490 PTN 226 5490 Polaroid Corporation Consumer Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 1406 FILM INFORMATION NOTICE INITIATOR SHARON KING NOTICE 015131 REVIEW B SCHRANDT DATE JANUARY 11 1995 SUBJECT YELLOW STAINING ON THE MASK PRODUCT 7 600 SPECTRA SENSITIVE MATERIAL LIMITED DISTRIBUTION X Internal Polaroid Pack X U S Service Centers 4X5 X International Film Mfg Large Format International Subsidiaries X Integral 35mm All PROBLEM Discoloration of the mask a yellowish stain may appear in T 600 and Spectra film if the frames are stacked in a pile soon after processing and are then stored this way for a period of time The staining is caused by the reagent diffusing through the paper pod tape on the backside of the frame SOLUTION Film manufacturing is currently developing a pod tape with barrier characteristics which prevent the reagent from diffusing through the tape It is expected that this pod redesign will be
306. ng the drivers listed above it will report that ASPI is NOT functional when in reality it is working OK After you complete steps 2a or 2b the scanner should work correctly 2 Check and delete multiple copies of the ASPI DLL s on the users hard drive Look for outdated versions mixed with newer versions Keep the latest version and delete the old ones Step 3 Windows 98 Scanner recognized as Polaroid Scanner This symptom could mean that one or both of the following problems exist Problem 1 The scanner is recognized by the PC as a generic type of scanner In this case PolaColor Insight will not recognize it Go to Step 3a Problem 2 Missing sys files Go to Step 3b Step 3a Scanner is listed in the Registry as a generic device 1 Open the Registry editor and check if an Adaptec scanner driver is the cause of the problem 2 Look in the following path Note this example applies to a SprintScan 35ES or Plus C HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Enum SCSI POLAROID35MM 5 ROOT amp SCSIADAPTER amp 0000X0 Click on the folder ROOT amp SCSIADAPTER to view it s contents in the right hand pane of the Registry window Check to see if the class type is ADPT Scanner If it s not skip to Step 3b Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please
307. nit to cycle and will often allow the paper to free itself thus clearing the jam IF THE PAPER REMAINS JAMMED l Referring to Figure 1 remove the ink cartridge FIGURE 1 REMOVING THE INK CARTRIDGE a THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS In the following step DO NOT FORCE THE DRUM Try turning the drum GENTLY counter clockwise as shown in Figure 2 If the drum moves freely the jammed paper can be removed If the drum does not move freely and you attempt to force it it is likely that one of the plastic gears in the drum roller mechanism will be stripped If the drum does not move freely return the printer to a service location FIGURE 2 TURNING THE DRUM COUNTER CLOCKWISE 4 POLAROID aaa 3 Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO Cl 700 94 2 SPECIAL DATE FEBRUARY 21 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM SUSSAN COLEY SUBJECT CI 700 PHOTOPRINTER PRODUCTION DISCONTINUED BACKGROUND A decision has been made by the EIS Business Unit to cease further production of the CI 700 PhotoPrinter REPAIRS POLAROID BRANDED PRODUCT All repairs and service of Polaroid Branded CI 700 units will be performed in Cambridge MA via ex change units An inventory of PhotoPrinters will be mai
308. noids in the camera head and U8 on Logic Board 1B2995A CORRECTIVE ACTION To correct this problem in new units manufacturing is adding three posistors also called polyswitches to the ID4 camera head These posistors CPS477 control current fluctuations which are the cause of the overheating problems When servicing ID4 camera heads which are configuration S check to determine whether the posistors At this time it is believed that all suspect camera heads were recovered before delivery to customers and they should all be located in warehouses in Needham Massachusetts and Enschede The Netherlands have been installed in the locations described below If they have not install them as instructed in the following steps This procedure should take about 35 minutes to complete This includes unpacking disassembly reas sembly and repacking 4 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE Before beginning check the camera to be certain that it is functioning properly f it is not correct the problem before starting this procedure Preparation 1 Using the inset in Figure 1 as a guide trim the leads of three posistors CPS477 leaving just enough bare wire for soldering 2 Disassemble the camera head to gain access to the internal wiring Procedure l Locate connector J2 at the LED board on the camera back and disconnect it from the board 2 Trace the
309. ns over the phone cannot resolve the situation the Customer will be instructed to return the defective LCD projector prepaid and insured in the origi nal or comparable packaging to Polaroid EIS Tech Support Division 6755 Mira Mesa Blvd Suite 123 315 San Diego CA 92121 4311 and to mark the outside of the shipping box with the Return Authjorization RA number this will speed up the processing of their repair Non US Customers outside the United States must contact the nearest Polaroid Office addresses are in the LCD Projector User s Manual EARLY RETURNS PROGRAM There is no early returns program for the LCD Projectors WARRANTY POLICY All LCD Projectors are warranted for one year from the date of purchase OUT OF WARRANTY POLICY The procedures will be the same as they are for warranty repairs except the customer will charged for work performed parts and labor PARTS DOCUMENTATION Parts and Documentation for the LCD Projectors will be available as follows Parts Catalog After October 1995 Parts Availabity After October 1995 Service Manual None TRAINING Formal training will not be necessary since Polaroid will not be repairing these products in the US Service Centers will be provided with a Parts Catalog py A yy DDD POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 EW PRODUCT INFO Int l EXP SUB N P I NO PD 94 1 SPECIAL DATE S
310. ntScan 35mm Scanner as follows Month A January B February l C March Sequential Number C 5 001762 C Pi Year 4 1994 Hardware Configuration Levels A Filter Wheel Changed 5 1995 B Controller PC Board Modified C Adds Slot Cover to Chassis Assembly Rear Panel SCSI Connectors Location of Serial Number Serial Number for Configuration C located on bottom of scanner Figure 1 Serial Number Location y A A EEe 4 POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 35mm Scan 95 3 SPECIAL DATE June 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT SprintScan 35 SCSI TERMINATION POWER Problem SprintScan 35 scanner malfunctions have resently taken place when a laptop computer PowerBook type was connected to it The type of malfunction that took place was a Scanner Hardware Error This type of error prevented the scanner from e Properly performing its self test routine e Finding its analog range Investigation found that a blown SCSI interface fuse on the main controller PC board caused the error Since laptop computers do not provide termination power the scanner s external SCSI terminator dragged the SCSI signals to ground prohibiting the laptop computer from
311. ntained for this purpose REPAIRS OEM UNITS A quantity of PhotoPrinter OEM units have been sold with no requirement for service that is with no warranty charge imbedded in the price of these units to the OEM Account managers have been so informed and urged to offer attractive pricing terms on units stocked for exchange purposes THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN creaa 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot Parallel Vol 1 No 1 From New Products Service Support Group Date October 7 1998 Subject Windows 95 OS Slow Printing e Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this message is to alert Telephone Service and Repair providers regarding the solution to the problem of slow printing 3 5 minutes when using the ColorShot Parallel version running under Windows 95 e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot Parallel printer Polaroid PhotoMAX PhotoPrinter e Details The customer successfully installs the printer on their PC but after clicking on the Print button in their image editing application the time to output a print is 3 to 5 minutes e Resolution The solution is for the user to get from another PC a friend or other source the latest version of a driver named Lpt vxd and install it on their user s PC The version should 4 00 503 or later The path to this file is C WI
312. ntents of the flash memory in the ProPalette It is divided into two sections virtual flash 0 VFO and virtual flash 1 VF1 See figures 1 and 2 respectively The top part of the screen lists the code blocks that are stored in the virtual flash while the bottom half of the screen lists the menu options that are available to the operator Menu options all options are menu driven and self explanatory they are executed by pressing the Enter lt cr gt key H Hex Download amp Program nto Flash initiate a firmware download and burn it into flash memory R Remove a data block from Flash erase a specific data code block E Erase this Virtual Flash erase all data blocks within the virtual flash G Garbage Collect erase deleted Blocks and optimize remaining datae V set Virtual flash change between virtual flash Menu choices not defined are used by the software developers and not of use to Service Common code blocks There are two code blocks that are common to both Virtual Flashes block 8 Copyright and block 9 Flash_types These blocks are written by the monitor and will be replaced if erased VFO code blocks Virtual Flash 0 characteristically contains the configuration parameters for the ProPalette that are established by the alignment station and must be maintained when power is removed from the unit The removal of any of this information will seriously impact the functionality of the unit They include Control
313. nting If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Parallel Bulletin V1 N3 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN cra 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot Parallel Vol 2 No 1 From New Products Service Support Group Date February 15 1999 Subject Firmware Defect e Category Service Alert Bulletin The purpose of this message is to notify Telephone Service and Repair providers of a firmware defect that affects the ColorShot Digital Photo Printer Parallel model Note USB models are NOT affected because they contain different firmware e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot Parallel printer amp PhotoMAX Photo Printer e Details Reported problem A parallel printer is correctly installed and has been working normally The customer reports that they are now seeing one of the following error messages e Device Internal Problem e Printer Communication Problem e Resolution One source of the error messages is a fault in the printers firmware code Since there are other sources that can cause the error messages listed above there is a method you can use to determine if the firmware fault caused the error Use the Explorer and look in the following path C WINDOWS TEMP for files named SeqXXX txt where XXX is a number beginning at 000 These are Sequence files created each time the printer
314. o identify and isolate deviations address customer comments and questions and devis ffective solutions Early Returns findings will be reported to you In Warranty If a unit requires service the customer will be asked to call the Polaroid Resource Center 1 800 432 5355 If it is determined that the unit needs to be serviced the customer should ship it insured and prepaid to Polaroid Corp ATTN Industrial Repair 2020 Swift Drive Oak Brook IL 60521 The unit will be repaired or exchanged and returned to the customer within five working days Out of Warranty Same except customer pays for parts and labor Documentation An HR 6000 Parts Catalog and Addendum to the CI 5000 Ser vice Manual will be available in November 1994 HR 6000 Digital Palette CFR cont d aes aie SERVICE Non U S A Each Subsidiary will establish its own service support strategy PARTS AVAILABILITY Most HR 6000 parts are the same as those used in the CI 5000 Palette A Product Alert listing unique HR 6000 parts and their availability will be published in November 1994 A 4 y eee a POLAROID im 4 Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 REPAIR INFO BULLETIN Int l EXP SUB R I B NO Dig Pal 95 6 SPECIAL DATE February 1 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTR
315. oblems will be fixed The localized five language version of PolaColor Insight version 3 5 will have the corrected scripts inserted before it s released scheduled release month the of July 99 1 Run Batch Folder script When the user attempts to run or edit the script they see a Dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 1 The message indicates that the script editor is looking for an application name Blink Debug that s referred to in the script Parts f a PCI Settings File Convert PolaColor Insight 3 5 gt PolaColor Insight Plugin Instal Polacolor Scripts Qj Support f Where is Blink Debug Figure 1 A workaround allowing script to be edited is Point Applescript to the PolaColor Insight 3 5 application To do this you would click the mouse pointer to select Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N5 Page 2of 3 PolaColor Insight 3 5 in the list and then click on the Open button After this action is taken Applescript opens up the script for editing After edits are complete you can save the script with a different name 2 SS4000 Batch w Notify script When the user tries to run or edit this sample script Applescript co
316. ocessors 100Mhz or below with certain types of graphic boards Typically the user has a number of applications open when the print command is selected and they switch to one of the applications while the print cycle is in process Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Bulletin V1 N1 Page 1 of 2 e Resolution If users report this type of problem ask them to try to print again but do not switch to another application during the print cycle Another suggestion would be to close one or more open applications before they select the Print command Contact Gerald DiBello Ce mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Bulletin V1 N1 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot USB Vol 1 No 2 From New Products Service Support Group Date July 2 1998 Subject Windows 98 Compatibility e Category E
317. of 50 customer cameras of each model An early returns program will also be in effect in Atlanta for the return of 100 cus tomer or dealer cameras of each model Defective units will be analyzed by the Systems Quality and Reliability group for feedback to the manufacturer Repair Procedures Defective cameras returned to Polaroid by dealers or customers will not be repaired by Polaroid Polaroid will return defective cameras to the supplier for full replacement Out of warranty cameras will be handled by the designated Authorized Service Center L ev POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 7 SPECIAL DATE JANUARY 17 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE SUBJECT JOSHUA TEOUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The Joshua Troubleshooting Guide attached was prepared by Camera Manufacturing and I am indebted to them for their time and effort represented Although the problems described in this Guide may not always be exactly the same as those seen by the field in the finished product the Guide nonetheless will help as we analyze and repair Joshua products the types of failures problems that can occur in specific areas The Guide covers the following topics in two main areas A Lower camera back Assembly B Final Camera Assembly L No dar
318. of its CRT phosphors a color inkjet printer outputs in RGB according to its own specifications The open color management system used in Photoshop 5 x lets you automatically compensate for the differences in devices by translating the different RGB color spaces for you By using device profiles and a specified color space in Photoshop 5 x the compensation feature allows the color information to be used through your input output workflow in a device independent manner with more color accuracy For the compensation feature to work properly there are some initial setup steps required 1 Calibrate your monitor and create a monitor profile Use Photoshop s built in Adobe Gamma control panel utility or a third party product 2 Setting up files for proper conversion of your SprintScan scanned images to Photoshop 5 x 3 Setting up Color Settings preferences in Photoshop 5 x 4 Converting SprintScan scanned images to Photoshop 5 x color space before making any additional corrections 5 How to print to an Epson inkjet using color management profiles The five setup procedures suggested here are for a quick setup of the Color Management system The quick setup procedure assumes that the SprintScan is not the only input device When a scanned image is opened in Photoshop you will see a dialog box asking what profile you want to apply to the image see Step 4 Customers wanting to learn more about the subject of Color Management should consult the Phot
319. oid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 11 18 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 971118134903JF Product Group PDI Posted By Category Jordan Freedman INVALID INITIALIZATION TEST MESSAGES Details Diagrams PROBLEM With 562 702 and earlier firmware a ProPalette may occasionally display a false Vertical or Horizontal Test failure during the startup diagnostics REASON These failures may be due to noise in the sensing circuitry rather than in the high precision deflection circuitry being measured SOLUTION Before authorizing a service return please have the customer confirm that the failure is repeatable Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission M4 Product Alert Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 PA Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 11 19 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 971119141308JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Software Received on Film SWERR ERROR MESSAGE Details Diagrams Subject Situation On certain Windows PCs running at processor sp
320. ojectors in the market place today The Polaview LCD projectors display resolutions up to 640 x 480 and are compatible with most com puters including Apple Macintosh and IBM compatibles PRODUCT LINE DESCRIPTION Key features of two of the Polaview LCD Projectors are summarized below as examples of features of all Polaview 105 LCD Projector Advanced polysilicon LCD delivers brilliant images in any lighting conditions 300 ANSI lumens and advanced optics project bright saturated colors Easy remote control of image size 1 to 1 6 diagonal size and focus vida power zoom lens Projects 16 7 million brilliant colors Directly compatibile with your personal computer Easy set up Low profile compact housing Lightweight 23 lbs or 10 5 Kg sturdy design for portability Integrated video and audio support with speakers Polaview 95 LCD Projector 500 ANSI lumens create bright colorful images on screen in well lit rooms projects 2 million colors from a palette of 16 7 million Metal halide lamp illuminates bright projected images e Active matrix LCD for sharp crisp images Low profile compact design Light weight and sturdy for portability SERVICE POLICY U S If a customer has a problem with the LCD Projector the User Manual instructs him her to call the Polaroid Technical Assistance Hotline 1 800 432 5355 Mon Fri 8AM to 8PM EST If the Technical Assistance Representative determines remedial actio
321. olaScan 35 Plus Note This problem does not affect slide scanners with an older style filter wheel Problem Due to a manufacturing problem some light tunnels were improperly installed The left side of the slide carriage arm as viewed from the top of the slide scanner with its front facing forward can interfere with the right front side of the light tunnel If this occurs color registra tion will be affected because scan speed is effectively lowered The point of the interference is shown in Figure 1 For correct alignment the light tunnel must be installed so that it s front is exactly parallel and spaced 1mm away from the bottom of the slide carriage when it is in its resting position not scanning THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 35mm Scan 97 5 SPECIAL DATE December 1997 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM Gerald DiBello SUBJECT Manufacturing Changes to SS35 LE Background The following manufacturing changes were made to the SS35 LE at the beginning of October 1997 Firmware Revision Level e Power Supply Vendor Table 1 indicates the problems corrected by the changes made to the SS35 LE Table 1 Prob
322. olaroid s website on June 23 1999 The release version contains a number of sample programs written in Applescript A scripting tool provided with the Mac OS and intended to provide the user with the tools to automate the scanning process in PolaColor Insight The sample scripts provided are intended to give the user a starting place to customize the provided scripts for their own needs and or help them to learn scripting For example one script provided is named Run Batch Folder This script will scan a number of slides or filmstrips based on preset parameters i e pre prepared Insight settings files and stop when it runs out of settings files This particular script was originally developed to automatically scan all four slides in a SprintScan 45 4 slide filmholder Since each slide is in a different location within the holder the four settings files provide among other parameters a crop rectangle for the location of each slide If a user wanted to modify the script to work with a SpintScan 4000 they would have to add a frame counter position to script Problem User can t modify three of the sample scripts If the user is learning Applescripting and wants to modify one of the sample scripts for their own use they can do so using the Applescript scripting editor that s included free with the Mac OS To edit a script using the scripting editor Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as ne
323. ome cases seems to make the problem worse The problem is caused by mismatched board revision levels Revision level must be considered when replacing boards e Resolution Recent information received from Manufacturing shows that board revision level must be taken into consideration when replacing CCD or Controller boards The two acceptable board revision level combinations are as follows 1 Rev A3 Controller Boards must be paired with rev A3 CCD boards 2 Rev A4 Controller Boards must be pair with rev B1 CCD boards The current revision levels of product shipping from the manufacturer Please take this information into account when repairing the SprintScan 45 Mixing revision levels can lead to image quality problems Note If you only have revision level B1 CCD boards in your stock and you are repairing a unit that has a rev A3 Controller board then you must also replace the controller board with a rev A4 How to identify circuit board revision level a CCD Board Revision Level Revision level information can be found at the top of the circuit board see Figure 1 Revision level marks are shown as X Y in Figure 1 where X A or B and Y a number Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Sprint
324. on to compensateautomatically for color space differencesamong scanners monitors printers and other devices Refer to PolaColor Insight Bulletin V3 N2 dated May 17 1999 for full details on color matching and profile embedding Contact Gerald DiBello Email DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N4 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN coraa 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 PolaColor Insight Vol 2 No 5 From New Products Service Support Group Date July 16 1999 Subject PolaColor Insight Scripting for Macintosh Some Scripts Don t Seem To Work Category Product Alert Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to provide Polaroid Telephone Support providers with information concerning problems with sample Applescripts provided with the current Macintosh version of PolaColor Insight The samples are included with the PolaColor Insight version 3 5 that was released June 1999 on Polaroid s website www polaroid com Products Affected SprintScan Models 4000 35ES 35 Plus 35LE 45 Details Introduction PolaColor Insight version 3 5 for the Macintosh was released on P
325. oper firmware APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 05 20 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990520094526JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Image Quality Color Adjustment Category The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a method to make adjustments to a particular film tables color characteristic curve for each RGB channel Product Affected ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Details The need for adjusting our film tables has been apparent for some time This would allow an operator the capability to tailor the output of a film recorder to their expectations The advanced options in Raster Plus can only provide a control to lighten or darken each color Resolution Adobe Photoshop has several ways to make fine adjustments to color We recommend using this program to adjust the gamma within the color in question The following procedure assumes that the initial results obtained with image film table combination are close just not perfect In Photoshop open the image in the RGB mode Select Image Adjust and Levels In the Channel drop down menu select the color to be adjusted i e if red is too weak select the Red channel Move the center gamma slider ONLY to the left
326. or continually blinks the SCSI interface fuse is OK e If the yellow Ready LED is dim the SCSI interface fuse is blown Replace SCSI interface fuse as explained in the provided replacement procedure Replacing SCSI Interface Fuse CAUTION The SCSI fuse is soldered to the main controller PC board The Main Controller PC Board is particularly sensitive to static discharges Be sure to use an anti static mat and wrist strap during this procedure 1 Remove the top housing as explained in Section 4 of the SprintScan 35 Slide Scanner Service Manual 2 Unsolder the SCSI interface fuse Figure 1 and then replace it with a new one Notes When replacing it be very careful not to damage the main controller PC board e Fuse Rating 1 0A Fast Action Surface Mount e Fuse Part Number SNOO08001 3 Re install the top housing as explained Section 4 of the SprintScan 35 Slide Scanner Service Manual Parts Availability Fuse 5N0008001 will be available after August 1 1995 from Material Services Department Polaroid Corporation 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Please order from normal sources SCSI Interface Fuse Main Controller PC Board Figure 1 Replacing SCSI Interface Fuse on Main Controller PC Board A 4 y eee POLAROID m Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 REPAIR INFO BULLETIN Int l EXP SUB R 1 B NO 35mm Scan 95 4 SPECIAL DATE Jun
327. orative Plate was also changed to elimi nate the words coated glass lens left hand illustration Fig 1 Cameras with the new plastic lens may be identified by a narrow space between the lens surface and bezel see arrow in right hand illustration Fig 1 NOTE In 1994 only the JoyCam Joshua Date and special edition cameras have a glass lens Captiva Cameras have always had plastic lenses PARTS AVAILABILITY The plastic Taking Lens P N 1A2031B and accompanying Decorative Plate P N 1A2157K will be available 8 1 94 from Material Services in Cambridge MA Order through normal sources v kn Fig 1 Vision glass lens left new plastic lens amp dec plate right J THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS TIT Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 18 SPECIAL DATE AUGUST 1 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST RUSSELL D BATTLE FROM NEW ROM 11 SHUTTER PC BOARD FLASH TUBE ASSEMBLY amp SUBJECT TIMING GEAR FOR JOSHUA A AND DATE BACKGROUND In the continuing effort to improve camera performance reliability and quality engineering has upgraded the Joshua Shutter PC Board Flash Tube Assembly to use a ROM 11 integrated circuit and improved the Timing
328. ort to help Manufacturing have a better understanding of customer impact please arrange to have representative samples sent to the following address Polaroid Corporation 1265 Main Street Waltham MA 02154 1799 USA Attn Brian Tanguay Phone 781 386 0097 Contact Please direct questions to Phil Cravotta Worldwide Customer Support Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 USA Phone 781 386 5651 E mail cravotp polaroid com Distribution Polaroid Service Centers Polaroid Service Bulletin No IF010500 Worldwide Customer Support Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Tel 781 386 5651 Second Release Fax 781 386 5611 Subject Dead Battery Issue Author Philip J Cravotta Date December 15 1999 Service Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to alert service providers to a deviation in the quality and or performance of a specific film manufacturing cycle Product Type 600 and Type 779 Film Manufacturing Codes Film with positive codes and expiration date listed below will be affected to a relatively small degree 129XXXXXXXX March 2001 Issue A problem has occurred in a manufacturing run of batteries that will result in the customer experiencing a dead battery throughout the film pack Itis expected that the defect occurrences will be sporadic and will cause a slight increase in the number of customers with dead battery issues Customer Resolution Follow the standard tro
329. oshop User Guide They can also get an Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N2 Page 1of6 Acrobat document named Adobe Photoshop 5 0 Color Management at the following web address http www adobe com supportservice custsupport T ECHGUIDE PSHOP main html Setting up Color Management 1 Calibrate your Monitor Calibrate your monitor using one of the following methods a Use the Adobe Gamma control panel utility to create a monitor profile The profile is automatically stored in the ColorSync folder on a Macintosh or the Color folder on a PC b Use a third party calibration utility and an ICM 2 0 or ColorSync compatible ICC profile generator 2 Setting up files for proper conversion of your SprintScan scanned images to Photoshop 5 x Macintosh a Open the System Folder so that it s window is on the left side of the monitor screen Re position the window if necessary b Open the Preferences folder so that its window opens on the right hand side of the screen Re position the window if necessary so it does not cover the System folder window c Locate the ColorSync Folder inside the System Folder Macintosh System 8 5 or later The ColorSync Folder
330. ot qualified to be subjected to negative voltages and are not rated for the stress they are receiving Additionally the flash memory was corrupted sporadically during this operation and is probably an ESD related problem also It was determined that when the neck clamp of the yoke was grounded the ESD transient was eliminated s Solutions The operator should ground the metal yoke neck clamp before AC power is applied whenever the yoke is adjusted during assembly and testing The earth ground connection at the green wire should be the reference point The operator should also wear ESD protection during the adjustment process Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 03 25 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980325134018JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Digital Board Jumper Configuration Details Diagrams Subject Situation There are four jumper blocks on the ProPalette Digital board 1F5570A There are designated as JP201 JP202 JP501 JP601
331. overwritten SOLUTION Until a solution is provided by Adobe there are two alternative solutions to the problem The first would be to revert to an earlier version of Adobe Photoshop The second would be to not use Palette Export but to print out through the queue of RasterPlus 95 Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission M4 Product Alert Bulletin Polaroid ledge B PA Document Details Product CI 5000S HR 6000 CFR ProPalette 8000 Date 01 16 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970116084902JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Software Received on Film PARALLEL PORT PROBLEMS Details Diagrams Situation Certain parallel port configurations on a limited number of Windows 95 computers will not communicate with Palette film recorders that are attached via the parallel port RasterPlus95 has been revised to build 46 to provide a solution for this issue Actions Solutions If you have experienced any difficulty attaching your Palette film recorder to your PC via the parallel port you may need to upgrade your RasterPlus95 software to build 46 Alternatively you may wish to atta
332. p PhotoShop and do an Acquire Import to start the SprintScan application 2 Atthe top of the Apple menu top left corner of the screen choose About SprintScan 35 The About dialog box Figure 5 appears Durandal Opponents Steve Bushell rintaeas 35 For Power Macintosh Jeff Beck Peter Bennett Stuart Boyd Figure 5 About dialog box 3 The numbers indicated at the right bottom of the About dialog box are reading from top to bottom e CCD configuration code shown as c0 in this example e firmware version e software version 10 Changing CCD Configuration Code 1 Change configuration number from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 by holding down the Option key and single clicking the mouse pointer while pointing at the configuration number The CCD Programming Dialog box Figure 6 appears AN Do not use this feature before contacting Polaroid Technical Support New CCD Type N Figure 6 CCD programming dialog box 2 Change the CCD configuration type by typing in the configuration for the CCD that s in the slide scanner 1 or 0 3 After typing in the new Config number touch the Program the Scanner button with the mouse pointer or press the Return key This action sends the new configuration code to the slide scanner EEPROM Note To confirm the new Configuration code select About Sprintscan 35 under the Apple menu and then read the new Configuration code 4 Finally to correctly view the change i
333. p cover of the scanner using instructions in the SprintScan Repair Manual 3 Identify the Firmware IC U11 on the Controller Board and note the revision level that s printed on an attached label If the revision level is current then you do not need to change the firmware If not current change the firmware to the latest version P N 1F4699B You may order this part from the Parts Department address is listed at end of this Bulletin Caution Firmware is static sensitive use proper procedures when replacing this part Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N6 Page 1 of 7 Replacing the CCD Board Replace the CCD board using the procedure outlined in Section 5 of the SprintScan Repair Manual A copy of the manual can be found on Volume V or later of the Polaroid Electronic Library CD ROM The procedure requires the use of the LabVIEW based IPT test to correctly align the new CCD board The IPT test software is also used to change the Config code To change the Configuration code perform the following steps 1 Replace the CCD board using the directions in the Sprintscan Repair Manual Stop at the point where you will use LabVIEW IPT to test the scanner 2 After
334. p screen for the utility enter the command sn lt cr Where lt cr gt indicates pressing the Enter key and the default connection to the ProPalette is through COM1 Example The following is an example of the output from the utility It reports the serial number along with the major circuit board versions sn Reports and optionally sets serial number Version 564 704 Compiled on Jun 12 1998 The current film printer number is serial number A6020H Analog version 4 Digital version 7 Video version 2 Resources The DOS executeable file and copies of this bulletin in Word and Acrobat format are attached vf JB sn doc sn pdf Sn exe Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 Date 09 16 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980916141858JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Incorrectly Marked Analog Boards Details Diagrams Category Performance The purpose of this message is to alert service providers to a problem with the identification marking of ProPalette 7000
335. ppears in front of the line number during the exposure and remains there until the next image If at any time during an exposure pixel data is not available for 200 msec an underscore _ will display and one may get artifacts At 400 msec it changes to a dash and at 600 msec it changes to an equal sign at which point artifacts are likely Error log kept in flash memory Should an error occur it is recorded in flash memory The log is accessible at Polaroid Service Centers to speed the turnaround of units sent in for repair Hardware configurations display in LCD Diagnostics Show Power on Message now shows two screens each lasting 10 seconds The first is as before model version numbers date and time the second shows the serial number if known and the hardware versions analog digital and video in that order The current Pro8000 versions are 4 7 2 Board versions Analog Version 0 Original PP8000 12 95 release Version 2 There is no version 1 Original PP8000 release with upgraded capacitors sample and hold grounding etc for improved flat field performance Version 3 Equivalent of version 2 with power fail rework for CRT protection Version 4 Respin including all reworks of version 2 and version 3 and 20 increase in video gain Version 10 initial Pro7000 Digital Version 5 original release Version 6 initial revisions to 2 for 1 circuitry Version 7 final version of 2 for 1 gives fastest block mode exposures
336. properly communicating with its hard drive Causes of Blown SCSI Interface Fuse e Power surges during hot connecting or disconnecting SCSI cable to host computer e Shorting termination power pin to ground through the SCSI connector e Incorrectly plugging the scanner into the host computer s parallel port instead of its SCSI port Caution NEVER HOT DISCONNECT OR CONNECT THE HOST COMPUTER TO THE SCSI INTERFACE CONNECTOR THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Checking for Blown SCSI Interface Fuse 1 Turn off the scanner by setting its Power On Off 1 0 switch to Off 0 WARNING When turning on the system always make sure that the scanner is turned on first and then the host computer When turning off the system its the opposite always turn off the host computer first and then the scanner 2 Disconnect host computer from the SCSI interface connector Note Do not disconnect SCSI terminator 3 Turn on the scanner by setting its Power On Off 1 0 switch to On 1 The green Power LED lights to indicate that the scanner is turned on 4 During power up the scanner initiates its self test routine The yellow Ready LED is off while the scanner cycles through its self test routine 5 Upon completion the transporter returns to its home position and the yellow Ready LED lights steady to indicate that the scanner is ready to operate Notes If the yellow Ready LED comes on
337. protective Shields the system electronics shield between against power supply and power supply and inverter induced analog noise inverter PC boards This eliminated streaks caused by the induced analog noise Serial Number Location and Identification Location Figure 1 The Serial Number is located e On the outside of the shipping carton All Configurations e Back panel of the Scanner below its SCSI ports First generation to Configuration B e Bottom of Scanner Configuration C and all subsequent Configurations Identification The Serial Number identifies the SprintScan 35mm Scanner as follows Month A January Sequential Number B February Se Ze B5 00634 ae Year 4 1994 Hardware Configuration Level 5 1995 Rear Panel SCSI Connectors Location of Serial Number Serial Number for Configuration C located on bottom of scanner Figure 1 Serial Number Location POLAROID CORPORATION ConsumerServices Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 35mm Scan 96 6 SPECIAL DATE March 1996 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT CONTROLLER PC BOARD UPDATE REPLACEMENT BACKGROUND Currently all SprintScan 35 s are being manufactured with a new Light Tunnel assembly This change replaces the existing filter wheel and motor assembly
338. r Select the Scanner listing with the mouse pointer Click on the Remove button Re boot the PC After Windows 98 re boots open the Device Manager Check to see if the Scanner is now listed as an Imaging Device The user can now re install EZ SCSI or EZ SCSI lite PEOD Or OTE O Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N10 Page 3 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN cema 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 3 No 2 From New Products Service Support Group Date March 11 1999 Subject PolaColor Insight Pro version 3 0 Introduced e Category Software Info Bulletin The purpose of this message is to alert Telephone Service and Repair Service providers of important changes in version 3 of PolaColor Insight software e Products Affected All SprintScan s e Summary PolaColor Insight version 3 has been changed since version 2 A partial list of the changes follows a Change Version 2 when run under Windows 98 required the scanner to register in the Device Manager as an Imaging Device This requirement does not apply to
339. r Wheel should be replaced with the new gold 5 Wire Switch and new Counter Wheel respectively s JOSH 94 10 When ROM 10 Assemblies are depleted use ROM 11 Assemblies with the new Timing Gear and gold Switch A ROM 10 Timing Gear 1A2077A works ONLY with a ROM 10 and earlier ROM 9 8 7 etc Shutter PC Board Flash Tube Assy P N 1A2432A NOT ti A mismatch of Timing Gear and PC Board Flash Tube Assy may result in a midcycle or jam If a Camera has a defective ROM 11 Shutter PC Board Flash Tube Assembly it must be replaced with the new ROM 11 Assembly Replace ROM 10 or earlier with and change to New New Timing Counter Gear wheel TEST EQUIPMENT CHANGE There is a test equipment change required to test this ROM 11 PC Board Flash Tube Assembly in the ambient mode Present equipment permits testing in the flash mode Details of this test equipment change will be forthcoming Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 19 SPECIAL DATE JULY 11 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO _ LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE SUBJECT NEW JOSHUA VIEWING MIRROR CARRIER BELLOWS ASSEMBLY Shortly Camera Manufacturing will began installing a new Viewing Mirror Carrier Bellows Assembly in all Joshu
340. r sources are used to obtain these parts it should be noted that only 120 or 150 nanosecond IC s should be used for this application IC s with slower access speeds will not work correctly Order through normal sources Polaroid Corporation Material Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 USA Telephone 800 343 4846 or 781 386 5649 Fax 781 386 5606 Cc mail Part Department polaroid com Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N11 Page 3 of 3 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croman 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 3 No 1 From Date New Products Service Support Group January 27 1999 Subject PolaColor Insight vers 2 X and Win 98 Update e Category Product Alert The purpose of this message is to alert Service providers of a problem that occurs when installing PolaColor Insight version 2 X on PC s running Window 98 Note This bulletin replaces SprintScan Bulletin V2 N 10 dated November 11 1998 Bulletin V2 10 should be discarded e Products Affected SprintScan 35 SprintScan 35ES SprintScan 35 LE e Details
341. ra Back Adaptor Mounted on Digital Palette INTRODUCTION Effective October 1995 Polaroid is shipping a new automated 35mm camera back adaptor with HR6000 and CI 5000S Digital Palettes The camera back adaptorss are designated R6000 and R5000 The R5000 camera back is also compatible with the CI3000S models As with previous camera backs the new camera allows the user to photograph an image displayed by the Digital Palette Film Recorder However the new camera increases productivity through features that provide convenience and enhanced error protection The 35mm camera back adaptor consists of a lens a shutter a logic board that controls the camera and also controls communication between the camera and the Palette and mounting interface hardware THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Unlike its predecessors the new 35mm camera back adaptor automatically loads and counts each frame operating only when the film is properly loaded It also recognizes film speed through DX encoding displaying this informa tion on a liquid crystal display The display also communicates recorder status information including film speed number of frames remaining and error messages The camera back uses a variety of 35mm film Since the image displayed by the Digital Palette is a fixed distance from the camera there is no need to focus The Palette supplies electrical power to the camera back and con
342. rder Document 990413133530JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Image Quality Green Color Cast Category Performance The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a problem that customers may experience with an overall green color cast to their images This will be apparent when an image is exposed onto Kodak Elite II film Product Affected ProPalette 7000 Details The color transmission characteristics of the green filter used in the ProPalette 7000 have changed since D ecember 1998 due to process variations in the manufacturing of the filters The color properties for which the film table was designed have changed appreciably Since the manufacturing inventory contained a mix of old and new filters the color cast problem is not apparent in all units The difficulty was not apparent in Manufacturing during final image inspection because evaluation was done on Presentation Chrome film which has different color renditions and does not exhibit this problem to such a great extent Resolution To determine if the unit has a problem expose the GRAY CARD TIF image to Elite II film and evaluate the flat field for color purity A new firmware version is under development that will correct this problem but it is not available presently This firmware will interrogate the unit serial number to determine its configuration and determine if a correction must be made to the color balance A utility to alt
343. re was released internally by Polaroid today This new version of the Palette film recorder driver software is compatible with Apple s new operating system System 8 OS8 and backward compatible with System 7 The software kits shown below will include a new CD ROM disk that contains the following TE AAE ORAN ea prope 300 pike i TS AAN HEG Wed ProPalette 8000 only Steps currently required to make this new software available in inventory are CD ROM mastering duplication and kitting As a result the Macintosh OS8 Software Upgrade kit will be available in inventory during the week of January 5 The Macintosh OS8 Kits for All Palettes will be available in inventory during the week of January 12 NOTE These new kits utilize the same Polaroid Identification PID numbers as the current kits The kit labels distinguish between the current System 7 version 4 0 4 software and the new version 4 1 2 The new labels have OS8 added to the kit name label and contain version 4 1 2 Please specify when ordering Products Affected 623879 Macintosh OS8 Kits for All Palettes 623946 Macintosh OS8 Software Upgrade All Palettes ctions Solutions Polaroid s FTP site on the Internet contains a file named PATCH412 HQX This file provides a free upgrade from version 4 0 2 distributed on diskette only and version 4 0 4 available on CD ROM only to version 4 1 2 This software patch requires either version 4 0 2 or 4 0 4 to be installed fr
344. rea for scanning 2700 x 130 at 100 scaling Selected Area Figure 9 Selected area for scanning Click on the Scan button to scan the selected area of the streak target preview image View the scanned image of the streak target at 1 1 magnification Note Scanned streak target image must be magnified to see the vertical streaking It may not be evident at lower magnifications Check the scanned image for streaks Scroll in the horizontal direction across the magnified image of the streak target Note Ifthe A D converter is defective the magnified image shows vertical lines spaced 2 pixels apart It might also show high levels of noise or contouring e Ifthe A D converter operates normally the magnified image shows smooth transitions from black to white with no vertical lines 11 Normal A D Converter No Streaks Figure 4 Install the slide scanner top cover and then return the slide scanner to the customer or to stock 12 Defective A D Converter Streaks Figure 6 Remove and replace the controller PC board Note Before replacing the controller PC board check the date code of A D converter U18 on the replacement controller PC board as explained in the Checking Date Code of A D Converter procedure e After replacing the controller PC board run the LabView test again to make sure the replacement controller PC board passes all tests and then repeat the A D Converter Streak Test procedure Parts Availability
345. readiness prior to purchase of the ColorShot printer e For Customers that already have the printer Telephone Support can quickly determine the PC s USB readiness Sample windows from USBready exe are shown on the next page Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Bulletin V1 N3 Page 1 of 2 Upgrade ayatem settware te Windows 8 fer FULL ayatem se were sapport fer USB System han ware bes USE sepport Roce mendaties Me cystom berdeare upgrade required Screen 3 after clicking on Details button on Screen 2 Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Bulletin V1 N3 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN cra 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot USB Vol 1 No 5 From New Products Service Support Group Date September 4 1998 Subject Win 95 Missing Root Hub e Category Software Info Bullet
346. rect at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Bulletin V1 N2 Page 1 of 1 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croea 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 Polaroid ColorShot USB Vol 1 No 3 From New Products Service Support Group Date July 10 1998 Subject Intel USB Ready Utility e Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this message is to alert Telephone Service providers regarding the availability of a useful USB checking utility e Products Affected Polaroid ColorShot USB printer used with Windows 95 e Details A new version 2 8 of Intel s USB Checking program has been released The new version is more user friendly than the older version The new version checks the host PC s hardware and software to determine USB readiness e Ifthe appropriate USB hardware and Windows 95 software is found The program reports System hardware has USB Support e f there is no USB host controller in the PC The program reports System Hardware DOES NOT have USB Support Recommend upgrade system hardware for USB support e Recommends that the user upgrade to Windows 98 for Full USB support A copy of USBReady exe can be downloaded from the web at the following location www usb org USB Usbready exe Suggested uses for USBready exe e For Potential customers They can check their PC for USB
347. rent in all units and cannot be determined by a date code Resolution To determine if the unit has a problem expose the GRAYCARD TIF image to Elite II film and evaluate the flat field for color purity The color should be gray without a green tint If a green tint is apparent the following procedure should be followed If the color correction is necessary then the unit serial number must be changed A new firmware version 708 has been released that will interrogate the unit serial number and make the correction to the color balance if the serial number has been modified properly The new firmware is available from the Polaroid web site The utility FSN EXE to alter the unit serial number is attached to this message and available from Service Procedure Upgrade the firmware to the ProPalette in the normal manner using the FWLOAD utility over the parallel port Attach the parallel cable between your PC and your ProPalette From the DOS prompt type FWLOAD vicntrl hex IMPORTANT Once the firmware upgrade software has begun do not attempt to interrupt the process Do not press any buttons or interrupt the power to the film recorder This can cause the flash memory in the ProPalette to become corrupted If this happens your film recorder will require service The DOS utility FWLOAD will run some preliminary checks upload the firmware to your ProPalette and instruct you to wait about 40 seconds before attempting any further action wit
348. ributed in any form without permission v4 Repair Info Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 RIB Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 01 07 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970107112250JF Product Group DIPS Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Image Quality Received on Film HORIZONTAL LINES Details Diagrams Some causes of horizontal lines in ProPalette 8000 images I Environmental conditions 1 Electromagnetic interference can cause low level horizontal line artifacts Sources of this are noisy Computer monitors and power supply transformers For sensitive 4x5 imaging applications the printer should be placed at a distance from the Computer monitor 2 Vibration since the unit takes at least 15 seconds to scan from top to bottom any significant mechanical vibration can cause horizontal artifacts This includes someone bumping the table while imaging A bump usually will cause a pair of colored lines in the image For example a gray flat field image if bumped during the red plane will leave a cyan line and a magenta line at the location of the bump Vibration noise would be uncorrelated from color plane to color plane 3 Autoluma red lines if the customer removes the dark slide before the autoluma calibration is complete then the autoluma scans will be superimposed on the image There would be widely separated red lines in the image in this case ll Unit construction 1 The parallel port
349. rm without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 02 08 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990208105356JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software Mac G3 Firmware Subject Polaroid has released firmware versions 707 and 567 for ProPalette 7000 and 8000 film recorders This new firmware version is required for those ProPalettes that will be connect to a Apple Power Macintosh G 3 series computer that has recently become available SCSI card adapters intended for the Mac G 3s operate on the PCI bus at address 1 rather than the standard address 0 This change has made it necessary to update the ProPalette firmware Please notify your Palette resellers and customers about this important new firmware upgrade for the ProPalette 7000 and 8000 now available on Polaroid s FTP site Products Affected ProPalette 7000 film recorders require firmware version 707 to operate properly with the Apple Power Macintosh G 3 contained in file PRO 7V 707 EXE Win and PRO 7V707 HQX Mac ProPalette 8000 film recorders require firmware version 567 to operate properly with the Apple Power Macintosh G 3 contained in file PRO 8V567 EXE Win and PRO 8V567 HQX Mac Actions Solutions From the following directory on Polaroid s FTP site download the appropriate file for the ProPalette film recorder to be updated These files contain a utility for instal
350. rmation sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N2 Page 2 of 2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 3 No 3 From New Products Service Support Group Date June 30 1999 Subject SCSI Troubleshooting for Windows 95 98 PC s e Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to give Telephone Service providers general SCSI bus information to help in troubleshooting common SCSI bus problems on a PC e Products Affected All SprintScan scanners running in a Windows 95 or 98 environment e Details Problem When the PolaColor Insight application opens it reports that no scanners are found Solution There are a number of steps to follow in order to have a scanner recognized on the host PC s SCSI bus Step 1 Is the scanner seen in the Device Manager See example Figure 2 One way to view the Device Manager is to right click on the My Computer icon and choose Properties Win 95 If it is listed as a Polaroid Scanner Go to Step 2 Win 98 If it is listed as an Imaging Device Go to Step 2 Win 98 If it is listed as a Polaroid Scanner Go to Step 3 Win 95 98 If it is NOT seen and the Host Adapter SCSI card is a Plug and Play type go to Step 1a Win 95 98 If it is NOT seen and the Host Adapter is NOT a Plug and Play type go to Step 1b Step 1a If the user has a PCI Plug amp Play type host ad
351. roPalette 8000 section of Polaroid s FTP Internet site The Palette ColorTune files are called CTWIN95 and CTMAC Documentation is available in a MSWord v7 0 formatted file NOTE Palette ColorTune is compatible with the ProPalette 8000 film recorder ONLY O o n CTWin95 EXE CTMac hqx colrtune doc Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission v4 Repair Info Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 RIB Document Details Product ProPalette 8000 Date 06 13 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970613160125JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Received on Film LOW INPUT VOLTAGE Details Diagrams Subject Situation In regions of the world where the input line voltage can fall under 100 Vac the ProPalette has a safety feature Power Fail signal that will shut off the CRT This was designed to prevent phosphor burns on the CRT caused by unregulated low voltages As delivered the Power Fail signal from the Low Voltage power supply trips at approximately 95 Vac Actions Solutions This Power Fail signal must be adjusted prior to sale in these regions Potentiometer R32 on the Low Volta
352. rollers with these date codes should be replaced only if these has bee laint of let LOCATED ON SIDE OF PLATFORM OPPOSITE POLAROID IMPRINT FIGURE 1 LOCATION OF DATE CODE ON AD 90 MINIROLLERS THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS 4 A T ay S POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 545 95 31 SPECIAL DATE April 20 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM DICK CURTIS SUBJECT REMOVING TRAPPED END CAPS IN 545i FILMHOLDER BACKGROUND There have been a number of 5451 Filmholders returned for repair with complaints of end caps being trapped inside The removal of end caps from this filmholder is a simple procedure which customers can easily be taught to do When you return a filmholder after removing the end cap insert the accompany ing procedure with the unit THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS TO REMOVE A FILM END CAP FROM A 545i FILMHOLDER Turn the selector lever to L load 2 Open the roller cover Roller pe eer Lay the filmholder flat and grasp under one of the adaptor clips with the tips of your fingers Firmly pull the clip upward to free it from the lower mem
353. roy in the Vale as expeditiously as possible for in depth analysis Any film samples which are available should also be forwarded with the camera Test Equipment The 636 AF camera will be tested on the B 600 or Star Testers for ambient and flash exposures provided that the IR level measures less than 390 100cfs This measurement should be made using a Polaroid IR VIS Ratio Calibrator Part 12630 available from Material Services in Bedford Massachusetts 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 A T ay POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services TECHNICAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT PRODUCT ALERT on P Int l EXP SUB P A NO 600AM 95 45 SPECIAL DATE JULY 9 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM KEVIN O NEILL SUBJECT PHOTOMETER LIGHT LEAK IN MODEL 635 636 CAMERAS BACKGROUND Camera use testing of the Model 635 and 636 cameras has revealed an intermittent light leak problem which results in black pictures Engineering analysis found that the problem is caused by ambient light piping to the photome ter from behind an erected strobe When this happens the photometer signals premature blade closure and a black or very dark picture results SOLUTION To prevent this condition from occurring a design change has been incorporated into Model 635 636 cameras manufactured since the second quarter of 1995 All Model 635 636 cameras returned for
354. rt menu and choose Printers from the settings choice Select highlight the Polaroid digital palette driver currently installed Go to the file menu and choose Document Defaults In the new window choose the Advanced Tab Under Paper size select Powerpoint 35mm if using a 35mm back Select the correct film type for your camera back under the printer features section The palette driver should retain these settings and apply them correctly each time you open Powerpoint and choose to print Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 03 10 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980310095621JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Image Quality Horizontal Lines Details Diagrams Problem The occurrence of horizontal lines across the image of a ProPalette can be the result of several problems Several of the major reasons are discussed here Solution A slow host computer may force the ProPalette to wait for data during a line scan This will result in a regular pattern of dark li
355. s connected to a computer additional user controls appear The Preview tab adds a control named Frame Number This control allows the user to select an individual frame in a filmholder to be scanned The frame number increments from 1 to 6 for the film strip holder and 1 to 4 for the slide holder The scanner automatically advances to the selected frame when the user selects the Preview button Two new selections appear in the Scanner menu when a SprintScan 4000 is detected One selection is named Eject Film This selection allows the user to automatically eject a filmholder or APS cartridge optional accessory A second selection named Update Film Carrier resets the Frame Number box to the current frame after the film carrier has been changed Adobe PhotoShop Plug in for the Macintosh A plug in installer is now part of the Insight software package for the Macintosh only The plug in works with Adobe Acrobat Adobe PhotoDeluxe or any image editing program that supports Adobe type plug ins If the user decides to use the plug in they must install it using a separate installer program that s included Contact Gerald DiBello Ce mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the info
356. s 1E1193A the reference designation of the resistor noted in the previous step is R59 4 Assemble the unit and run it through a couple of cycles to verify proper operation cn a 2 pee REPRE Microprocessor U14 bd FB 2 g Grm gt 27 00000000000000 o ch gt 1 ef KO 1 N 48 837 Eo 3 L nagnanonaa Radit a 5 gogonoog000 S Otgsngc0s0dc0g is Tam 5 2 ooooonodotoo feronerie uw at i r a a Age J O s fi p Ra p Sur hae 0 Common gage 10000 0000080000 2 a aN 5 go ow g sto 8 2 oio af t0onoooaooooooconconooot P s h u a n oe Co lt u it 5 Cooccaocoea0 7 vas Ss E Coocooeon00s pe est gz E eee a 2 s 3 8 2 O0 z 2 e 2 8 Sus s s j2 3 g Cononagoom e Sn o ine 8 amp 8 Dte n8 Sr Piece rod a G 2 ur oF Pu i a i 10 Ul4 0 OVO aon i Solder anode to R Pa wyg y pin 1 of R58 R59 wo ANODE CUT Fp ifan wk sgl Solder cathode across pins 10 and 11 of U14 FIGURE 3 y A A EEe POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 35mm Scan 95 2 SPECIAL DATE June 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT SPRINTSCAN 35 CONFIGURATION CHANGES T
357. s a Scanner Hardware Error This type of error prevents the slide scanner from e Properly performing its self test routine e Finding its analog range Investigation found that a blown SCSI interface fuse on the main controller PC board caused the error Since laptop computers do not provide termination power the slide scanner s external SCSI terminator dragged the SCSI signals to ground prohibiting the laptop computer from properly communicating with its hard drive Other Computers In some cases a blown term power fuse can cause SCSI communication failures Error messages for this type of problem can vary THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Rn POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO 35mm Scan 97 4 SPECIAL DATE December 1997 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM Gerald DiBello SUBJECT Horizontal Color Banding at Very Bottom of Scanned Image Background Typical Customer Complaint When scanning in the Portrait or the Superslide mode horizontal color banding occurs at the very bottom of the scanned image Note This problem does not occur in the Landscape mode Slide Scanners Affected e SS35 ES and PolaScan 35 with light tunnel e SS35 Plus P
358. s been observed in ProPalette units manufactured before October 1996 The serial numbers of the units are in the format K6nnna The first character K indicates the month of manufacture A M excluding and the second character 6 is the year of manufacture Required Materials and Equipment Replacement red filter part no 1E6562A Short Phillips head screwdriver Snap ring removal tool or small pliers Cotton gloves Anti static mat and wrist strap Filter Replacement Procedure CAUTION Components within ProPalette can be easily damaged by static discharge Be sure to use the anti static mat and wrist strap during this procedure 1 Turn the ProPalette unit on its side and remove the bottom access door Figure 1 2 Reach inside the compartment with the short Phillips nhead screwdriver to remove the filter wheel blinder Figure 2 3 Use the snap ring removal tool or small pliers to remove the filter wneel snap ring Figure 2 and remove the filter wheel from its pivot Access Door Figure 1 Removing the bottom access door Photo interrupter gs AT gt A Blinder Snap Stepper J Ring Motor D Shaft A D Filter Wheel Filter Wheel nn aw Pivot Figure 2 Removing the filter wheel from its pivot 4 Without removing the filter wheel from the compartment locate the red filter by observing the filter names printed on the filter wheel Note Upon direct observation the red filter does not appear to be
359. s dialog box reaches the point of Writing image to file At this point a dialog box appears with the text Unknown error 27728 or Time out error 2003 Solution Scan the image in color After scanning open the image in PhotoShop and change Mode on the Image menu to Grayscale 3 Problem Insight locks up the Macintosh when writing the scanned file to the harddrive Solution This problem is more likely to occur with pre G3 Macintosh computers and when scanning at high resolutions The frequency of this error appears low There is no workaround for this problem Recover from the error by restarting the computer one method is to hold down the Apple and Control keys and press the Power button that is on the keyboard Contact Gerald DiBello Ce mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N4 Page 2of2 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croma 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 SprintScan Vol 3 No 5 From New Products Service Support Group Date April 9 1999 Subject Blue G3 Macintosh SCSI Host Adapters e Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to provide Telephone and
360. s inside the scanner are particularly sensitive to static discharge Be sure to use an anti static mat and wrist strap during this procedure Remove the top housing as explained in Section 4 of the SprintScan 35 Slide Scanner Service Manual 2 Connect the negative lead of a dc voltage meter to the ground located on the scanner back panel THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS Check the negative VCLK_NEG and positive VCLK_POS output voltages of the vertical clock driver U9 on the Sensor PC Board as follows e Connect the positive lead of a dc voltage meter to the negative output voltage VCLK_NEG pad on the Sensor PC Board The output voltage should read 6 0 vde 5 e Connect the positive lead of a dc voltage meter to the positive output voltage VCLK_POS pad on the Sensor PC Board The output voltage should read 8 5 vde 5 If either the VCLK_NEG or VCLK_POS output voltages are out of specification replace the Sensor PC Board VCLK NEG VCLK POS Figure 1 Sensor PC Board Test Points POLAROID CORPORATION ConsumerServices Division TECHNICALSERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l exp SUB P A NO 35 mm Scan 96 1 SPECIAL DATE March 1 1996 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT LOWLEVELHORIZONTAL BANDS Back
361. s message is to alert service providers of a clarification to the ProPalette Parts Catalog Stocked Parts O nly Details Plate 5 details the component parts that make up the Front Bezel and K eyboard assembly for the ProPalette product line Information is lacking regarding the top level assembly number for the assembled Front Bezel Resolution The top level assembly number for the assembled ProPalette Front Bezel is ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Assembly Number 1F5486A 1F2534A These assemblies contain all of the components detailed in plate 5 of the ProPalette Parts Catalog Stocked Parts O nly APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 01 20 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990120133548JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Camera and Adapter Sub Assembly Category The purpose of this message is to alert service providers of a clarification to the ProPalette Parts Catalog Stocked Parts O nly Product Affected ProPalette 7000 amp 8000 Details Plate 6 of the ProPalette Parts Catalog details the component parts that make up the Camera and Adapter assembly for the ProPalette product line Information is lacking regarding the top level assembly number Resolution The top level a
362. s saved after the Scan button was selected Just the area selected Figure 6 in the Defective Preview screen is shown It is the magnified image 1 4 of a portion of the streak target produced from a slide scanner with a defective A D converter Further magnify the image to 1 1 Vertical lines can be clearly seen spaced two pixels apart which are produced by the defective A D converter Figure 6 Final scan of selected area two pixel streaks Checking Date Code of A D Converter Caution The controller PC board is sensitive to static discharges Be sure to use an anti static mat and wrist strap when removing and replacing it 1 Turn off the slide scanner 2 Unplug the AC power cord and remove it from the socket at the back of the slide scanner 3 Remove the top cover of the slide scanner as explained in the SS35 Slide Scanner Repair Manual 4 Check the date code of A D converter U18 Date code is located just below the A D converter part number Figure 7 Note If the date code of A D converter U18 is lower than 9646 Example 9645 it may be defective Perform the A D Converter Streak Test procedure to determine if it is defective If necessary replace the controller PC board e If the date code of A D converter U18 is 9646 or higher there is no need to perform the A D Converter Streak Test procedure Assuming the slide scanner has passed all other testing replace the top cover and return it to the customer 0
363. screws from the camera to clean them Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission Repair Info Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base RIB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 06 03 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970603082047JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Received on Film NON REPEATABLE ERRORS Details Diagrams Subject Situation A limited number of Digital circuit boards 1F5570A have been found to have either an unsoldered pin or cold solder joint on pin 60 of U101 The product will exhibit intermittent non repeatable errors See diagram below for location of U101 and orientation of pin 60 Actions Solutions The integrated circuit should be inspected and the problem verified If the fault is found and the repair center is a qualified surface mount repair facility the pin should be re soldered If there is any question about the ability to repair the solder joint the board should be replaced and the product calibrated fee E e a _ we Distribution APPROVALS Int l
364. se of this message is to alert service providers of the two alternate methods to activate Monitor mode in the ProPalette The first is through the LCD keypad front panel and the second is with a jumper configuration on the Digital board Monitor mode is used to communicate with the ProPalette through its serial port Product Affected ProPalette 7000 amp 8000 Details Method 1 To activate from the ProPalette LCD menu select Diagnostics from the top level menu and then select GoTo Monitor Mode from the second level menu The LCD panel will display Film Printer In Monitor Mode and control of the ProPalette passes to its EEPROM Press the Reset button on the rear of the ProPalette to restart the system and return to normal mode Method 2 To activate from the digital board the state of two startup switches J3 6 and J3 8 on the digital board must be set If both of those points are tied to ground the unit will power up in the Monitor mode All of the pins along the bottom of J3 are at ground potential The LCD panel does not work when you enter monitor mode in this manner and there is no indication that you have been successful Load up a terminal emulator to the serial port to verify that the EEPROM has control Remove the jumpers and restart the system to return to normal mode This method must be used when the firmware has become corrupt and there is only a blinking cursor on the LCD display Figure 1 Dig
365. se the dialog boxes and print the image Contact Gerald DiBello Email DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N2 Page 6of6 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croa 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 01730 PolaColor Insight Vol 2 No 4 From New Products Service Support Group Date June 28 1999 Subject PolaColor Insight Pro version 3 5 Released Category Software Info Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to provide Telephone Support and Repair organizations with information on the new features of PolaColor Insight version 3 5 Products Affected SprintScan Models 4000 35ES 35 Plus 35LE 45 Details PolaColor Insight Pro version 3 5 has been released as of the date of this Bulletin The new software has the following improvements and changes compared to version 3 1 New Feature Summary gt Scratch disk selection Macintosh only gt 12 bit per channel 36 bit raw image file format gt Autofocus control gt Profile embedding Software Availability English version available on Polaroid website at http www polaroid com service sfwdownload index html The version 3 5 software on
366. ssembly number for the assembled ProPalette Camera and Adapter is ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Assembly Number 1F2537A 1F2537A These assemblies contain all of the components detailed in plate 6 of the ProPalette Parts Catalog Stocked Parts O nly APPROVALS 1999 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 01 22 99 Product Type Film Recorder Document 990122100026JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Camera Interface Error Messages There are several errors that occur when a 35 mm camera is installed on a ProPalette which result because of defective U501 amp U505 IC s on the ProPalette digital board 1F5570A They are Film door is open error Select 6x7 camera back error The error message may remain even when the camera is removed Additionally the film may not load properly We are proposing a change to the BOM for the ProPalette digital board that would replace the CMOS chips used at U501 and U505 with LS chips The impact of this change would be to reduce the number of failures and returns from ESD that occurs at the camera interface connector The changes are old new U501 74HC244 DM74ALS244AWM ND U505 74HCT257 DM74ALS257M ND The new part numbers reflect the ordering information from the supplier D igi
367. starting up the LabVIEW IPT test software version 1 02 or higher make the following change to the normal test setup procedure 3 On the main LabVIEW window is a selection box marked CCD Config See Figure 1 SSS scanner Tester w u Select Configuration Type Here is CCD Configuration Show Image v1 02 l Jorteret option ES Serial Number or E E entiguration vy locate gmt origin GMT Origin x y GMT Angle deg Hore Mag Left vert Res RGB Left Horz Res RGB Center Vert Res RGB Right Vert Res R G B Right Horz Res R G B Macintosh HD Scanner Tester PPC R T Constants S535 E Figure 1 Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V2 N6 Page 2 of 7 e Change the selection to CCD Config 1 See Figure 2a When the LabVIEW test cycle runs the configuration data in the scanner EEPROM will be changed to operate correctly with the new CCD When the LabVIEW test is complete the new configuration is reported at the bottom right corner of the scanner test panel as CCD Configuration This window should now read a 1 see Figure 2b eco gt Config 1 Figure 2a Figure 2b f The
368. stead of one and two picture video WARRANTY Model TX 1100 and Model TX 2000 thermal printers are warranted for one year from date of original purchase AVAILABILITY The TX 1100 Printer PAL is now in stock at the Polaroid Distribution Center in Enschede TX 2200 Printers NTSC are available through Polaroid NPKK REPAIRS All repairs of these Printers should be handled through normal channels in Europe and Japan Presented below are the PID numbers of the various models TX2000 UNIVSL Japan PID 618305 TX2000 EUR Europe PID 618201 TX1100 E Europe PID 618200 TX1100 Remote Control PID 618443 A E ep POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB SPECIAL P A NO DATE TX94 5 JULY 11 1994 TECH SERVICES QUAL CONTROL MAT L SERVICES OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM NICK CURRERI SUBJECT VERTICAL LINES STRIKES IN TX1100 amp TX2000 THERMAL PRINTER IMAGES BACKGROUND Several European customer complaints of vertical lines or strikes in thermal printer images see Figure 1 on next page prompted an investigation by Polaroid It was discovered that the lines or strikes result from a residue buildup on the thermal head The buildup causes the media to travel through the printer in an intermittent drive of slip and feed slip and feed rather than in a smooth ste
369. stions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N8 Page 2 of 3 Power switch lt _ assembly wires Wire 5 wires Retainer Top left corner of Main Logic circuit board Figure 2 Wire Retainer Detail CCD board header connector CCD cable connector Front of Scanner Apply silicone sealant Silicone sealant in this area DN S Jf lt gt Applicator kS j Silicone sealant Top view of CCD board assembly Side view of CCD board assemblv Figure 3 Applying Silicone Sealer Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N8 Page 3 of 3 6 inch 15 cm E CON Cotton Tipped Applicator Aplicadore con cabeza de algodon Applicateur a embout de coton Watteapplikatoren Place silicone sealer on cotton tip Figure 4 Cotton Tipped Applicator Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this docu
370. switch to its OFF position and leave it off while doing this test Connect an external SCSI terminator to its Centronics type 50 pin connector 3 Turn on the slide scanner by setting its Power On Off 1 0 switch to On 1 The green Power LED lights to indicate that the slide scanner is turned on 4 During power up the slide scanner initiates its self test routine The yellow Ready LED is off while the slide scanner cycles through its self test routine 5 Upon completion the transporter returns to its home position and the yellow Ready LED lights steady to indicate that the slide scanner is ready to operate e Ifthe yellow Ready LED comes on or continually blinks the SCSI interface fuse is OK e Ifthe yellow Ready LED is dim under most lighting conditions it will look like it is off the SCSI interface fuse is blown Replace SCSI interface fuse as explained in the provided replacement procedure Replacing SCSI Interface Fuse CAUTION The SCSI fuse is soldered to the main controller PC board The main controller PC board is particularly sensitive to static discharges Be sure to use an anti static mat and wrist strap during this procedure 1 Remove the top housing as explained in Section 4 of the Slide Scanner Repair Manual 2 Unsolder the SCSI interface fuse Figure 1 and then replace it with a new one Notes When replacing it be very careful not to damage the main controller PC board e Fuse Rating 1 0A Fas
371. t Action Surface Mount e Fuse Part Number 5N0008001 3 Re install the top housing as explained Section 4 of the Slide Scanner Repair Manual SCSI Fuse SCSI Fuse SS35 SS35 ES SS35 PLUS Figure 1 Replacing SCSI Interface Fuse on Main Controller PC Board Parts Availability Fuse 5N0008001 and Terminator 1E5543A are available from Material Services Department Polaroid Corporation 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Please order from normal sources POLAROID CORPORATION ConsumerServices Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA01 730 REPAIR INFO BULLETIN Int l EXP SUB R I B NO 35 mm Scan 96 1 SPECIAL DATE March 1 1996 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT CCD FILTER TEST Purpose To verify that the CCD filter functions correctly Ifit functions incorrectly vertical grey bands will be visible across the entire image Required Materials and Software e Test slide horizontal color bars multi color bar 13638 and magenta test target 13639 e Sample images scanned with defective filter on diskette e Adobe PhotoShop MAC version e SprintScan 35 plug in Filter Test Procedure 1 Scan the test slide using the following parameters e AreaofInterest Allcolor bars red through magenta e Film Table Fuji Super 6 400 e AutoExposure OFF e All other Settings OFF Ata magn
372. t replace an old style door with door 776086K which has the new draft angle you must also replace the bottom cover with bottom cover 776083F Salvage all reuseable old style doors and bottom covers Use the salvaged parts if you must replace an old style door or old style bottom cover If a door defect centers around the roller system try to replace only the roller system rather than the entire front door assembly THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS ILD T ep POLAROID CORPORATION Camera Products Services TECHNICAL SERVICES 201 Burlington Road DEPARTMENT Bedford MA 01730 REPAIR INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB P A NO SPEC 95 19 SPECIAL DATE AUGUST 14 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM ED DACEY SUBJECT SPECTRA IMAGE DOOR LATCH BUTTONS MADE FROM MOLDS A B C amp D BACKGROUND From September of 1993 to May of 1995 all Spectra Image cameras made at the Vale of Leven were assembled with door latch buttons made from molds marked A B C or D The piece parts made from these molds are not correct and have a tendency to either make the door difficult to close or make the button too easy to remove from the camera Molds marked 5 through 8 are made to original specifications and piece parts from these molds do not cause either of the noted problems See the illustration below for a comparison of t
373. t step three times 3 Remove Film Pack Are no wires seated xp 16 Reseat amp repeat step 1 4 Advance reverse the Clutch Gedr yes three times Is it slipping xo 16 Replace defective Clutch Gear Spring 5 Look through Viewfinder Recock yes Spring witness mark visible p 16 Broken post on Mainframe 6 Remove Rear Panel Is pin moving yes tp 16 TMC pivot hole inner surface is damaged 7 Drop the Shutter amp unseat the yes bellows Is Baffle damaged p 16 Replace the Baffle Are adhesives under TMC holding 16 Remove by cleaning Mainframe amp possibly replacing TMC Carefully remove TMC VMC junction at pivot tight xo 16 Adjust VMC pivot tabs or replace VMC Is hinge pin tight at TMC o 16 TMC pivot hole inner surface is damaged Replace TMC or check for bent hinge pin TMC Taking Mirror Carrier MF Mainframe VMC Viewing Mirror Carrier ID Pivot hole Inside Diameter Inner Surface POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Service Support GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 REPAIR INFORMATION Int l EXP SUB RIB NO JOSH 95 25 SPECIAL DATE NOVEMBER 21 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM DWAYNE BILLINGSLEY SUBJECT RECOCK LINK SPRING POST REPAIR Introduction There have been a number of reports of breaking recock l
374. tacted on the subject of what to use to clean tape glue epoxy etc from the optically coated surface of the CRT faceplate Alcohol works well for fingerprints and ordinary dirt A commercial product called Goo Gone works well for tape glue It s available from hardware stores etc Another commercial product called Jasco removes most things including epoxy It s available from industrial supply sources DO NOT use Acetone It can damage the coating a fF CRT Bulletin PD CRT Bulletin dox Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 08 26 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 980826161619JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Software ProPalette Error Logging Details Diagrams PERFORMANCE This document describes the use of the host side utility ERRSTAT EXE Should an error occur in the film printer it is temporarily displayed on the LCD and simultaneously recorded in flash memory The log is accessible at Polaroid Service Centers to speed the turnaround of units sent i
375. tch Block now has a tab added to it which helps ensure proper orientation 4 THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS PART AVAILABILITY The Flex Plug Switch Block Issue 05 P N 1A2905A is available now from Material Services in Cambridge MA Order from normal sources When issue 05 parts are obtained discard existing stocks of the part which are older than Issue 5 gor tob Rage 41 Improved design of Joshua Flex Plug Switch Block y A E eee POLAROID CORPORATION Customer Support Services GLOBAL TECHNICAL 201 Burlington Road SERVICES Bedford MA 01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO JOSH 94 12 SPECIAL DATE MARCH 31 1994 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM RUSSELL D BATTLE REAR LENS BAFFLE ADDED TO JOSHUA BASEBLOCK SUBJECT BACKGROUND To minimize the potential problem of light spilling outside normal paths in the Joshua Shutter Assembly a new part was added to the Baseblock and the Baseblock itself was modified to accept the part in Joshua series Cameras manufactured after August 1993 The new part is a Rear Lens Baffle P N 1A2723A shown in Fig 1 It can be used ly with the modified Baseblock Assembly P N 1A2573A earlier Baseblocks do not se clearance beneath a tab to allow insertion of the Rear Lens Baffle PART AVAILABILITY The Rear Lens Baffle and
376. te connector J7 and disconnect it 10 Identify the wire from pin 4 and trace it back Cut and strip the wire about six inches from the connector 11 Solder one of the trimmed posistors to the wire Use black electrical tape to fully cover the soldered joints and the posistor 12 Reconnect J7 13 Using a permanent marker place a black dot next to the S on the configuration code label 14 Reassemble the camera and test it to be certain that it is functioning properly PARTS AVAILABILITY Posistors CPS477 labeled AN RXE 025 by their manufacturer RAYCHEM are available from Material Services in Cambridge Massachusetts Please order from normal sources 4 ye i POLAROID a Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO ID4 95 20 SPECIAL pate FEB 10 1995 TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM DICK CURTIS SUBJECT BLADES ON ID4 SHUTTER IE8400A STAYING OPEN BACKGROUND Some D4 cameras manufactured between July 1994 and November 1994 are exhibiting a shutter blades open problem which makes the camera non functional The cause has been traced to a cushion pad used during manufacture of the camera shutter Cameras assembled during the noted period use shutters which have a single piece foam cushion under the retainer plate See accompanying exp
377. tem always make sure that the scanner is turned on first and then the host computer When turning off the system its the opposite always turn off the host computer first and then the scanner 13 During power up the scanner initiates its self test routine The yellow Ready LED is off while the scanner cycles through its self test routine 14 Upon completion of the self test routine the yellow Ready LED continually blinks flashes indicating that the CPU has been replaced 15 Power down wait approximately 10 seconds and then power up again This action resets the system 16 Upon completion of the self test routine passed the transporter returns to its home position and the yellow Ready LED lights steady to indicate that the scanner is ready to operate Note If the yellow Ready LED continually blinks flashes the scanner failed its self test routine Check and reseat the CPU if necessary and then repeat the power down power up sequence 17 During the first scan and each subsequent scan that detects drift in the lamp or the front end the scanner initiates its calibration routine Parts Availability Replacement CPU 1F4554A is available from Material Services Department Polaroid Corporation 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Please order from normal sources Customer Support Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 ILD LEE ep POLAROID CORPORATION TECHNICAL SERVICES DEPART
378. ten occur a When doing a Preview scan b Immediately after the user sees the message Insert carrier until scanner grabs it and the carrier is not properly inserted and ready Solution Review the following procedure for inserting a carrier with the user The procedure must be followed before clicking on the Preview button a Push the carrier into the scanner until the activity lamp the yellow or green lamp this depends on the date the scanner was manufactured turns off b At this point the user should let go of the carrier and let the scanner pull it inside The holder automatically positions itself and is ready for scanning When the carrier is in the ready position the activity lamp is on steady and has stopped blinking c The user should click on the Preview button only after Step a and b are completed Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N4 Page 1 of 2 2 Problem Customer chooses any of the black and white films in the Profiles menu on the Preview tab or moves the Saturation slider on the Color tab to the B amp W position and clicks the Preview button The preview works normally After the user clicks on the Scan button the Progres
379. th a short term and a long term solution to the pod smear problem by making changes in the processing chemistry The Services Group is expected to manage the situation with film replacement in the meantime Also as a preventative step the customer should be advised that storing the film at high temperatures would increase the likelihood of this problem Refrigeration is the best storage condition but at minimum the film should be stored in a cool dry environment The film should be allowed to reach room temperature before being used Contact Direct questions or unmanageable situations to Polaroid Corporation Worldwide Customer Support Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Attention Phil Cravotta Phone 781 386 5651 E mail cravotp polaroid com Distribution Polaroid Service Centers Polaroid Service Bulletin Worldwide Customer Support Services No PAF091900 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Tel 781 386 5651 Fax 781 386 5611 Subject TPX Film Speed Deviation Author Philip J Cravotta Date September 21 2000 Service Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to alert service providers to a deviation in the performance of a specific film manufacturing cycle Product Type TPX 8x10 Radiographic Transparency Film Manufacturing Codes The following positive codes and expiration dates are affected JOxx173 September 2001 JOxx237 September 2001 Issue An increase in sensitivity by a f
380. the H Monitor PC generic 1 8 gam icc profile and hold down the Ctrl key notice that a sign appears to the right of the cursor Drag the copy to the Color folder in the other open Explorer window This action will place a copy of the monitor profile with the name unchanged in the Color folder f Close both Explorer windows Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above PolaColor Insight Service Bulletin V2 N2 Page 2of6 Windows NT4 Open an Explorer window on the Desktop b Use the Explorer to open the Polaroid Profiles folder in the following path C Program Files Common Files Polaroid Imaging Profiles c Open the Profiles folder so its contents appear in the right hand side of the window Scroll down to find the profile named Monitor PC generic 1 8 gam icc d Open a second Explorer window on the Desktop so that both windows are visible and they do not overlap each other Find the Color Folder in the following path C WINNT SYSTEM32 Color Open the Color folder so its contents appear in the right hand pane of the open window e Point to the icon for the H Monitor PC generic 1 8 gam icc profile and hold down the Ctrl key notice that a sign appears to the right of t
381. the browser application Note The plug in is an English only version and is scheduled to be localized and released on newer versions of the ColorShot software CD ROM The software has the following features e Works with Netscape version 4 or later e Capture and print images directly from the worldwide web e Captures jpeg bmp and tiff images only e The software has controls and options for Image rotation Fill frame Best fit IQA including sharpening Print preview option Number of copies to print Installation a Download the plug in to your local hard drive b Run the downloaded Plug in exe file by double clicking on the icon c Files are unpacked in the Windows Temp directory the default location The files in the Temp directory can be deleted after the installation is complete d The files will automatically be loaded in the correct locations in Netscape Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot Bulletin V1 N1 Page 1 of 2 Using the Software a Go to a web location where a picture you want to print is located b If it s a picture you can see on the page place the cursor over the picture and right click If the image is a link the picture
382. the following methods 1 Look at the version number printed on the ColorShot CD ROM 2 Open the Printers folder and select the ColorShot USB printer icon Right click on the icon and choose Properties Choose the Graphics tab in the Properties window that opens Click on the About button and the window that appears will show the version number The problem happens because PolaColor Insight version 2 X contains a newer version of IQA than the one installed by the ColorShot Software This problem will not occur if the user has version 1 X or later of the software Use the following steps to fix this problem Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above Polaroid ColorShot USB Bulletin V1 N7 Page 1 of 2 Disconnect the USB cable from the back of the ColorShot Printer Delete PolaColor Insight using the Add Remove programs function Delete ColorShot IQA using the Add Remove programs function Delete the ColorShot USB printer that s inside the Printers folder by Right Clicking on its icon and choosing Delete Delete the entire folder named Polaroid Imaging that can be found in the path C Program Files Common Files Polaroid Imaging 6 Find the file Pltbxc dll and delete it 7 Re start the PC
383. the middle of the CPU and two fingers underneath it Evenly squeeze the replacement CPU into place Note The replacement CPU should be close to flush and parallel with the top of its socket when it is properly seated Universal PLCC Figure 2 CPU Replacement 10 Install the scanner cover as explained in the SprintScan 35mm Scanner Service Manual 11 Plug the AC power cord into the socket of the scanner and then plug it into an AC power receptacle 12 Turn on the scanner by setting its Power On Off 1 0 switch to On 1 The yellow Ready LED blinks Note After CPU replacement the power up sequence must be cycled twice to turn on the scanner WARNING When turning on the system always make sure that the scanner is turned on first and then the host computer When turning off the system its the opposite always turn off the host computer first and then the scanner 13 During power up the scanner initiates its self test routine The yellow Ready LED is off while the scanner cycles through its self test routine 14 Upon completion of the self test routine the yellow Ready LED continually blinks flashes indicating that the CPU has been replaced 15 Power down wait approximately 10 seconds and then power up again This action resets the system 16 Upon completion of the self test routine passed the transporter returns to its home position and the yellow Ready LED lights steady to indicate that the scanner is rea
384. tion Repair Recock Link File this area smooth s j Hook 1A2678A Repair Recock Link if necessary prng 70 Spring Hook in position cavity Figure 2 Figure 3 Parts Availability Repair recock link spring hook 1A2678A will be available from Material Services in Bedford Massa chusetts after Please order from normal sources eee POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l EXP SUB P A NO GEN 94 4 JUNE 27 1994 SPECIAL DATE TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM DICK CURTIS SUBJECT SUSPECT AD 90 MINIROLLERS 1B8281A PID 618492 BACKGROUND Reports of film spread problems have been traced to AD 90 minirollers with date codes of E412A and E413A Figure 1 The problem which is not customer correctable is evidenced as incomplete coverage CORRECTIVE ACTION Customers who complain of incomplete coverage problems should be asked to remove and examine the AD 90 minirollers If the date code is either E412A or E413A the customer should be told to stop using the minirollers and a new set of minirollers should be sent at no charge This assumes that the minirollers have been properly cleaned and that debris could not be causing the incomplete spread Please note that not all minirollers with these date codes are defective Muini
385. to provide a guide for obtaining the correct aspect ratio image for the format of the film you are exposing on your Polaroid Palette film recorder Using these methods will help you avoid using interpolation fabricating data to correct the size the image Following this procedure will ensure that you obtain the sharpest output possible by utilizing Polaroid s programmable resolution feature of the Palette color film recorders The complete Word formatted file is attached sizing doc Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission M4 Product Alert Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Ke7 PA Document Details Product R 6000 Date 05 27 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970527134404JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Received on Film MOUNTING SCREWS Details Diagrams PROBLEM Production of R6000 camera from 4 4 97 to 5 13 97 have too much paint on the thumb screws which causes a tight fit when mounting the camera SOLUTION To remedy the problem run the thumb screws through a 1 4 20 machine die This will clean out the excess paint in the threads There is no need to remove the thumb
386. to receive hex file Press Pg Up R lt cr gt Type in the fully qualified path to the xxCNTRL HEX file if it isnt in the active directory d path xx CNTRL HEX lt cr gt xx KA for the ProPalette 8000 xx VT for the ProPalette 7000 After the upload is complete wait until the flash is programmed and the FLASHMAN menu re appears Note that code block 1 is back Swap between virtual flash To change between each virtual flash type in the commands v lt cr gt and then either O lt cr gt or 1 lt cr gt depending on which virtual flash you want to display Erase entire vFlash1 Change to virtual flash 1 by typing in the commands V lt cr gt and then 1 lt cr gt vFlash1 will be displayed see Fig 2 To erase vFlash1 type the command E lt cr gt The system will ask for a confirmation and you must respond with Y lt cr gt When the screen refreshes all of the code blocks will be gone and the display will state that vFlash1 is empty The default code blocks will be initialized when the unit is re set and the default user parameters will be in effect Erase single code block Change to virtual flash 1 by typing in the commands V lt cr gt and then 1 lt cr gt vFlash1 will be displayed To remove the Error History type in the command R lt cr gt and then 20 lt cr gt When the screen refreshes verify that code block 20 has been deleted To delete a different code block determine the number of the code block from the display of vFlashl in
387. to simulate the door of the 35 mm camera As such it only has meaning when the switches S1 S3 are set to simulate a 35 mm camera USE 1 Apply power to the ProPalette and wait until the Ready message is displayed on the LCD panel 2 Remove the 35 mm camera from the unit the LCD panel should indicate Out of Film on the bottom line 3 Set all of the switches to the OFF position 4 Insert the tool into the camera connector with the switch bank on the top INDICATIONS 1 S3 Camera Back While there are eight possible combinations for these switches only six combinations have meaning at this time The remaining two are reserved for future use The LCD panel will display the camera back type according to the following table S1 S2 s3 Message 0 0 0 35 mm Out of Film 1 0 0 Pack 0 1 0 Auto 1 1 0 4x5 0 0 1 6x7 l 0 1 6x8 Table 1 S4 Film Door Switch With S1 S3 in the OFF position changing S4 to a 1 should indicate the door open The transition from 1 to 0 initiates the film load sequence S4 Message 1 Film Door Open 0 Loading Film Film Load Failed Out of Film Table 2 AVAILABILITY This tool part number 13705 is available from Polaroid Corporation Technical Services Department 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Services Manufacturing Int l Subs
388. topic was initially discussed in the Lotus Notes Knowledge Base article 98102913213 1JF Resolution The color mentioned in the preceding paragraph refers to the glass seal of the CRT observed through the neck connector It is necessary for the Service technician to verify the type of CRT by observing the color of the glass seal at the neck of the CRT before they enter the serial number into flash memory The outer shell of the chassis must be removed but no further disassembly is required to conduct this inspection APPROVALS 1998 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 11 30 98 Product Type Film Recorder Document 981130095843JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware Modified Testing Sequence Category Performance The purpose of this message is to alert regional service providers of a change to the recommended testing sequence for all ProPalette Product Affected ProPalette 7000 and ProPalette 8000 Details There have been instances reported where a burn may have occurred on a ProPalette CRT during Service due to either a hardware fault or corrupted firmware Resolution To reduce the possibility of this happening it is suggested that before a unit is powered up for service the socket at the base of the CRT is unplug
389. tremely warped Illustrator 7 and 8 The developer of the program Graphx knows about these problems and is presently fixing them but the shipping version will not have any fixes Resolution An update has been made available for Quark 4 0 and above userfrom the developer web site at http www graphx com support rasterplus_ macintosh updates203 htm When you connect to this link scroll down to find four Polaroid specific PPD files The PPD file will resolve the random Postscript errors that have been generated from printing directly out of Quark 4 0 and later Download the appropriate PPD file from the web site Place this file in the System folder Extensions folder Printer Descriptions folder Thus replacing the existing RasterPlus or device specific PPD Restart the computer In RasterPlus 2 03 go to the tools menu and select create printer You will be prompted to name the printer Name and click OK RasterPlus will now create a new desktop printer using the new PPD file Launch Quark under the file menu go to Page Setup Once in page setup select the setup tab Change Printer Description selection to the PPD we ve just added Click on the Pagesetup button at the bottom of the dialog box This will bring up your LaserWriter Postscript printer pagesetup preferences Format for Should be set to the RasterPlus printer you want to use Paper Should match the media you are using Orientation Should match your expected output
390. trols the exposing of the film A pair of thumb screws secure the camera back to the Palette The following are the PID numbers for the respective units CAMERA BACK ADAPTOR 620235 R6000 620236 R5000 AVAILABILITY The R6000 and R5000 camera back adaptors are available as finished goods items SERVICE POLICY US If customers have problems with the camera back adaptor the film recorder User Manual instructs them to call the Polaroid Technical Assistance Hotline 1 800 432 5355 Mon Fri 8 AM 8 PM EST If the Technical Assistance Representative determines remedial actions over the phone cannot resolve the problem the customer will be instructed to return the defective R6000 R5000 camera back adaptor prepaid and insured in the original or comparable packaging to Polaroid Industrial Repair 2020 Swift Drive Oak Brook IL 60521 Attention Industrial Repair Non US Customers outside the U S must contact the nearest Polaroid Office addresses are in the User s Manual which come with the Digital Palette recorder EARLY RETURNS PROGRAM There is no early returns program WARRANTY POLICY All R5000 R6000 camera back adaptors are warranted for one year from the date of purchase OUT OF WARRANTY POLICY The procedures will be the same as they are for warranty repairs except the Customer will charged for work performed parts and labor PARTS DOCUMENTATION Parts and Documentation for the LCD Projectors wil
391. ts Also when directly File Printing to RasterPlus all the necessary fonts are automatically included before printing Either way you can finally say goodbye to font substitution errors NEW JPEG EXIF and Multipage Bitmap Support Most modern digital cameras export their images as multi page bitmap files usually EXIF Simply drag and drop the camera files into RasterPlus v3 0 and instantly print NEW Tab View Print Queues Because RasterPlus Windows Edition is a true multi task print application several print queues can be used at once Each print queue can be assigned different properties and even different printers all operating at the same time To easily manage each print queue an intuitive Tab View is used so you can quickly switch from one to another NEW Automatic Save State Once you tailor RasterPlus to your liking it automatically saves before you quit The next time you start RasterPlus all program settings including print queues and window sizes are restored to the way you left them RasterPlus Version 3 0 3 Page 3 ALL NEW Web Ready Print Logs Keeping track of what you print is now easier than ever with the new Web ready HTML print log in RasterPlus Each print is recorded with the time and owner name so you can easily account for your print jobs Better yet the print log can be accessed and printed within RasterPlus or from any Web browser on the network NEW Automatic Internet Updates RasterPlus now features
392. two sys files are in a compressed CAB format on the Windows 98 installation CD and therefore not easy to get One way to get the files is to extract them with a shareware application called WinZip that s available in many locations on the Worldwide Web or direct from htttp www winzip com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N3 Page 4 of 7 System Properties 2 x General Device Manager Hardware Profiles Performance View devices by type C View devices by connection 4 CDROM H Disk drives Display adapters Floppy disk controllers Hard disk controllers i E Keyboard Monitor H A Mouse Network adapters lt p Polaroid Scanner lt gt POLAROID 35MM a Ports COM amp LPT SCSI controllers Sound video and game controllers m System devices uen H A o H A g Properties Refresh Remove Print cma Figure 2 Windows 95 Device Manager Example Shows listing for SprintScan 35 Host Adapter Type Miniport Driver Model amp Version Adaptec AHA Plug n Play Aic78xx mpd 2940 amp 2940W ver 2 3 2940AU 2940UW Adaptec AHA Plug n Play Aic78u2 mpd 2940U2W vers 3 03 2930U2 Adaptec AHA P
393. ubleshooting procedure and replace any film held by customers who have this problem Corrective Action Film return issues should be dealt with on an individual basis Replace the customers defective film with film coupons or film whichever is appropriate United States customers only after replacing the customers film and until further notice ask the customer to mail the defective film back to Polaroid for analysis Inform the customer that Polaroid in appreciation for their effort will send them an additional film coupon for each pack they send in Provide the customer with a SCOPUS reference number that should be included on the return The film should be mailed to the following address Polaroid Corporation 920 Winter Street Waltham MA 02451 Attn Anne O Neil Phone 978 386 5507 Contact Please direct questions to Phil Cravotta Worldwide Customer Support Services 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 USA Phone 781 386 5651 E mail cravotp polaroid com Distribution Polaroid Service Centers Polaroid Service Bulletin Worldwide Customer Support Services No PAF101000 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA 01730 Tel 781 386 5651 Fax 781 386 5611 Subject Pod Smear Author Philip J Cravotta Date August 3 2000 Service Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to alert service providers to a deviation in the quality and or performance of a specific film manufacturing cycle Produ
394. unknown ASYNC_FB_MEMORY_FAILURE HE 20 Frame Buffer mem failed ASYNC_BAD_CAMERA_FUSE HE 21 Camera fuse is blown ASYNC_BAD_CB HE 22 Unknown camera back ASYNC_DOOR_OPEN HE 23 Film door is open ASYNC_SHUTTER HE 24 Shutter failed to open ASYNC_LOAD_FAIL HE 25 Film load failed ASYNC_FILM_JAM HE 26 Film is jammed ASYNC_CAL_REQFL_TOO_LARGE HE 27 ASYNC_CAL_REQFL_TOO_SMALL HE 28 ASYNC_CAL_INTERNAL_ERROR HE 29 ASYNC_CAL_LUMA_NOT_SMOOTH HE 80 ASYNC_CAL_VIDEO_NOT_SMOOTH HE 81 ASYNC_CAL_RESERVED3 HE 82 ASYNC_CAL_RESERVED2 HE 83 ASYNC_CAL_RESERVED1 HE 34 ASYNC_LAST_HARD_ERROR HE 35 Must be LAST SAMPLE REPORT The following is a sample report generated by ERRSTAT EXE errstat Reports accumulated film printer errors Version 564 704 Compiled on Jun 9 1998 Stats read Tue Aug 25 08 44 12 1998 serial number A6020H Analog version 4 Digital version 7 Video version 2 Picture Count 0 Getting stats from film printer Could take 30 seconds ERROR_HISTORY last reset Thu Jul 09 08 38 08 1998 STARTUP_AND_ASYNC_HDW_ERRORS Async Hardware Which Count HE 1 24 Which Count SOFTWARE ERRORS AUTOLUMA_ERRORS LastPicNum 0 Startup Diagnostic Error H LastPicNum Error Histogram Unit just powered on istogram There are 2 stored software errors There are 0 stored autoluma errors 0O SWERR expmemry
395. ure 1 the voltage should be 8 5 VDC 5 volts IF EITHER OF THESE VOLTAGES ARE OUT OF SPEC THE SENSOR BOARD MUST BE REPLACED WITH A NEW ONE VCLK NEG VCLK POS FIGURE 1 SENSOR BOARD TEST POINTS POLAROID CORPORATION ConsumerServices Division 201 Burlington Road Bedford MA01730 PRODUCT ALERT Int l exp sus L__ sPECIAL TECHNICALSERVICES DEPARTMENT P A NO 35 mm Scan 95 5a DATE March 1 1996 TECH SERVICES MATLSERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM JIM FEE SUBJECT STREAKS Problem A SprintScan 35 mm scanner has been recently returned from the field with a streaking problem Upon close examination it was determined that this particular scanner had been updated with an issue 02 Controller PC Board and an issue 02 Sensor PC Board A defective vertical clock driver U9 on the Sensor PC Board was positively identified as the cause of the streaking This malfunction requires special attention because aside from the streaking problem the scanner functions normally in every way The streaks were not visible in all images and it was most likely that this scanner would have passed its LabView test Due to this subtle scanner malfunction it is recommended that all scanners returned for repair should be checked out to make sure that the vertical clock driver U9 on the Sensor PC Board functions properly Checking Vertical Clock Driver Figure 1 CAUTION The PC board
396. ure of C5 causes the lower data tube to not fire CORRECTIVE ACTION An Engineering Change Notice has been issued for the data board print Hua Jung Co LTD has been removed as an approved source for these capacitors leaving Siemans as the only approved vendor The Siemans capacitors are blue and carry part number 1A4814A Materials Services has placed an order for the Siemans capacitors but these components are a long lead item and are not expected to be available until the end of August It is suggested that defective boards be replaced and that faulty boards be held until Siemans capacitors are available At that time replace C3 and C5 with the blue Siemans capacitors THIS BULLETIN SHOULD BE FILED IN THE SERVICE MANUAL OF THE PRODUCT TO WHICH IT REFERS y yy IED ee st POLAROID CORPORATION Consumer Services Division TECHNICAL SERVICES 784 Memorial Drive DEPARTMENT Cambridge MA 02139 PRODUCT ALERT Int l E P A NO ID4 94 19 SUB TECH SERVICES MAT L SERVICES QUAL CONTROL OPERATIONS TO LIST FROM DICK CURTIS DWAYNE BILLINGSLEY SUBJECT INSTALLING POSISTORS IN CONFIGURATION S CAMERA HEADS BACKGROUND Problems have been reported with ID4 camera heads bearing configuration code S indicating the new shutter which were shipped from the factory after August 8 1994 The problem could manifest itself by the overheating and actual burning of the sole
397. vices Manufacturing Int l Subsidiaries CPS Operations Engineering Special CPS Materials Design 1997 Polaroid Corporation All rights reserved Material may not be reproduced or distributed in any form without permission EI Service Bulletin Polaroid Knowledge Base EISB Document Details Product ProPalette 7000 ProPalette 8000 Date 07 29 97 Product Type Film Recorder Document 970729141654JF Product Group PDI Posted By Jordan Freedman Category Hardware UNKNOWN EXTENDED SENSE ERROR Details Diagrams Problem A user will report the occurrence of an Unknown Extended Sense Error being displayed by the application software while printing to a ProPalette Reason This message is reported by the application when an unknown error is reported back on the SCSI bus from the ProPalette An unknown error is only an error which has an id number not listed in the driver s database of errors Solution When the software reports Unknown hardware error the hardware has the issue stored in the diagnostics area On the ProPalettes use the keypad go to diagnostics show last error Record the message that is displayed Sometimes Diagnostics show last error gives us a secondary or derivative error that masks the original error A way around this is to keep an eye on the LCD and try to record the original error before it gets bumped by subsequent errors The last error record
398. w In most cases you will have to re start your PC when the installation is complete Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of printing If you have any questions regarding this document please refer to the information sources outlined above SprintScan Service Bulletin V3 N3 Page 7 of 7 Polaroid Digital Products Service BULLE TIN croa 201 Burlington Rd Bedford MA 017030 SprintScan Vol 3 No 4 From New Products Service Support Group Date April 7 1999 Subject SprintScan 4000 amp Insight Software for Macintosh v3 0 Known Problems e Category El Service Bulletin The purpose of this bulletin is to give Telephone Service providers information regarding known problems with PolaColor Insight version 3 0 for the Macintosh when used with the SprintScan 4000 e Products Affected SprintScan 4000 e Details The following is a list of problems that might be reported by customers using the SprintScan 4000 with PolaColor Insight version 3 0 on a Macintosh computer The problems will be fixed in version 3 1 of PolaColor Insight Version 3 1 is scheduled for release in April 1999 1 Problem Unknown error message type 173XX to 174XX where XX is a number from 00 to 99 is seen by the user These error messages will most of
399. ware Software Received on Film IMAGE SPACING Details Diagrams Problem A small group of ProPalette s were delivered to Distribution that might exhibit an uncertainty in the inter frame gap on 35 mm film This problem is a result of a planned improvement to the Richo camera back used in the ProPalette and manifests itself with inconsistent spacing between the images Reason The suspect camera can be identified by the color of the printed circuit board material that supports the contacts that provide the interface between the camera and the ProPalette A brown board was used on the earlier design camera and will not exhibit the problem A green board is used on the newer design and will exhibit the problem dependent on the date of the firmware release Solution Firmware ver 562 dated May 23 1997 for the ProPalette 8000 and ver 702 dated April 29 1997 for the ProPalette 7000 is subject to the failure An interim release to the firmware ver 562 dated July 8 1997 for the ProPalette 8000 and ver 702 dated July 1 1997 for the ProPalette 7000 will resolve the problem The version date can be determined by selecting Diagnostics Power On Message from the ProPalette LCD display Any unit that has a serial number with the format 8G7nnna for the ProPalette 8000 or 7G7nnna for the ProPalette 7000 will have the correct firmware installed Distribution APPROVALS Int l EXP CPS Tech Ser
400. ystem assuming C is the letter of their root drive b Right click on the file name and choose Properties In the Properties window that appears choose the Version tab Read the version number c Ifthe version number is earlier than 4 00 953 you should replace it with the newer version d Ask the customer to make a copy of the existing Lpt vxd file in case something happens to the new version file By making a copy you can always go back to the old file if it s needed e Use the Explorer to search for the Utility folder on the ColorShot CD ROM Find the file named UpgradeLPTdriver exe Double click on this file to launch it It will unpack the new Lpt vxd file to a location you choose default location is Windows Temp f Copy the new Lpt vxd file to C Windows System g Restart the PC and try printing again 4 New Test Images The Samples folder on the ColorShot CD ROM contains two new sample images These images are intended for use by the customer to help test the operation of the printer These images look best when printed with IQA turned on a Fish is an image that should be printed in Landscape mode b Flowers is an image that should be printed in Portrait mode Contact Gerald DiBello Cc mail DIBELLO GERALD Internet dibellg polaroid com Polaroid s Electronic Imaging Systems service bulletins are subject to change as necessary The information above was believed to be correct at the time of pri

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Fisher & Paykel DE08 User's Manual  ANNUAL RECURRENCY TRAINING ULM/DPM  Pyramid Car Audio CDR-39M User's Manual  UltraGAPS™ Coated Slides Instruction Manual with Protocols  VOIIS V7 / V7g    American Standard 2506.101.002 Installation Guide  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file